t7030 PDF

T7030
T7040
T7050
T7060
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Electro-magnetic Interference (EMC)
This tractor complies strictly with the European Regulations on electro-magnetic

emissions. However, interference may arise as a result of add-on equipment which
may not necessarily meet the required standards. As such interference can result in
serious malfunction of the unit and/or create unsafe situations, you must observe the
following:
• Ensure that each piece of non-New Holland equipment fitted to the tractor bears
the CE mark.
• The maximum power of emission equipment (radio, telephones, etc.) must not
exceed the limits imposed by the national authorities of the country where you
use the tractor.
• The electro-magnetic field generated by the add-on system should not exceed
24 V/m at any time and at any location in the proximity of electronic components.
Failure to comply with these rules will render the New Holland warranty null and void.

CONTENTS
Title Page
Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

To the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--2
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3
Ecology and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--14
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--19
Airborne Noise Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Electrical Power Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--22
Handbrake, Throttle and Foot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--30
Instrument Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32
Analogue/Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--35
Power Command Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--67
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--87
Section 3 -- Field Operation

Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2
Boosting the Tractor Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
Engine Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
Engine Speed Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
Headland Turn Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
Fast Steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--24
Rear Power Take--Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--26
Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--40
Electronic Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--57
Load Sensing Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--69
Electronic Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--75
Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--75
Three--point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--93
Quick Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--99
Linkage Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--103
Drawbars and Towing Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--106
Trailer Braking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--119
Front Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--126
Rear Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--134
Ballasting and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--144

Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Guard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
Lubrication and Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
Servicing: When Warning Lights Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--15
50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17
100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--30
300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--29
600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--33
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--40
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--46
Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--54
General Maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--55
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--73
Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
3-point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--11
Section 6 -- Accessories
Intelliview II Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Engine Coolant Immersion Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
Transmission Oil Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
Rotating Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--4
Auxiliary Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--4
40 Amp Socket and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--5
Battery Isolator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--6
Dynamic Front Fenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--7

Section 7 -- Specification
General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5
Lubricant and Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Maximum Operating Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Rear Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Three-Point Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
Front 3--Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
Front Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
Hardware Torque Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1

BLANK

SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TO THE OWNER SAFETY
GENERAL Pages 1--7 to 1--13 inclusive list the precautions to

be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the others. Read the safety precautions and follow the
correct procedure for running--in, driving and advice offered before operating the tractor.
operating and for the maintenance of your new
tractor. Read this Manual carefully. Your tractor is FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE
intended for use in normal and customary
agricultural applications.
In Section 8, at the back of this Manual, you will find
the 50--hour service reports.
If at any time you require advice concerning your
tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorised
dealer. He has factory trained personnel, genuine After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take
manufacturers’ parts and the necessary equipment your tractor, together with this Manual, to your
to carry out all your service requirements. dealer. He will then perform the factory
recommended 50 hour service and complete the
service report sheets (pages 8--1 and 8--3). The first
Your tractor has been designed and built to give sheet (page 8--1) is the dealer’s copy and should be
maximum performance, economy and ease of removed by the dealer after the service has been
operation under a wide variety of operating carried out. The second sheet (page 8--3) is your
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully copy of the service performed. Ensure that you and
inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer to the dealer sign both copies.
ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To
maintain this condition and ensure trouble--free
operation, it is important that the routine services, as SERVICE PARTS
specified in Section 4 of this Manual, are carried out
at the recommended intervals. It should be pointed out that genuine parts have been
examined and approved by the Company. The
OPERATORS MANUAL STORAGE installation and/or use of ‘non-genuine’ products
could have negative effects upon the design
A storage pocket for the Operators Manual can be characteristics of your tractor and thereby affect it’s
found on the rear of the seat. The manual should be safety. The Company is not liable for any damage
kept in this pocket at all times when not in use. caused by the use of ‘non--genuine’ parts and
accessories. Only genuine New Holland
replacement parts should be used. The use of
CLEANING THE TRACTOR non-genuine parts may invalidate legal approvals
associated with this product.
Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with
sophisticated, electronic controls. This should be
taken into consideration when cleaning the tractor, It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the
particularly if using a high pressure washer. Even tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by
though every precaution has been taken to the After Sales Service department of the Company.
safeguard electronic components and connections,
the pressure generated by some of these machines WARRANTY
is such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed. Your tractor is warranted according to legal rights in
your country and the contractual agreement with the
When using a high pressure washer, do not stand too selling dealer. No warranty shall, however, apply if
close to the tractor and avoid directing the jet at the tractor has not been used, adjusted and
electronic components, electrical connections, maintained according to the instructions given in the
breathers, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold Operator’s Manual.
water jet at a hot engine or exhaust.
1--1

SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS

• You have acquired a device (”DEVICE”) that includes Software licensed by CHN America LLC from Microsoft
Licensing, GP or its affiliates (”MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (”SOFTWARE”) are protected by
international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights
reserved.
• IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (”EULA”0, DO NOT USE THE
DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT CNH AMERICA LLC FOR
INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF
SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT.)
• GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
-- You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
-- NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. CNH AMERICA LLC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON CNH AMERICA LLC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT
THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
-- NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all faults.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
(INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT.
IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE,
THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS.
-- No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO

LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE.
THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
AND FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00)
-- Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by application law notwithstanding this limitation.
-- SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the DEVICE, and only if the recipient
agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions
of the SOFTWARE.
-- EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export jurisdiction.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE,
including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end--user, end--use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
1--2

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and major components are identified

using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.
Tractor identification data must be supplied to the
dealer when requesting parts or service and will also 1
be needed to aid in identifying the tractor if it is ever
stolen.
The following provides the locations of the

identification data.
Vehicle Identification Plate
The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 1 is

located on the left-hand radiator support. Record the
information on the sample identification plate
provided below.
Tractor Identification
The serial number and model identification

information is stamped on the right--hand side of the
front support (1). These numbers are also repeated
on the vehicle identification plate reproduced above.
1--3

Engine Information
The engine serial number and date of manufacture

are stamped on the engine iinformation plate (1)
located on the left side of the engine oil pan.
Engine Serial No.
Further information relating to engine adjustments

and emission level compliance are also shown on the
engine information plate.
Driveline Identification
The serial number plate (1) is located on the

transmission casing. Access to the number can be
gained by removing the plate in the floor of the cab
as shown in the illustration. This number is repeated
on the vehicle identification plate. Record the
information below for quick reference.
Driveline Serial No.
1--4

Cab Identification
The cab serial number and other information is on the

OECD certification plate. This plate can be found on
the right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the
rear window. Record the cab serial number below for
quick reference. 6
Cab Serial No.
Vehicle Weight Information
The Vehicle Weighting Plate provides important

information on tractor and towed equipment weight
combinations. This plate can be found on the
right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the rear
window.
The figures shown are the maximum permissible

weights and should not be exceeded, to do so may
affect the safe operation of the tractor.
1--5

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture and 4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine
life in general. Where legislation does not yet rule the coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic
treatment of some of the substances which are oils, brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake
required by advanced technology, common sense fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely
should govern the use and disposal of products of a until they can be disposed of in a proper way to
chemical and petrochemical nature. comply with local legislation and available
resources.
The following are recommendations which may be of
assistance: 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and
other additives, should be replaced every two
• Become acquainted with and ensure that you years. They should not be allowed to get into the
understand the relative legislation applicable to soil but should be collected and disposed of
your country. safely.
• Where no legislation exists, obtain information 6. Do not open the air-conditioning system yourself.
from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti It contains gases which should not be released
freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to their into the atmosphere. Your dealer or air
effect on man and nature and how to safely store, conditioning specialist has a special extractor for
use and dispose of these substances. this purpose and will have to recharge the
Agricultural consultants will, in many cases, be system anyway.
able to help you as well.
7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling

HELPFUL HINTS
or hydraulic system immediately.
1. Avoid filling tanks using unsuitable containers or 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
inappropriate pressurised fuel delivery systems circuit as this may lead to the components
which may cause considerable spillage. exploding.
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, 9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken them,
substances which can be harmful to your health. causing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn

contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary
heating systems.
1--6

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents THE TRACTOR
can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To
help prevent accidents, read and take the following 1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before
precautions before driving, operating or servicing the using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge
tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those can lead to accidents.
who are responsible and instructed to do so.
2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS to operate the tractor.
Throughout this Manual you will see text, preceded 3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step
by the words NOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT, plates when getting on and off the tractor. Keep
CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. Such text has steps and platform clear of mud and debris.
the following significance:
4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety
MACHINE SAFETY decals.
NOTE: This text stresses a correct operating 5. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.
technique or procedure.
ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

something that he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not
followed.
PERSONAL SAFETY
CAUTION
The word CAUTION is used where a safe
behavioural practice, according to operating and
maintenance instructions and common safety 6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on
practices will protect the operator and others from the tractor except for driver training or
accident involvement. instruction. When used for these purposes an
additional seat may be fitted in the cab.
Passengers should not be carried on the tractor
WARNING at any time.
The word WARNING denotes a potential or hidden
hazard which could possibly cause serious injury. It 7. Keep children away from the tractor and farm
is used to warn operators and others to exercise due machinery at all times.
care and attention to avoid a surprise accident with
machinery.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
modify or alter the tractor or any of its
components or any tractor function without first
DANGER consulting your dealer.
The word DANGER denotes a forbidden practice in
connection with a serious hazard.
9. Install all guards before starting the engine or
operating the tractor.
Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and
DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily
injury or even death.
1--7

DRIVING THE TRACTOR
1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or

driving the tractor.
2. When driving on public roads, have

consideration for other road users. Pull in to the
side of the road occasionally to allow any
following traffic to pass. Do not exceed the legal
speed limit set in your country for agricultural
tractors.
3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

Vehicle warning when driving on public roads to
indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and is a 8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going
possible hazard. downhill as would be used when going uphill. Do
not coast or freewheel down hills.
4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at
9. For safe operation any towed vehicle whose total
night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to
weight exceeds that of the towing tractor must be
prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming
equipped with a braking system that complies
vehicle.
with the legal requirements of that country.
5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the 10. Never apply the differential lock when turning.
brakes. Brake both wheels simultaneously when When engaged, the differential lock will prevent
making an emergency stop. Ensure that both the tractor from turning.
brake pedals are locked together when travelling
at road speeds or when on public roads to ensure 11. Always check overhead clearance, especially
correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced when transporting the tractor. Watch where you
operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel are going, especially at row ends, on roads and
braking (4WD tractors only). around trees and low overhanging obstacles.
12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and

at speeds compatible with safety, especially
when operating over rough ground, when
crossing ditches or slopes and when turning
corners.
6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front

axle is automatically engaged, to provide four
wheel braking, when both footbrakes are
applied. Owners should be aware of the
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly 13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep
enhances braking performance. Appropriate slopes.
care should be exercised during fierce braking.
14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres are
7. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application frozen to the ground, reverse the tractor out to
of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at prevent overturning.
road speeds.
1--8

OPERATING THE TRACTOR
1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

in the ‘OFF’ position, the lift control lever in the
down position, the remote control valve levers in
the neutral position and the transmission levers
in neutral before starting the tractor.
2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

than externally located hydraulic lift or P.T.O.
switches, if fitted) while standing beside the
tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat when
starting the engine or operating the controls.
3. Do not bypass the transmission and P.T.O. 8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
neutral start switches. Consult your authorised
dealer if your neutral start controls malfunction. 9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum
Use jump leads only in the recommended noise level at the operator’s ears and meets or
manner. Improper use can result in a tractor exceeds applicable standards in this respect.
runaway. However, noise (sound pressure level) in the
workplace can exceed 85 dB(A) when working
between buildings or in confined spaces, with
cab windows open. Therefore, it is
recommended that operators wear suitable ear
protectors when operating in high noise level
conditions.
4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

levers while the engine is running. Unexpected
tractor movement can result from such contact.
5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.
6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating,

stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be 10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed
more difficult to control. building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
fumes are toxic and can cause death.
7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on 11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging
level ground, apply the parking brake, lower drawbar or the lower link drawbar in the lowered
attached implements to the ground, disengage position. Use only a drawbar pin that locks in
the P.T.O. and stop the engine. place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any
point above the axle may cause the tractor to
overturn.
1--9

12. Always select Position Control when attaching OPERATING THE P.T.O.
equipment and when transporting equipment. Be
sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted 1. When operating P.T.O.- driven equipment, shut
and will disconnect safely in case of accidental off the engine, switch off the P.T.O. and wait until
detachment of the implement. the P.T.O. stops before getting off the tractor and
disconnecting the equipment.
13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when

heavy implements are attached to the 2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the
three--point hitch, install front end or front wheel power take-off or especially when near rotating
weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light equipment.
front end.
3. When operating stationary P.T.O.-driven
14. Engage the clutch slowly when driving out of a equipment, always apply the tractor parking
ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage the brake and block the rear wheels front and back.
clutch promptly if the front wheels rise off the
ground.
15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories

are correctly installed, are approved for use with
the tractor, do not overload the tractor and are
operated and maintained in accordance with the
instructions issued by the equipment or
accessory manufacturer.
16. Remember that your tractor, if abused or

incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become
a hazard both to the operator and to bystanders.
Do not overload or operate with attached
equipment which is unsafe, not designed for the
particular task or is poorly maintained.
4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or
17. Do not leave equipment in the raised position service P.T.O. driven equipment when the tractor
when the vehicle is stopped or unattended. engine is running. Ensure that the P.T.O. is
switched off.
18. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
5. Make sure the P.T.O. guard is in position at all
times and always replace the P.T.O. cap when
19. Always wear a protective mask when working
the P.T.O. is not in use.
with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions
on the chemical container.
1--10

SERVICING THE TRACTOR Unqualified persons should not remove or

attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or any
other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic
systems. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in serious injury.
• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting lines.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure

which is controlled by the expansion tank cap. It
is dangerous to remove the cap while the system
is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop
and allow the pressure to escape before
removing the cap entirely. Never remove the cap
from the top of the radiator unless the expansion
tank pressure cap has first been removed.
2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep

any type of open flame away. • Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising lines.
3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and • If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical
satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and attention immediately or gangrene may result.
comply with legal requirements.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames modify or alter the tractor or any of its
away from battery or cold weather starting aids. components or any tractor function without first
To prevent sparks which could cause explosion, consulting an authorised dealer.
use jumper cables according to instructions.
9. Continuous long term contact with used engine
5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged
system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly
or injured by escaping refrigerant. Special with soap and water.
equipment and instruments are required to
service the air conditioning system. See your
10. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.
authorised dealer for service.
11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters
6. Stop the engine before performing any service
properly.
on the tractor.
12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care
7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel oil in the injection system
and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple
operate under high pressure. Escaping hydraulic
and cause injury.
fluid or fuel oil under pressure can penetrate the
skin causing serious injury.
1--11

DIESEL FUEL
1. Under no circumstances should gasoline,

alcohol or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel.
These combinations can create an increased fire
or explosive hazard. In a closed container such
as a fuel tank these blends are more explosive
than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends.
2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the

engine running or hot.
3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when

standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame
away.
4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when

filling the tank.
5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Fill only to the

bottom of the filler neck to allow room for
expansion.
6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.
8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with

an approved cap. A non--approved cap may not
be safe.
9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
10. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade

fuels are not held over and used in the winter.
WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS: ATTENTION!

BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
1--12

OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
WARNING
Your machine is equipped with an operator
Protective Structure, such as: a Roll Over Protective
Structure (ROPS) or Falling Object Protective
Structure (FOPS) or Cab with ROPS. A ROPS may
be a cab frame or a two--posted or four--posted
structure used for the protection of the operator to
minimise the possibility of serious injury.
The Protective Structure is a special safety
component of your machine.
DO NOT attach any device to the Protective
Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes to
the Protective Structure.
The Protective Structure and interconnecting
components are a certified system. Any damage,
fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the
structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs,
the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so
that it will provide the same protection as a new
Protective Structure. Contact your dealer for
Protective Structure inspection and replacement.
After an accident, fire, tip or roll over, the following
MUST be performed by a qualified technician before
returning the machine to field or job site operation.
• The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.
• The mounting or suspension for the Protective
Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat
belts and mounting components and wiring
within the operator’s protective system MUST be
carefully inspected for damage.
• All damaged parts MUST be replaced.
DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO

STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN
REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF
THE STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
FIRE, TIP, ROLL OVER, COLLISION OR
ACCIDENT.
1--13

SAFETY DECALS
The decals reproduced on the following pages were installed on your tractor in the positions indicated in the drawings
below. They are intended for your safety and for those working with you. Please take this Manual and walk around
your tractor, noting the location of the decals and their significance. Review the decals and operating instructions
detailed in this Manual with the machine operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If they become damaged or
illegible, obtain replacements from your authorised dealer.
1--14

1. Location:
Left and right-hand side of fan guard
To prevent serious injury, keep hands and clothing

away from rotating fan and drive belt.
Part No. 81871830
2. Location:
Right--hand side of radiator
Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to cool

then remove cap carefully. Using a cloth, turn cap to
the first stop and allow pressure to subside before
removing cap completely.
Part No. 5194556
3. Location:
Left--hand ’A’ pillar, inside cab
General warning. Read and understand all the

warning notes printed in this Operator’s Manual. In
particular, see pages 1--7 to 1--13 inclusive.
Part No. 82001826
4. Location:
Rear of both fenders (with external power
controls only)
To avoid injury, do not stand on the implement or

between the implement and tractor while operating
the external lift or P.T.O. controls.
Part No. 83982553
1--15

5. Location:
Left--hand ‘A’ pillar inside the cab
In an overturn, hold on tightly to the steering wheel.

Do not attempt to jump out.
Part No. 82016113
6. Location:
Top of toolbox
Do not stand on toolbox.
Part No. 82010947
7. Location:
Top of battery
Danger! Corrosive acid. Explosive gas. Wear eye

protection. Avoid producing sparks. See Operator’s
Manual.
1--16

8. Location:
Radar sensor mounting bracket
To avoid possible eye damage from micro-wave

signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look
directly into the sensor face.
Part No. 82002071
9. Location:
Hydraulic Accumulator/s
Caution! High pressure hydraulic/gas accumulator.

Follow service manual instructions for removal or
repair.
Part No. 82029751
10.Location:
Location: Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab
Caution! Read Operator’s Manual. before attempting

to tow.
Part No. 82030522
11.Location:
Air conditioning compressor
Warning! Fluid under pressure, do not disconnect

any lines. Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No. 83946774
1--17

12.Location:
Right--hand control console
Caution! Always use grab handles when entering or

leaving the platform/cab
Part No. 81871702
13.Location:
Left--hand side of radiator
Warning! Heater Grid cold start aid. Do not use ether

or risk of explosion will occur.
Part No. 87802167
14.Location:
Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab
Warning! De--activate Fast Steer system before

travelling on the highway. Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No. 87331567
1--18

INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilised on the instruments,
controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning.
Thermostart Radio P.T.O. Position

starting aid Control
Keep alive Draft
Alternator memory N Transmission Control
KAM
charge in neutral
Accessory
Turn signals Creeper socket
Fuel level gears
Turn signals Implement

Automatic --one trailer Slow or socket
Fuel shut-off low setting
Turn signals %age

--two trailers slip
Engine speed Fast or high
(rev/min x 100) setting
Front wind- Hitch raise
screen Ground (rear)
Hours recorded wash/wipe speed
Hitch lower
Rear wind- (rear)
Engine oil screen Differential
pressure wash/wipe lock
Hitch height
Heater temp- limit (rear)
Engine coolant Rear axle
erature control oil tem-
temperature
perature Hitch height
limit (front)
Heater fan
Coolant Transmission
level oil pressure Hitch dis-
Air conditioner abled
Tractor lights FWD

engaged Hydraulic and
Air filter transmission
blocked filters
Headlamp FWD dis-
main beam Parking engaged Remote
brake valve extend
Headlamp Brake fluid Remote

dipped beam level Warning!
valve retract
Work lamps Trailer Hazard Remote

brake warning lights valve float
Stop Roof Variable Malfunction!

lamps beacon control See Operator’s
Manual
Warning!
Horn Corrosive Pressurised! Malfunction! (alter-
substance Open carefully native symbol)
1--19

AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION
In accordance with E.E.C. directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows:
Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen with Air Cleaner Extraction System
Noise level at operators ear Drive by noise level

Closed (1) Open (2)
Model Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex VI**
T7030 Power Command 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)
* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at the operators ear with:
1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load
2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load.
** Test results are in accordance with directive 74/151/EEC Annex VI.
1--20

SECTION 2
CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
BEFORE OPERATING PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
CAUTION Your tractor is equipped with CAN BUS (Controlled

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the Area Network), a system that utilises electronic
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. memory facilities to programme and control various
operating functions. An operating memory
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made
Read this section thoroughly. It details the location while operating the tractor and these are transferred
and operation of the various instruments, switches to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate
other tractors, you should thoroughly read this If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data
section of the manual and ensure that you are is being transferred between the operating and main
familiar with the location and function of all the memories, some of the data may be lost or
features of the tractor. corrupted.
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate If changes have been made to any memorised
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is seconds between key--off and key--on to provide
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of sufficient time for the data to transfer between the
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer. operating memory and the main memory. Once
transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged
Pay particular attention to the recommendations for until they are re--programmed.
running-in to ensure that your tractor will give the
long and dependable service for which it was Subject Page
designed. See page 3--2 .
Cab 2--4
This section is split into various subjects, as follows.
Where a feature requires setting up and running Electrical Power Sockets 2--19
adjustments in the field, detailed instructions will be
found in Section 3, Field Operation. Instructions for Seats 2--22
the operation of various optional accessories will be
found in Section 7. Parking Brake, Throttle and Foot Controls 2--30
Lubrication and maintenance requirements will be Instrument Console 2--32

found in Section 4. Tractor specifications are listed in
Section 8. Analogue/Digital Instruments 2--35
Power Command Transmission

A comprehensive index is provided at the end of this
(17 x 6, 18 x 6 and 19 x 6) 2--66
manual.
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive 2--87
Front Axle Suspension 2--91
2--1

SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
CAB AND PLATFORM CONTROLS
General View of Tractor Controls
2--2

Key to Figure 1 Page Nos. for Reference
1. Joystick control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--47, 3--77

2. Transmission controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--66
3. Intelliview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
4. Hydraulics controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--57
5. Remote control valve levers
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--69
Elecro--Hydraulic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--75
6. EDC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--58
7. P.T.O. controls
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--40
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--26
8. Electrical power panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19
9. External controls (where fitted)
3--point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--67
Rear P.T.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--38
10. Release handle
Tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--114
Automatic pick--up hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--117
11. Rear window locking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5
12. Cab air recirculation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--14
13. Cab climate controls (’C’ pillar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9, 2--12
14. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--30
15. Instructional seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--29
16. Seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--22
17. Clutch/inching pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--30
18. Multi--function switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--33
19. Fast Steer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--24
20. Shuttle lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--68
21. Instrument console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32
22. Enhanced keypad (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--48
23. Key--start switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32, 3--6
24. Wash/wipe control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--34
25. Foot brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31
26. Foot throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--30
2--3

CAB
Introduction
The cab has been designed for operator protection,

comfort and convenience. Inside, the frame, roof,
and floor are insulated to reduce noise to a minimum.
Two wide opening doors permit entry to the cab from

either side, aided by convenient grab handles and
footsteps with anti-slip treads. The doors and rear
window are fitted with gas struts to hold them in the fully
open position. Additionally, the rear window may be
retained in the partially open position for increased
ventilation during operation.
2
Standard cab features include a fresh air
heater/defroster with recirculation, air conditioning, sun
visor, tinted glass, interior light, auxiliary power socket,
storage facilities, interior/exterior rear view mirrors and
a choice of comfortable seats.
Options include automatic climate control, high visibility

roof panel, radio cassette, CD player, rear windscreen
wash/wipe and electrically operated external rear view
mirrors.
External Door Handle
Each door has an external handle with a push button

(1). The door may be locked from the outside using
the key provided. Insert the key and rotate clockwise
a half turn to lock.
3
Interior Door Handle
To open a door from inside the cab, squeeze up the

trigger (2) on the underside of the grab handle (1).
Use the grab handle to push the door open.
2--4

Entering and Exiting the Cab
Wherever possible, the cab should be entered from

the left side.
CAUTION
When entering the cab from the right-hand side, use
only the grab handles to assist in climbing the steps.
If the gear levers are grasped inadvertently, a tractor
runaway may result.
To enter the cab, face the door, then open it. Place
one foot on the lowest step plate and, using the grab
handles on the ‘A’ post and inside the door, climb the
steps and enter the cab. 5
Sit in the seat and, where fitted, pull the door closed
using the knob (1). Fasten the seat belt, where fitted.
To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,
grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and
descend the steps using the grab handles.
Rear Window
The rear window may be locked in the closed position

or retained in the partially open or fully open
positions.
To open the window, lift the central locking handle (1)

up to the vertical position. Allow the window to open
a little then push the handle down so that the locking
tongue engages the slot (2) in the framework.
Alternatively, the window may be allowed to swing
fully open supported by two gas-filled struts.
IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely. 7
Using the grab handle, pull the window closed and

push the handle down to lock the window.
2--5

High Visibility Roof Panel

(where fitted)
The high visibility roof panel provides the operator

with a view to the bucket or grab when the loader is
in the raised position.
For extra ventilation the roof panel may be opened

in one of three ways. Using the grab handles (1),
push up at the front or rear to angle the panel or,
alternatively, push up in the centre of the grab
handles to fully open the panel.
To close the panel, grasp both handles and pull the 8

panel down, the spring action of the handles will hold
the panel in the closed position.
NOTE: When transporting the tractor on a truck or

trailer at speeds above 50 K/mh (31 MPH) ensure the
roof panel is secured to prevent accidental opening.
See page 3--3 for more information.
A sliding panel may be adjusted to reduce glare or

can be fully closed if required.
Sun Visor
Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes
from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the
chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
10
2--6

External Rear View Mirrors
Non--extending arm
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best

rearward view. To adjust the angle of the mirror head,
loosen the knob (1). Tighten the knob when the mirror
is at the correct angle. The mirror arm may be
swivelled forward to clear obstructions if necessary.
11
With extending arm

rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended, as shown. This
feature will be beneficial when towing wide trailers or
equipment. To adjust the angle of the mirror head,
loosen the knob (2). Ensure both knobs are fully
tightened when the mirror is correctly positioned.
The mirror arm may be swivelled forward to clear
obstructions if necessary.
12
With Power adjustment
With the optional power adjust mirrors the position of

the mirror head may be adjusted electrically.
Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the switch

(1) to the left or right. Then, using the 4--way control
(2) move it sideways to adjust the lateral view or up
and down to adjust the vertical position.
With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the

power adjustment function will be de--activated.
13
2--7


rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended or retracted.
To make initial adjustment to the vertical position of

the mirror, loosen the clamp screws (2), re--position
the mirror head and re--tighten the screws.
14
The power adjust mirrors are also electrically heated.
Momentarily depress the switch (1) to turn on the
heating element. The mirror heater will automatically
switch off after 5 minutes.
15
2--8

Interior Light
The interior light (2), has three operating positions.

Depress the front and the light will remain on,
depress the rear and the light will illuminate when
either of the doors are opened.
The step light (1) operates in conjunction with the

interior light. This light provides illumination of the
step area when the door is opened.
When the switch is in the central position, the light is

off, irrespective of the position of the doors.
16
Console Light
The light (1) provides a soft glow to the gear levers

and hydraulic console. The light is illuminated when
the tractor lights are turned on. A second light is
provided on the left side of the cab to illuminate the
drinks holder and storage box.
17
Heater Temperature Control
Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase the

temperature of the air from the heater. Turn fully
anti-clockwise to obtain unheated air from the heater
vents.
Blower Control
A 4-speed blower is installed for the heater (and air

conditioner, where fitted). Turn the switch (1)
clockwise to the first position for low speed. Further
rotation of the switch in a clockwise direction will
increase the fan speed. 18
With the windows closed, the blower may be used to

pressurise the cab to exclude dust etc. Provided that
the cab air filters are serviced correctly, maximum
pressurisation and optimum dust exclusion may be
achieved by operating the blower at maximum fan
speed.
2--9

Adjustable Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are provided throughout the cab

for even distribution of heated or cooled air. Vents are
located each side of the operators seat and on the
instrument console. Each vent may be
independently adjusted to direct the air flow (with the
blower control actuated) onto the side windows or the
operator. The two vents located on the upper part of
the instrument console may be adjusted to demist
the windscreen.
To open the circular vents (1) each side of the

instrument console, press one side of the disc and 19
then turn it, as required, to direct the air flow.
Lift the tag on the rectangular vents to open, and then

adjust for air flow and direction as required.
Air Conditioner Switch
Depress the switch (3), to activate the air conditioner

compressor and lower the temperature of the air
within the cab. The air conditioner will only operate
with the blower (1) switched on.
IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

R134A refrigerant. Do not mix with other refrigerants.
To quickly reduce in cab temperature operate the air

conditioner with the blower speed set to maximum
and the heater control fully off. When the air has
cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower control to
maintain the desired temperature. The windows and
doors should remain closed.
20
Under certain conditions, it may be desirable to
operate both the air conditioner and heater together,
e.g. to demist the windscreen and interior door glass
on a cold morning. (The air conditioner, as well as
cooling, also removes moisture from the air). Run the
engine to normal operating temperature, turn the
heater temperature control (2) and blower control (1)
to the maximum settings (fully clockwise). Turn on
the air conditioner (3) and adjust the air vents to
direct the air flow, as required.
2--10

When the windows are clear, turn the air conditioner

off and adjust the heater controls to maintain the
desired cab air temperature.
IMPORTANT: Run the engine at idle speed for at

least 3 minutes after switching on the air conditioner,
if the air conditioner has been out of use for more
than 30 days.
IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off

when cooled or de-humified air is not required. For
proper operation of the air conditioner, ensure that the
cab air filters are serviced regularly. See section 4.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12° C (10° F).
• Never expose any part of the air conditioner

system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
• Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the

air conditioner system. Escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
• If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the

same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38° C
(90 --100° F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
• If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. Consult a doctor immediately.
NOTE: It is the normal function of the air conditioner

to extract water from the air. Drain hoses lead from
the air conditioner unit to a point beneath the cab. Do
not be concerned if a pool of water collects beneath
the drain hose outlets when the engine is stopped.
2--11

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

(where fitted)
Automatic Control
With Automatic Temperature Control the operator

can set the temperature inside the cab to maintain a
comfortable working environment. By automatically
adjusting the output of the heating and air
conditioning systems, ATC will provide a stable cab
temperature between 16° C (61° F) and 32° C (90°
F).
The blower control switch (1) has five positions, off,

ATC and three blower speeds. With ATC selected
the speed of the blower fan is controlled
automatically.
To set the cab interior temperature, align the mark on 21

the control knob (2) with the desired figure. If
required, the control can be set to the intermediate
positions between the figures to provide additional
temperature levels.
If the temperature in the cab remains within 1.1° C (2°

F) of that set on the control, the blower fan will
maintain a low speed. As the differential between the
control setting and the in cab temperature increases,
the blower speed will be raised to re--stabilise the
temperature.
Selecting ’HI’ or ’LO’ on the temperature control will

override the automatic system to provide a maximum
heating or cooling effect.
Manual Control
To manually set the cab temperature, switch the

blower control to position I, II or III and select a
suitable setting on the temperature control. This will
disable the ATC function.
Although the in cab temperature will be maintained

within limits, it will not be as efficient as ATC.
Switching to ’LO’ will provide maximum air
conditioning output with temperature adjustment
through the blower control only.
2--12

Economy and Defrost Switch
The economy and defrost switch has three positions:

1. Left side depressed. ECONomy mode.
2. Central position. ECON and MAX DEF off.
3. Right side depressed. MAX DEFrost on.
When the external air temperature is low, operating

the air conditioner may not be necessary to maintain
a constant temperature inside the cab. To turn off the
air conditioner, depress the ECON side of the switch.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor uses engine 22

horespower to drive it. Turning off the air conditioner
when not required will aid fuel economy.
The cab temperature will be maintained within the

specified limits unless the external air temperature
rises above that set on the control. Should this occur,
select the central switch position to turn on the air
conditioner.
In very cold conditions where the outside of the cab

windows become covered in ice, depress the MAX
DEF side of the switch. This will automatically set the
heater temperature to maximum, activate the air
conditioner (if not already switched on), and select
the highest speed setting on the blower fan.
This function may also be used to clear heavy misting

on the inside of the cab windows.
2--13

Air Recirculation
The cab ventilation system has three filters, two

external filters through which fresh air is drawn into
the cab, and one internal air re--circulation filter (2).
Move the slider control (1) fully to the right for
maximum air re--circulation.
WARNING
The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the
air but will not exclude chemical vapour. Follow the
chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding
protection from hazardous chemicals.
23
Cab Air Filters

1
When operating with pesticides, both internal
(re--circulation) and external cab air filters (1) may be
replaced with special charcoal filters. Consult your
authorised dealer.
CAUTION
Use only genuine New Holland filter elements when
renewing cab air filters. When replacing used filters,
follow local regulations in the disposal of
contaminated elements.
24
Safety Precautions
Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior

to reduce ingress of chemical vapour, the
recommended safety procedures, as stipulated by
the chemical manufacturer, should be observed at all
times.
Protective clothing worn when filling the sprayer with

pesticides or when carrying out external
adjustments, should be removed and stored away
carefully before re--entering the tractor cab.
To prevent build--up of chemical residue inside the

cab, the interior trim and floor covering should be
wiped clean with a damp cloth on a regular basis.
2--14

Cab Pressurisation Monitor

(where fitted)
To improve protection against chemical vapours

entering the cab when spraying, the blower can be
used, in conjunction with charcoal filters, to raise the
air pressure inside the cab above that of the external
air pressure. Whilst this differential is maintained,
chemical vapours should not enter the cab. Ensure
all cab apertures are fully closed. To monitor the
internal pressure, a gauge is mounted inside the cab.
Cab Air Pressurisation Gauge
Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. If the

lower edge (1) of the yellow indicator centres in the
green area you have an adequate differential
between the internal and external air pressure.
Adjust the blower speed to maintain that reading. If
the yellow indicator rises into the red area, increase
blower speed to raise the internal cab pressure.
CAUTION
If, during spray operations, the lower edge of the
yellow indicator enters the red section of the gauge,
carry out the checks below and follow the chemical 25
manufacturers recommendations for safe operation.
With the blower in the off position the yellow indicator

should move into the red area. If the indicator does
not register correctly, the gauge should be replaced
before operating with chemical spray equipment.
If the blower is unable to maintain the correct

pressure inside the cab then the following checks
should be made to determine the cause.
1. Check blower is on maximum speed.

NOTE: If Automatic Temperature Control is
activated it may be necessary to switch to manual
control to increase blower speed.
2. Ensure all doors, windows and roof panel are

fully closed.
3. Check external air filters for blockage or
restriction.
4. Examine all cab aperture seals for damage.
5. Check sealing around linkages and levers where

they pass through the cab panels.
If, after all the checks have been made the cab
interior pressure cannot be maintained, consult your
authorised dealer.
2--15

Radio/Cassette/CD Player
(where fitted)
The cab is pre-wired and has two speakers installed

in the roof (four speakers are available as a dealer
installed accessory). A choice of AM/FM stereo
radio/cassette or AM/FM stereo radio/CD players (1)
are also available as a dealer installed accessory.
Separate operating instructions will be supplied with
the radio.
NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start

switch in the on or accessories position.
26
WARNING
Ensure the aerial is positioned so it cannot touch
overhead power lines.
Work Lamp and Beacon Switch Panel
NOTE: The work lamps will only operate with the

tractor lights switched on.
The switches are located on a panel mounted in the

roof console (1). Individual switches control the front
and rear work lamps and the rotating beacon (see
accessories section). Depress the switches once to
illuminate, depress again to turn the lamps off.
When the key-start switch is turned on, the switches

will be internally illuminated. The light intensity will
increase as each switch is activated.
27
NOTE: Do not adjust a fender-mounted, rear work
lamp to point fully downwards. The heat generated
by the work lamp may distort the plastic housing of
the rear lamp cluster.
2--16

Mobile Telephone Usage
A storage bracket (1) is provided on the left--hand

cab ’C’ pillar for a mobile telephone. Auxiliary power
for the telephone may be taken from the cigarette
lighter socket above.
28
Implement Monitor Installation
To facilitate installation of an implement monitor, two

mounting points are provided:
To meet SAE standards, captive bolts (1), protected

by plastic covers, are provided on the the right-hand
cab ’C’ pillar.
It is recommended that a bracket be screwed to the

‘C’ pillar to mount the monitor. A suitable bracket is
available from your authorised dealer.
29
An alternative monitor mounting position (1) is

provided on the inner face of the right-hand ‘A’ pillar.
30
2--17

Cable and Harness Routing
So the operating cable from the monitor may be

conveniently routed to the equipment, a small
aperture is provided in the filler plate each side of the
lower rear window frame. By making a small incision
in the rubber at (1), cables or wiring can be easily
routed through the filler plate.
31
In Cab Storage
A storage box with a hinged lid (1) is located on the

left-hand side of the cab. The lid also incorporates a
drinks holder.
A recessed tray (2) is provided to the rear of the

storage box to hold small tools, oddments, etc.
32
2--18

ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTORS
Depending on tractor specification there are a

number of electrical power connectors provided for
various applications. These are as follows:
1. 8 amp. Screw terminals. The red terminal is

positive, the black terminal negative.
2. 7 Pole Din/ISO implement socket (with radar

option only) provides the information below.
3. 30 amp. ISO/JD implement power socket.
Provides constant and key--start switched live
feeds. 33
7 Pole Din/ISO Implement Socket Connectors

(where fitted)
Pin 1. True ground speed. (Radar Sensed)

Pin 2. Theoretical ground speed.
(Wheel Sensed)
Pin 3. Rear P.T.O. speed.
Pin 4. Rear 3--point hitch, in work/out of work.
Pin 5. Not used
Pin 6. 5 amp. power supply.
Pin 7. Common ground connection.
34
4. Cigarette lighter/auxiliary power socket for

mobile telephone or cooler box (where fitted).
5. 8 amp Single pole auxiliary power socket. Live

with key--start in ’on’ position.
IMPORTANT: To ensure that the screw terminals

and connecting cables do not get excessively hot
when loaded with near maximum current it is
important to make secure, tight connections to
prevent overheating and damage. Ensure that
equipment is connected to the terminals with cables
of suitable gauge and insulation thickness and fitted
with appropriate terminal connectors.
35
2--19

Multi--Pin Diagnostic Socket
WARNING
For Dealer use only. This socket is provided for
dealers to connect diagnostic equipment to the
tractor electrical control systems. Any attempt to
connect other equipment to this socket may cause
damage to the tractor electrical system or its
components.
36
Beacon Power Socket
Two power sockets for the rotating beacon are

provided at the rear of the cab, one on each side.
37
2--20

Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(except North America)
A standard 7-pin trailer lighting socket (1), is provided
and is mounted at the rear of the tractor. With
reference to the picture inset, the socket connections
(viewed from the front of the socket) are as follows:
Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
2. Not Used --
3. Black Earth (Ground)
38
4. Green R.H. Turn Signal
5. Blue R.H. Parking Light
6. Red Brake Lights
7. Brown L.H. Parking Light
Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(North America only)
A standard SAE 7-pin connector (1) is provided, to
operate the electrical system on implements and
trailers. With reference to the picture inset, the pin
connections (viewed from the front of the socket) are
as follows:
Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. Black Earth (Ground)
2. Blue R.H. Parking Light
39
3. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
4. Red Brake Lights
5. Green R.H. Turn Signal
6. Brown L.H. Parking Light
7. Not Used --
Four Pin Implement Socket (all locations)

A 4-pin, 40 amp socket (1) is standard on all tractors
with cab. (See Section 7 for adaptor cable).
NOTE: The 4-pin socket provides power up to 40

amps. However, operator’s should be aware that the
screw terminals (4) Figure 33, share the same 40
amp fuse. The combined output of the 4-pin socket
and the screw terminals is, therefore, limited to 40
amps.
40
2--21

SEATS
Two air suspension seats are available. Whichever

seat is installed in your tractor, you will find that it has
a comprehensive range of adjustments.
Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust

the seat to the most comfortable position. Seat
adjusters are colour coded grey. See the following
text and illustrations for details.
AIR SUSPENSION SEAT
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made while

sitting in the seat.
Storage pocket
A pocket for storing documents, etc., is provided on

the back of the seat.
41
Height/weight adjustment
The standard air suspension seat has electrically

controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust
seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start
switch on. Lift the lever (1) and a compressor will
raise the seat. When the lever is released the seat
will stop at the height selected. Push the lever down
to release air and lower the seat.
Backrest adjustment
Lift the lever (2) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The 42
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
2--22

Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (1) and move the seat
forward or backward, as required. The seat will lock
in position when the lever is released.
Swivel adjustment
To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat

may be allowed to swivel. Adjustment is available as
follows:
a) Lock in one of two positions 14° or 21° to the left

of centre. 43
b) Lock in one of three positions at 7°, 14° and 21°

to the right of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (2), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Armrest adjustments
The right--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust the
height of the armrest, loosen the knob (1). Grasp the
armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob
securely.
Rotate the knurled wheel (2) on the underside of the

left--hand armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest.
When not required, the armrest may be lifted to the
vertical position.
44
The left--hand armrest may also be adjusted for
height by loosening the two clamp bolts (3). Move the
armrest to a comfortable height and re--tighten the
clamp bolts.
2--23

DELUXE AIR SUSPENSION SEAT
The deluxe air suspension seat offers a full range of

adjustments for driver comfort. Optional heating
elements in the seat cushion and backrest are
provided for additional comfort in low temperatures.
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made with the

tractor stationary and the parking brake applied.
45
Armrest Controls
Seat height adjustment
The deluxe air suspension seat has electrically

controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust
seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start
switch on. Press and hold the top of the rocker switch
(2) and a compressor will raise the seat. When the
switch is released the seat will stop at the height
selected. Press the bottom of the switch to release
air and lower the seat.
Heating element (where fitted)
The heating elements in the seat are controlled by a 46

two position switch (1), on the left--hand armrest.
Depressing the upper part of the switch will energise
the heat setting. Depress the lower part of the switch
to turn off. When energised, a red warning light on the
switch will illuminate. The temperature of the seat is
controlled by internal sensors within the seat.
2--24

Ride firmness selector (where fitted)
The optional Semi--Active suspension system

utilises an advanced damper system to reduce
vertical jolts and vibrations caused by operating on
rough terrain.
An electronic controller constantly monitors the

motion of the suspension and updates the damping
effect to significantly improve operator comfort.
A selector switch (3) allows the operator to choose

the most comfortable damping position consistent
with their weight and the movement of the tractor. 47
With the switch in the central position, the firmness

of the ride will suit most average conditions.
Depress the top of the switch to increase the

damping effect.
To reduce the damping effect, depress the bottom of

the switch.
Seat Controls
Cushion tilt
The angle of the seat cushion may be adjusted to

three positions. Lift the lever (1) and pull or push the
front of the seat cushion up or down, as required. The
seat cushion will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Cushion extension
To suit drivers of differing heights, the length of the

seat cushion may be adjusted by up to 60 mm (2.4
in). Lift the lever (3) and move the cushion forward or
rearward, as required. The cushion will lock in 48
position when the lever is released.
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (2) and move the

complete seat forward or backward, as required. The
seat will lock in position when the lever is released.
2--25

Swivel adjustment
To facilitate observation of an implement attached to

the rear of the tractor, the seat may be allowed to
swivel. Adjustment is available as follows:
a) Lock in one of two positions 14° or 21° to the left

of centre.
b) Lock in one of three positions at 7°, 14° and 21°

to the right of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (4), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is 49
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Backrest inclination adjustment
Lift the lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Travel isolator
Having selected the required fore/aft position, the

seat is permitted a limited, spring controlled, fore/aft
movement (float) if the travel isolator (2) is pulled up.
This, in conjunction with the air suspension, will
provide the optimum in ride comfort. To cancel the
float movement, push the travel isolator down while
slowly moving the seat fore and aft until the seat
locks in position.
2--26

Suspension damper
Turn the knob (3) clockwise (toward the rear) for a

softer ride. Turn anti-clockwise if a firmer ride is
required.
NOTE: The suspension damper is not fitted to

tractors with Ride Firmness control.
50
Right--hand armrest height adjustment
The right--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

height of the armrest, loosen the knob (1). Grasp the
armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob
securely.
Shoulder support
The deluxe seat features an integrated shoulder

support (2) (upper backrest). The support may be
adjusted vertically by using the handgrip at the rear 51
of the cushion. Push down on the top of the support
to lower.
Lumbar adjustment
The seat has a built-in lumbar support actuated by a

thumb wheel (3) located at the rear of the seat on the
left--hand side.
To increase lumbar support, rotate the thumbwheel

upwards, to decrease support rotate downwards.
2--27

Left--hand armrest height adjustment
The left--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

height of the armrest, loosen the two bolts (4). Grasp
the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the two bolts
securely.
Left--hand armrest angle adjustment
Rotate the knurled wheel (5) on the underside of

each armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest to a
comfortable position. When not required, both 52
armrests may be lifted to the vertical position.
Storage pocket
A storage pocket for documents, etc., is provided on

the back of the seat.
2--28

SEAT BELT AND OPERATOR PRESENCE

SWITCH (where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab and
retractable seat belt. Always use the seat belt when
a safety cab is fitted. Do not use a seat belt if the
tractor is not equipped with a safety cab.
To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push
the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a ‘click’
indicates it is properly engaged. To disengage, press
the red release button (3) on the buckle and remove 53
the tongue from the buckle.
The operator presence switch, installed beneath the

seat, is connected to an audible alarm which will
sound if the operator leaves the seat with the P.T.O.
engaged or without applying the parking brake.
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT
(where fitted)
A folding instructional seat is available where local

legislation permits. To raise the seat backrest, lift to
the upright position. The seat will be retained in the
upright position by the gas strut (1). When not
required fold the upper part of the seat down to reveal
the drinks holder.
WARNING
Always use the seat belt with a safety cab or ROPS
frame installed. Do not use a seat belt if the tractor
is not equipped with a safety cab or ROPS. 54
IMPORTANT: The fold down seat is fitted for

operator training or instructional purposes only, it is
not intended for passenger conveyance.
Passengers should not be carried in the cab at any
time.
2--29

PARKING BRAKE, THROTTLE AND FOOT

PEDALS
Parking Brake
A conventional parking brake lever is installed to the

left of the driver’s seat.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up. A

warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel
when the parking brake is applied. To release, ease
the lever up further, depress the button (1) on the end
and lower the lever fully.
55
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the parking brake is fully
released before driving off.
Clutch/Inching Pedal
When the clutch pedal (1) is depressed the drive

between the engine and transmission will be dis-
engaged. Use the pedal to transfer engine power
smoothly to the driving wheels when moving off from
a standstill. See ‘TRANSMISSION’ later in this
section for further details.
NOTE: To avoid premature wear, do not use the

clutch pedal as a footrest.
56
Foot Throttle
The foot throttle (1) may be used independently of

the hand throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
It is recommended that you use the foot throttle when
driving on the highway.
NOTE: When the foot throttle is released, engine

speed will reduce to the level set by the hand throttle.
When using the foot throttle, set the hand throttle to
the minimum speed position (lever fully rearward).
57
2--30

Hand Throttle
The hand throttle (1) may be used independently of

the foot throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
Move the throttle lever forward to increase engine
speed.
IMPORTANT: Always return the hand throttle to the

idle position when using the foot throttle for road
transport applications.
58
Footbrakes
The brakes are actuated by the two foot pedals (1)

and (2). When operating in the field they may be
unlocked and operated independently, to aid turning
in confined spaces. When independent braking is not
required, ensure both pedals are locked together to
provide normal braking.
WARNING
On four wheel drive tractors the drive to the front axle
is automatically engaged at speeds above 8.5 km/h
(4 MPH) when the brakes are applied to provide four
wheel braking. Owners should be aware of the 59
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly
enhances braking performance. Appropriate care
should be exercised during heavy braking.
IMPORTANT: Hydraulic trailer brakes will only

operate when both brakes are applied.
WARNING
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals
together when travelling at transport speeds or if a
hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor.
To lock the pedals together, engage the locking pin
in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1), over the left
pedal support to lock, as shown.
60
2--31

INSTRUMENT CONSOLE
The following text describes the use of the various

switches and controls, etc., mounted on the
instrument console and steering column.
Steering Column Adjustment
The steering column on your tractor may be tilted and

telescoped. Pull the end of the clamp lever (2) up
(toward you). Move the steering column/wheel to the
most convenient position and return the clamp lever
to the fully down position to lock the steering column
assembly.
To alter the steering column height, loosen the centre

boss (1) on the steering wheel by turning
anti--clockwise. Move the steering wheel to the most
convenient position and re--tighten the centre boss.
61
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with
hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering
wheel at full left or right lock (wheels against the
steering stops) for more than 10 seconds or for more
than a total of 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure
to observe this precaution may result in damage to
steering system components.
Key-start Switch
The key-start switch activates the grid heater cold

start device, accessories and the starting motor. See
‘Starting the Engine’ in Section 3.
62
2--32

Multi-function Switch
The stalk-type switch is mounted on the left-hand

side of the steering column. The switch controls the
tractor lights, horn and turn signals.
The centre of the stalk switch rotates. With reference

to Figure 63, turn the switch away from you, to
position 2, to turn on the instrument and position
lights. Turn the switch to position 1 to select the
headlights.
With the headlights on, push the stalk away from you,
position 3, to change from dipped to high beam. Pull
the stalk toward you, position 4, to change back to 63
dipped beam. With high beam selected, the blue
indicator light on the instrument panel is illuminated.
With the headlights off, pull the stalk towards you,

position 5, against spring pressure, to flash the
headlight high beam. The stalk will return to the
central position when released.
Move the stalk to position 6 to operate the right turn

signals, position 7 will activate the left turn signals.
Indicator lights on the instrument panel will also flash
when the turn signals are actuated. A warning buzzer
will sound if the indicators are not cancelled within 20
seconds.
NOTE: With the optional self cancelling indicators

the warning buzzer is deleted.
64
NOTE: The turn signals will only operate with the
key-start switch turned on.
Press in the end of the stalk, position 8, to sound the

horn.
Follow You Home Lights
When leaving the tractor at night, external

illumination can be provided for a limited period by
operating the headlight flasher switch within 30
seconds of key--off. This will illuminate the dip beam
headlights and, depending on switch status, one of
the worklamps.
Each movement of the headlight flasher will provide

30 seconds of illumination up to a maximum of 31/2
minutes after which the lights will automatically
extinguish.
2--33

Hazard Warning Lights Switch
Press the left-hand side of the switch (1) to operate

all the turn signals simultaneously. The switch will
flash with the turn signals.
65
Windscreen Wipe/Wash Control
The stalk-type control on the right-hand side of the

steering column controls the front and rear screen
wipe and wash functions.
With the key-start switch on, move the stalk

rearward, to position 2 and the front wiper will
operate at the slower of the two wiper speeds, move
to position 3 for the faster speed. Press in the end of
the stalk, position 1, to operate the electric screen
wash.
66
From the centre ’off’ position move the stalk

downward to position 4 Figure 67, for intermittent
front wipe, move the stalk upward against spring
pressure for single sweep operation, position 3. On
release, the switch will return to the off position.
To operate the rear screen wiper, rotate the centre

collar anti--clockwise to position 1 for intermittent
rear wipe and to position 2 for rear screen wash. The
switch will return automatically to the intermittent
mode when released.
NOTE: Windscreen washer jets are mounted in the

cab frame, immediately beneath the roof. Insert a pin 67
into the jet nozzle to adjust the angle of the jet.
2--34

ANALOGUE/DIGITAL INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
The instrument panel consists of three analogue

gauges , three liquid crystal displays (LCD’s) and a
dot matrix display (DMD).
In addition to the gauges and LCD displays there are

a number of coloured lights providing other operating
information or warning of system malfunction.
The lower left button on the instrument panel controls

the intensity of back lighting for the LCD’s and dot
matrix displays, the two right--hand buttons adjust 68
the digital clock.
GAUGES
Engine Tachometer
The tachometer (1) indicates engine revolutions per

minute. Each division on the scale represents 100
rev/min., therefore with the needle indicating ‘20’ the
engine is running at 2000 rev/min.
69
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge (2) indicates the

temperature of the engine coolant. If the needle
enters the upper (red) section of the gauge while the
engine is running, stop the engine and investigate
the cause.
Fuel Level Gauge
The gauge (3) indicates the level of fuel in the tank

and is only operative with the key-start switch turned
on. See Section 8 for fuel capacities.
70
2--35

71
INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS
The coloured lights provide operating information or 4. Four wheel drive -- Light will illuminate when the
give warning of system malfunction. Illumination of a drive to the front wheels is engaged.
warning light may be accompanied by an audible
alarm. NOTE: In auto four wheel drive mode, this light will
flash when four wheel drive has been automatically
NOTE: All indicator and warning lights will illuminate dis--engaged.
for a short period at ’key--on’ as the electrical
systems carry out a self diagnostic check. 5. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
tractor/trailer turn signals when a second trailer
1. Fast Steer -- Green light will illuminate when Fast is attached.
Steer system is energised (isolator switch ’ON’).
6. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
2. Fast Steer -- Orange light will illuminate when tractor/trailer turn signals when a trailer is
steering wheel ring is depressed to engage Fast attached
Steer function.
7. Parking lights -- Light will illuminate when the
3. Rear differential lock -- Light will illuminate when tractor lights are switched on.
the differential lock is engaged.
8. Headlight high beam -- Light will illuminate when
NOTE: In auto diff lock mode, this light will flash the tractor lights are switched to high beam.
when the diff lock is automatically dis--engaged.
2--36

72
Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)
9. Red Stop light -- If Stop light comes on stop the 14. Trailer brake pressure
tractor immediately and investigate the cause. A
warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Italy only -- Light will illuminate to indicate that
Display to confirm the location of the fault. hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit
is low. Stop the tractor and investigate the cause.
10. Engine power boost activated -- Illumination of
NOTE: Light will also illuminate when the handbrake
this light will be accompanied by the power boost
is applied as this will release pressure in the trailer
symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix Display.
brake circuit.
11. Amber Warning light -- Illumination of this light will All air braking systems -- Light will illuminate to
be accompanied by a warning symbol in the Dot indicate the pressure in the air brake system has
Matrix Display. Stop the tractor and investigate fallen below 4.5 bar (65.2 lbf.in2). Stop the tractor
the cause. and investigate the cause.
12. Front suspesnsion -- Light will illuminate to
indicate front suspension switch is in the locked 15. Brake pedals not latched -- Light will illuminate to
position (suspension de--activated). show when pedal latch is unlocked (Japan only).
13. Parking brake -- Light will flash with key-start 16. Engine oil pressure low -- Steady light
switch on and parking brake applied. If the accompanied by the Red Stop light will indicate
key-start switch is turned off and the parking low engine oil pressure. Stop the engine and
brake not applied, or the operator leaves the seat investigate the cause.
without applying the parking brake, a warning
buzzer will sound and the parking brake lamp will
flash for approximately 10 seconds or until the
parking brake has been applied.
2--37

73
Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)
17. Front auto P.T.O. function -- The light will 21. Right turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor
illuminate when the Auto P.T.O. function is right-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will
enabled. Each time the implement is raised and sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
the P.T.O. stopped, the light will flash. When the seconds (tractor moving) or 5 minutes (tractor
implement is lowered into work and the P.T.O. Stationary).
engages, the light will cease to flash and become
steady. 22. Engine Speed Management -- Light will
illuminate when Engine Speed Management is
18. Rear Auto P.T.O. function -- The light will activated.
illuminate when the Auto P.T.O. function is
enabled. Each time the implement is raised and 23. Left turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor
the P.T.O. is stopped, the light will flash. When left-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will
the implement is lowered into work and the P.T.O. sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
engages, the light will cease to flash and become seconds (5 minutes with tractor stationary).
steady.
24. Engine exhaust brake -- Light will illuminate when
19. Fuel level low -- Light will be illuminated when the exhaust brake system is activated.
tractor requires re--fuelling. See Section 8 for fuel
25. Cold start device -- Light will illuminate when the
capacities.
grid heater is activated using the key--start
20. Shuttle lever position. Appropriate symbol will switch.
illuminate to show position of shuttle lever,
26. Alternator -- Light continuously illuminated
forward, neutral or reverse.
indicates that the alternator is not charging the
battery.
2--38

INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with the optional

Intelliview II Monitor, a number of displays and
setting procedures will change. Consult the
Intelliview II Monitor Operator’s Manual for details.
DOT MATRIX DISPLAY
A number of tractor operating and set--up functions

may be shown in the Dot Matrix Display (DMD). To
select a function use the CAL/SEL button or the
Enhanced Keypad (where fitted). A symbol will
appear to confirm the function selected.
If an error occurs in the instrument panel or tractor

systems circuits, a malfunction warning symbol will
appear in this display accompanied by an error code.
Consult your authorised dealer.
74
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS
The information displayed in the centre LCD, will vary

depending on tractor specification. Use the CAL/SEL
switch or Enhanced Keypad (where fitted) to toggle
between the displays.
The following information may be displayed in the

centre LCD.
1. Rear wheel slip (with radar option only)

2. Power Take Off speed (front or rear)
3. 3--point hitch position (front or rear) 75
Rear Wheel Slip
If your tractor is equipped with optional ground speed

radar, the percentage (%) of rear wheel slip may be
displayed. The slip figure is calculated from
information provided by the transmission speed
sensor (theoretical ground speed) and the radar (true
ground speed).
76
2--39

Power Take Off Speed
When operating the rear Power Take Off the display

may be used to monitor the output shaft speed. Use
the CAL/SEL button or Enhanced Keypad (where
fitted), to select either rear P.T.O. speed or front
P.T.O. speed (where fitted).
77
3--Point Hitch Position
If your tractor is equipped with Electronic Draft

Control (EDC) the display may be used to show the
position of the 3--point hitch (and implement) by
means of numbers ranging from ’0’ (fully lowered
position) to ’100’ (maximum lift height).
When a front hitch is installed, the display may be

used to show the height of the front lift arms. ’0’ will
represent the fully lowered position, ’100’ the
maximum lift height.
78
Dimming Control
The brightness of the liquid crystal (LCD) and dot

matrix displays (DMD) may be varied by using the
dimming control button (1). Momentarily depressing
the button will alter the backlighting in steps. Depress
and hold the button to cycle through the full range of
backlighting from low to high intensity. Release the
button when the required setting is obtained.
79
2--40

Clock
A digital clock (1) is installed on the right--hand side

of the instrument panel.
To adjust the time display turn the key--start on,

depress and hold the Hour or Minute button until the
read out starts to Flash. To advance the hour,
depress the ’H’ button (2). Each time the button is
depressed the time will advance by 1 hour.
Alternatively, hold in the button and the display will
advance automatically. Release the button when the
time setting is correct.
80
Repeat the procedure using the ’M’ button (3) for the
minute display. To memorise the setting do not touch
either button for 10 seconds.
Changing the display with ’H’ and ’M’ buttons
The clock is set at the factory to display a 12 hour

reading. To change to a 24 hour reading, depress and
hold both ’H’ and ’M’ buttons with the key--start off.
Turn the key--start on and continue to hold both
buttons for three seconds, the clock will change to
show a 24 hour display. Repeat the procedure to
change back to a 12 hour reading. Turn the key--start
off to store the setting.
81
Changing the display with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)
With the key--start in the ON position, depress and

hold the Menu/Enter key (2) for 3 seconds. The DMD
will read SETUP MENU, this will change to CAL after
2 seconds. Using the Menu Up key (1), scroll through
the menu until the clock symbol appears in the
display accompanied by 12 / 24, Figure 81.
Depress the Menu/Enter key again and the display

will change to show an arrow pointing to 12 or 24.
Using the Menu Up/Down keys move the arrow up or
down to the setting required and then depress the 82
Menu/Enter key to save and return to the main menu.
2--41

Tractor Ground Speed Display
The lower left--hand LCD provides a permanent

display of ground speed (1) in km/h or MPH
dependent upon the country in which the tractor is to
be used. If required, the display may be changed to
read an alternate ground speed unit from that set at
the factory.
NOTE: If the tractor rear tyre size is changed, the

ground speed display may require re--calibrating to
suit the radius of the new tyre.
NOTE: Illustration shows all displays activated. 83
Changing the Ground Speed Units
Using the CAL/SEL Button
• With the key--start switch in the OFF position,

depress and hold in the CAL/SEL button (1) and
turn the key-start switch ON. The Km/h MPH
symbols will appear flashing in the display.
Release the button.
• Press the CAL/SEL button again to toggle between

Km/h and MPH. When the required ground speed
unit is displayed turn off the key--start to store the
selected speed unit in the memory. 84
Using the Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)
• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key (2) for 3 seconds.
The DMD will read SETUP MENU, this will
change to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up key (1), scroll through the menu until the
Km/h MPH screen appears.
• Momentarily depress the Menu/Enter key (2)

and, using the Menu Up/Down keys, select the
required speed reading. To store the setting and
return to the main menu depress the Menu/Enter 85
key again. Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return
to the original display.
2--42

Calibrating the Ground Speed Display
Should you wish to install alternative rear tyre

equipment that would provide a radius difference of
more than 13 mm (0.5 in), then the electronic control
module should be re--calibrated to display an
accurate ground speed figure. To re--calibrate use
one of the following methods:
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.
• Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for the

load being carried. (See Tyre Load/Inflation
tables in Section 3 of this manual).
• Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.
Auto Calibration with CAL/SEL Button

• Park the tractor a short distance from the start
line and, with the engine running, depress and
hold the CAL/SEL button for 3 seconds to enter
the calibration mode. SETUP_MENU will appear
in the Dot Matrix Display. After approximately
two seconds the display will change to CAL.
Depress the CAL/SEL button again to enter the
calibration mode. Using the clock Hour button
select CAL auto. Depress the CAL/SEL button
to confirm selection of CAL auto, the central
LCD display will read 0000.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at 86
any time by turning the key--start off.
• Select a suitable transmission ratio to provide a

speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH) and drive up to
the start line, CAL auto READY will appear in the
display. As the centre of the front tyres pass over
the start line, press and release the CAL/SEL
button. CAL will flash in the speed display, CAL
auto ON will appear in the DMD and the central
LCD will show a four digit figure that will increase
as the tractor moves forward.
NOTE: If the calibration procedure is incorrectly
performed i.e. speed below 3 Km/h (1.8 MPH), CAL
KO will appear in the display, depress CAL/SEL to
restart sequence.
87
2--43

• As the centre of the front tyres pass over the

finish line, press and release the CAL/SEL button
(1) again, CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot
Matrix Display. Depress the CAL/SEL button again
select CAL display. Turn off key--start to save the
setting.
88
Manual Calibration with CAL/SEL Button
The manual calibration allows the operator to set the

rolling circumference of the rear tyre (if known)
without the need to drive over a measured distance.
• With the tractor stationary and the key--start on,

depress and hold the CAL/SEL button for 3
seconds to display SETUP_MENU. After 2
seconds this will change to CAL. Depress the
CAL/SEL button again to select CAL
man_000.0. (The figure 000.0 may differ if a
calibration number has previously been
entered). CAL will flash in the speed display. 89
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at

any time by turning the key--start off.
IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--47.
• By depressing the ’h’ and ’m’ clock buttons, the

rolling circumference of the rear tyre may be
entered into the numerical display (000.0).
• Depress the ’h’ button to select the first digit to be

changed, repeated operation of the ’h’ button will
cycle the cursor through all the digits in turn. To
alter the value of the digit selected, momentarily
depress the ’m’ button until the correct figure is
shown.
• With the new rolling circumference figure

entered into the display, depress the CAL/SEL
button again to display CAL. Turn the Key--start
off to save the setting.
2--44

Auto Calibration with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)
• Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.
• With the the tractor stationary and the engine

running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key
(4) for 3 seconds. The DMD will read
SETUP_MENU, this will change to CAL after 2
seconds. Depress the Enter key again and CAL
90
manual will appear. Using the Menu Up key (1),
scroll through the menu until CAL auto is
displayed.
• Depress the Menu/Enter key again and CAL

auto READY will appear in the DMD. Select a
suitable transmission ratio to provide a forward
speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH). As the centre of
the front tyres pass over the start line, press and
release the Menu/Enter key. The speed display
will start to flash CAL and the central LCD will show
a four digit figure that will increase as the tractor
moves forward. The DMD will change to display
CAL auto ON.
• As the centre of the front tyres pass over the

finish line, press and release the Menu/Enter
key. CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. Depress the Menu/Enter key to store the 91
setting. Press and release the Exit/Cancel key (2)
Figure 90, to return to the original display.
2--45

Manual Calibration with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

and hold the Menu/Enter button (2) for 3
seconds. The DMD will read SETUP_MENU,
this will change to CAL after 2 seconds. Depress
the Enter key and CAL manual will appear.
• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to change the

DMD display to CAL_Man_000.0. (The figure
000.0 may differ if a calibration number has
previously been entered). CAL will flash in the
speed display. Using the Digit Select key (↓)
92
move the cursor to the first digit to be set, enter
the number using the Digit Value key (↑). CAL
will appear in the speed display and start to flash.
Repeat the procedure to set the remaining
calibration figures that correspond to the size of
rear tyre fitted to your tractor.
IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--47.
• Depress the Exit/Cancel key twice to store the

setting and return to the main menu screen,
depress again to exit set up and return to the
original display.
2--46

Ground Speed Calibration Numbers Rear Tyre Rolling Circumferences
The rolling circumference for any given tyre size will Tyre Size Tyre Rolling Circumference
vary depending on tyre manufacturer. The figures
shown in the table are an average based on rolling Centimetres Inches
circumference data supplied by several 20.8R -- 38 550.1 216.6
manufacturers. To obtain an accurate figure for your 580/70R -- 38 543.6 214.0
rear tyres, consult your authorised dealer or tyre 650/65R -- 38 545.3 214.7
supplier.
650/75R -- 38 581.1 228.8
710/70R -- 38 576.2 226.8
If the size of tyre on your tractor is not listed, then the
road speed calibration may be carried out using one 710/60R -- 42 567.5 223.4
of the following procedures. 18.4R -- 42 555.7 218.8
20.8R -- 42 581.5 228.9
Carry out the Auto calibration as previously 580/70R -- 42 569.0 224.0
described or measure the rear tyre rolling 650/65R -- 42 577.6 227.4
circumference. 620/70R -- 42 580.9 228.7
14.9R -- 46 554.2 218.2
1. To measure the rolling circumference of the rear 420/80R -- 46 555.5 218.7
tyre, park the tractor on a level surface and make
480/80R -- 46 587.2 231.2
a vertical chalk mark on the sidewall where the
tyre tread contacts the ground. Make a second 520/85R -- 46 608.8 239.7
chalk mark on the ground aligning with the mark 18.4R -- 46 587.0 231.1
on the tyre. 320/90R -- 50 559.0 220.1
320/90R -- 54 529.0 208.3
2. Slowly drive the tractor forward until the rear
wheel has made one revolution and the chalk
mark on the sidewall is again in contact with the
ground. Mark the ground again and measure the
distance between the two chalk marks.
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor emits a low intensity
microwave signal which will not cause any ill effects
in normal use. Although the signal intensity is low, do
not look directly into the face of the sensor while in
operation so as to avoid eye damage.
2--47

ENHANCED KEYPAD AND

PERFORMANCE MONITOR (where fitted)
93
The enhanced keypad consists of 16 buttons or 3. Engine Oil Pressure (D). This key will display the
’keys’ that select, control or programme various engine oil pressure bargraph.
functions and displays in the central and dot matrix
screens. Keys 5, 6, 10 and 11 are used to set--up and 4. Programmed Maintenance Reminder (D). The
programme many of the enhanced keypad functions. maintenance schedule key provides two levels of
reminder identified as ’Heavy’ and Light.
Unless otherwise described, depress the keys once
to obtain the appropriate display. A symbol will 5. Menu Enter (D). Depress to select set--up and
appear in the display to confirm the function programming modes.
selected.
6. Menu Scroll Up or Digit Value (D). Depress this
key repeatedly to scroll upwards through the
Legend: (D) = Dot Matrix Display
menu or change the value of a number.
(C) = Centre Digital Display
7. P.T.O. Speed (C). Depress once to display rear
1. Hourmeter (D). Touch the key to view total Power Take Off speed, press again and hold for
number of hours that the tractor has operated. 3 seconds to show front P.T.O. speed (where
The hours recorded should be used as a guide to fitted).
the service intervals for the tractor.
8. Rear Wheel Slip (C). The level of rear wheel slip
2. Odometer (D). The odometer provides a visual will appear as a one or two digit percentage (%)
record of the distance travelled in kilometres or figure (with radar option only).
miles depending on the ground speed unit
selected. Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’.
2--48

Enhanced Keypad (continued)
94
9. Hitch Height Position (C). Depress once to 14. Area Accumulator (D). The total area worked will
display the rear hitch height, press again and be displayed in hectares or acres depending on
hold for 3 seconds to show front linkage height the ground speed unit selected.
(where fitted). The display will show a figure
between ’0’ (fully lowered) and ’100’ (maximum 15. Area Per Hour Forecaster (D). Touch this key
raised position). and the area/hour symbol will display together
with a forecast of the area that will be worked in
10. Exit/Cancel (D). Use this key to Exit or cancel one hour if the current rate of work is continued.
set--up and programming modes.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per
11. Menu Scroll Down or Digit Select (D). Depress hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
this key to scroll downwards through the menu or subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
select an alternative digit in the Dot Matrix may occur.
Display.
16. Remote Valve Operation (D). The display will
12. Battery Voltage (D). With the engine running, show the flow rate through each valve as a
touch the key to display the battery symbol percentage (%), the direction of cylinder
together with a digital display of the battery movement (extend or retract) and the number of
voltage. the valve selected. (See Electronic Remote
Control Valves in Section 3).
13. Trailer Brake Air Pressure (D). Depress to
display the trailer brake air pressure bargraph.
2--49

PERFORMANCE MONITOR
Odometer (Distance Record)
The odometer provides a visual record of the

distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending
on the ground speed unit selected.
Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’. ’1’ may be

used for individual journey distances and ’2’ to
provide a total for all journeys travelled. Both displays
may be reset to zero.
Touch the key once to select reading ’1’, touch again 95

to select reading ’2’. Keeping the key depressed for
more than 3 seconds will re--set the selected
odometer to zero.
The journey distance in the display will appear in

steps of:
0 to 19.999 Km/Miles 0.001 Km/Miles

2000 to 19999 Km/Miles 1.0 Km/Miles
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, distance

calculations are based on axle rotation and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur.
Area per Hour Forecaster
Touch the AREA/HOUR key (1). The ‘AREA/HOUR’

symbol will display, together with a forecast (2) of the
area that will be worked in one hour if the current rate
of work is continued.
The area per hour will appear in steps of 0.01

Ha/Acre.

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
may occur. 96
2--50

Area Accumulator
NOTE: Before activating the area accumulator

function ensure the correct implement width has
been entered into the TPM memory.
The accumulated area (total area worked) can be

displayed by depressing the AREA key (1).
Depending on the unit set in the tractor speed display
(K/mh or MPH) the reading will be in hectares or
acres.
Depress the area accumulator key repeatedly to

toggle through the three displays in the dot matrix
screen:
1. OFF. The area accumulator is off.
2. ON. Area accumulator on. Area will be

accumulated as the tractor moves irrespective of
the position of the implement.
3. A. Area accumulation will start recording

when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop accumulating when the
implement is raised.
The area accumulator symbol (2) will appear in the

display along with the area figure.
With trailed equipment, area accumulation may be 97

temporarily interrupted, for example, at the
headland, by means of a switch connected into the
implement status socket (where fitted). See
‘Electrical Power Panel’ on page 2--19.
The area measurement in the display (3) will appear

in steps of:
0 to 199.99 Ha/acre 0.01 Ha/acre

200 to 1999.9 Ha/acre 0.1 Ha/acre
2000 to 19999 Ha/acre 1.0 Ha/acre
Area accumulation can be reset to zero at any time

by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key (1)
Figure 97, until the display returns to zero.

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are 98
may occur.
2--51

PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor, located in front of
the right-hand footsteps, emits a low intensity
microwave signal which is completely safe in normal
use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look
directly into the face of the sensor while in operation
so as to avoid eye damage.
Programming Keys
Four keys are used to select, change or memorise

the various functions related to the performance
monitor and enhanced keypad. All programme
information will appear in the Dot Matrix Display
(DMD) along with the relevant symbol for the function
selected.
1. Menu Up/Digit Value Key. Use this key to scroll

upwards through the function menu or to
increase the value of a selected digit during a
calibration procedure. Values will increase by
one each time the key is depressed.
2. Exit/Cancel Key. Depress this key to exit the

calibration mode. The key may be used at any
time during a set--up procedure to cancel and exit
the calibration mode, however, information not
saved will be lost.
3. Menu Down/Digit Select Key. In the calibration

mode depress this key to scroll downwards
through the menu or to select a digit for 99
re--calibration. Each time the key is depressed
the flashing cursor showing the current digit
selected will move one space to the right.
4. Menu Enter Key. Depress this key for 3 seconds

to enter the programme mode, SETUP/MENU
will appear initially in the display. After 2 seconds
the display will change to read CAL. This will be
accompanied by the Menu Up/Down arrows and
the Menu Enter symbol.
When the appropriate function screen has been

selected, depress the Menu/Enter key again to
access the calibration mode.
2--52

Setting the Implement Width

In order that the micro-processor may calculate the
cumulative area, the working width of the implement
must be entered into the memory. For example, to
enter an implement working width of 4.5 metres
(14.76 ft.) carry out the following procedure.

and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds. The
DMD will read SETUP_MENU, this will change
to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys, scroll through the menu until the
implement width symbol is displayed.
100
• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’0’ then move the cursor one space to
the right with the Digit Select key and enter ’4’.
Move the cursor to the right of the decimal point
and enter ’5’. The reading displayed should now
be 04.50 mtrs (14.76 ft.).
• Touch the Menu/Enter key to store the setting
and return to the main menu.
NOTE: The micro--processor cannot calculate the
area worked unless the correct implement width is
entered. 101
Calibrating for Wheel Slip

(where fitted)
Before setting the slip alarm point, a zero wheel slip
factor has to be determined. This calibration must be
carried out on a hard level surface where wheel slip
is unlikely to occur.
NOTE: The Electronic Draft Control auto slip
function (see EDC operation) will not operate unless
this procedure is carried out.
• With the tractor stationary and the engine
running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key
for 3 seconds. The DMD will read
102
SETUP_MENU, this will change to CAL after 2
seconds. Using the Menu/Enter key, scroll
through the menu until the wheel slip symbol is
displayed.
• Drive the tractor at a constant speed above 5

Km/h (3.1 MPH). When a steady speed has been
reached, depress the Menu Enter key, CAL ON
will appear in the display. After a short distance
touch the Menu Enter key again, the display will
change to CAL OK.
and return to the main menu.
2--53

Setting the Slip Alarm Point
NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the

slip alarm function will be omitted from the display.
The slip alarm point may be set as a one or two digit

figure that, if exceeded, will cause an audible alarm
to sound. To set a wheel slip limit of 15% carry out the
following procedure.

to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu 103
wheel slip symbol (1) is displayed.

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’1’, move the cursor to the right with the
Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value key,
enter ’5’. The slip alarm point is now set at 15%.
• Touch the Menu/Enter key to memorise the

setting and return to the main menu.
If wheel slip exceeds the pre--set limit, the slip symbol

will appear in the DMD and the amber warning light
will illuminate on the instrument console.
Audible Beep -- ON/OFF
Each time one of the keys is pressed, an audible

’beep’ sound will be heard. The beep can be switched
off if required.

Up/Down keys, scroll through the menu until
BEEP ON/OFF is displayed.
• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the 104

set--up screen. Using the Menu Up/Down keys,
align the arrow (1) with ON or OFF as required.

and return to the main menu. Depress the
Exit/Cancel key to return to the original display.
2--54

Programming the Service Reminder
The service reminder function allows the operator to

programme two service interval reminders using the
Enhanced Keypad. The following procedure is the
same for LIGHT and HEAVY service intervals.

service reminder symbol (1) appears in the
display. 105
Setting a Light Service Reminder

Service Reminder sub--menu. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys display ’LIGHT’, touch the
Menu/Enter key and a flashing cursor (1) will
appear at the first number to be set. Using the
Digit Value key enter the first number to be set,
move the cursor one space to the right with the
Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value key,
enter the second digit, repeat for the third digit.
The display will now read LIGHT ------ (where ------
will be the selected hours).
106
• Touch the Menu/Enter key to memorise the
setting and return to the main menu. Depress the
Exit/Cancel key to return to the original display.
The service reminder is now set for the selected
period.
Two hours before the service is due the Light Service

symbol and the hours remaining will appear in the
DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for 4
seconds after the engine is started.
2--55

Setting a Heavy Service Reminder
Select HEAVY on the main menu and repeat the

procedure used for setting the LIGHT service
reminder.
Ten hours before the service is due the Heavy

Service symbol and the hours remaining will appear
in the DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for
4 seconds after the engine is started.
107
Time Expiry Warnings
As the time to service expires, the relevant symbol

will appear hourly in the display for 20 seconds. The
number of hours remaining before the service will
also be shown and this will be accompanied by the
Amber warning light. When time to service has
expired, only the symbol will appear hourly in the
display.
If required, the service time count--down may be

terminated by re--setting the Service Reminder
interval to zero or by changing the period until the
next service is due.
2--56

ALARM FUNCTIONS
The illumination of a warning light may be

accompanied by an audible alarm. Depending on the
severity of the malfunction, one of the following
alarms may be heard.
Critical Alarm
A continuous pulse alarm accompanied by the red

warning light (1). The tractor must be stopped
immeadiately. The alarm will sound until the fault is
corrected or the engine switched off.
Non Critical Alarm
A 4 second pulsating alarm will be accompanied by

the amber warning light (2). A failure or error has
occurred but the operator may continue work. The
fault should be rectified as soon as possible.
108
Action Required
A two pulse alarm will sound for 1 second to advise

the operator that a certain action is required. The
alarm will continue to be present until the operator
carries out the appropriate action or the tractor
engine is switched off.
Safety and General Alarms
A continuous alarm will sound if the operator

attempts to carry out an inappropriate action i.e.
driving the tractor with the parking brake applied.
Parking Lights
A pulse alarm will sound for a short period if the

engine is switched off and the parking lights are left
on.
Status ’Beep’
A ’beep’ will sound each time a key is depressed on

the keypad. This sound may be disabled if required,
see page 2--54.
2--57

ERROR CODES AND WARNINGS
The advanced electronics on your tractor are able to

detect a malfunction or error occurring in key areas
such as engine, transmission, electrical and
hydraulic systems. Should a malfunction or error
occur, the relevant symbol and error code will appear
in the Dot Matrix Display.
NOTE: See page 2--61 to 2--65 for an explanation of

warning and advisory symbols.
This may be accompanied by the illumination of a

warning light and an audible alarm depending on the 109
severity of the fault. Consult your authorised dealer.
Active and Non Active Warnings
In addition to the error codes previously described,

there are a number of other warning symbols that
may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. These
symbols will be accompanied by either a Red
(critical) or Amber (non--critical) warning light.
Critical symbols appearing with a Red warning light

will remain permanently displayed until the tractor is
stopped and the fault rectified.
Depending on the severity of the fault, non critical

symbols accompanied by the Amber light will be
displayed for five seconds before the DMD defaults
to the symbol previously shown. The amber warning
light will continue to illuminate. However, if the fault
is of a simple nature then the Amber light may go out
when the fault code disappears from the display.
By using the CAL/SEL button, or the Enhanced

Keypad where fitted, active warnings that are not
permanently displayed may be recalled.
2--58

Accessing Stored Error Codes
Using the CAL/SEL button
• Depress and hold the CAL/SEL button for three

seconds to enter SETUP MENU, after two
seconds the display will change to CAL. Using
the clock set buttons H and M to toggle the
display, select the the active warning symbol (1),
Figure 110.
• Depress the CAL/SEL button and the active

symbol will be replaced with a symbol
corresponding to the fault detected.
• If more than one warning symbol has been 110

stored, the display will cycle through each one in
turn. After the fault symbols have been
displayed, the screen will default back to the
active warning symbol.
• Momentarily depress the dimming button to exit

the display.
Using the Enhanced Keypad

and hold the Menu/Enter key (2) for 3 seconds.
The DMD will read SETUP MENU, this will
change to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up key (1), scroll through the menu until the
active warning symbol (1) Figure 112, is
displayed.
• By momentarily depressing the Menu/Enter key

again, the active symbol will be replaced with a
symbol corresponding to the fault detected.
111
• If more than one non--active symbol has been

stored, the display will cycle through each one in
turn. After the fault symbols have been
displayed, the screen will default back to the
active warning symbol.
Touch the Exit/Cancel key to exit and return to the

original display.
112
2--59

WARNING AND ADVISORY SYMBOLS
There are a number of warning/advisory symbols

that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. The
symbols can be categorised into four main groups.
1. Warning. These symbols advise of a fault that is

critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop the
tractor as soon as possible, investigate the
cause and rectify the fault.
2. Maintenance. These symbols tell the operator

there is a concern relating to the basic functions
of the tractor, ie. water contamination in the fuel,
alternator not charging etc.
3. System Fault. The system fault symbols relate 113

to an operational fault in one or more of the
tractors main components, either electrical or
mechanical. May be accompanied by a four digit
fault code. Consult your authorised dealer.
4. Advisory. The advisory symbols are not

detrimental to the operation of the tractor but
should not be ignored. Take appropriate action
where necessary.
2--60

ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
DMD PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

LAMP LAMP
Amber Handbrake applied with

Safety Release handbrake.
flashing vehicle moving.
Operator leaves seat

Amber
Safety without Apply handbrake.
flashing
applying handbrake.
Handbrake not released

Action
-- during Release handbrake.
required
auto take--off.
Handbrake not applied

-- -- Safety Apply handbrake.
at key OFF
Action Drive engaged without

-- -- Cycle clutch pedal.
required depressing clutch pedal.
Action Place shuttle lever

-- -- Shuttle lever in drive.
required in neutral.
Action Transmission park lock

-- -- Disengage park lock.
required engaged.
Action Transmission oil Run tractor until oil

-- --
required temperature too low. temperature increases.
Action Key ON, engine not Turn key OFF or start

-- --
required running. engine.
-- -- General Indicators not cancelled. Cancel indicators.
Parking Parking lights ON at

-- -- Turn parking lights OFF.
lights key--off.
Rear Power Take--Off

Amber If accompanied by critical
-- Safety engaged, operator not
flashing alarm apply parking brake.
present.
Front Power Take--Off

Amber If accompanied by critical
-- Safety engaged operator not
flashing alarm apply parking brake.
present.
2--61

ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION (continued)

LAMP LAMP
Amber Incorrect use of PTO Do not engage PTO until

-- Non critical
flashing control -- Timed Out. DMD symbol clears.
Amber
Reduce tractor or
-- flashing/ Non critical Wheel slip limit exceeded.
implement draft load.
continuous
Instrument display Adjust backlighting to

-- -- None
backlighting. required level.
Intelliview monitor present

Configure to ’ON LINE’
-- -- -- but not configured ’ON
status.
LINE’.
Front remote valve Reduce oil flow
Amber not functioning due to requirements to other
-- flashing/ Non critical insufficient oil flow. services.
continuous Lever or joystick not in Move lever or joystick
neutral at key--on. control to neutral.
Rear remote valve Reduce oil flow
Amber not functioning due to requirements to other
-- flashing/ Non critical insufficient oil flow. services.
continuous Lever or joystick not in Move lever or joystick
neutral at key--on. control to neutral.
2--62

WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DMD
LAMP LAMP
Red Transmission oil

-- Critical
flashing pressure low.
Amber These symbols advise of a

Transmission oil fault that is critical to the
-- flashing/ --
temperature too high. operation of the tractor.
continuous
Red Engine coolant Stop the tractor as soon as

-- Critical possible, investigate the
flashing temperature too high.
cause and rectify the fault.
Red Engine oil pressure If the fault cannot be easily

Critical rectified, consult your
flashing too low.
authorised dealer.
Red Power steering oil

-- Critical
flashing pressure too low.
Red Hydraulic pump charge

-- Non critical
flashing pressure too low.
Amber
-- Non critical Network malfunction. These symbols advise of
flashing
a fault that may be critical
to the operation of the
Amber tractor.
Non critical Air brake pressure low.
flashing
Stop
p the tractor as soon as
possible,
ibl iinvestigate
ti t the
th
Amber cause and rectify the fault.
-- flashing/ -- Battery voltage too high.
continuous If the fault cannot be easily
rectified, consult your
Amber authorised dealer.
-- Non critical Battery voltage too low.
flashing
Red Brake boost pressure

-- Non critical
flashing too low.
2--63

WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION -- WITH ENGINE SHUTDOWN ACTIVATED

LAMP LAMP
Red Engine oil pressure

Critical
flashing too low.
Red Transmission oil These symbols advise

-- Critical of a fault that is critical
flashing pressure low.
tractor
tractor.
Red Transmission oil Automatic engine
-- Critical
flashing temperature too high. shutdown will be
activated and the engine
will STOP.
Red Engine coolant
-- Critical Investigate the cause
flashing temperature too high.
and rectify the fault.
If the fault cannot be

Red Engine control system easily rectified, consult
-- Critical
flashing malfunction. your authorised dealer.
Red Engine ECU control

-- Critical
flashing data compromised.
The Dot Matrix Display will cycle ENGINE STOP symbol with the appropriate warning symbol.
2--64

MAINTENANCE DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DMD
LAMP LAMP
Amber
flashing/ -- Alternator not charging.
continuous
Amber
Engine intake filter
-- flashing/ -- These symbols advise of
blocked.
continuous a fault that may be critical
Amber tractor.
Water contamination
-- flashing/ Non critical
in the fuel.
continuous Stop the tractor as soon as
Amber possible, investigate the
Transmission/Hydraulic cause and rectify the fault.
-- flashing/ --
oil filter blocked.
continuous
If the fault cannot be easily
Amber HEAVY maintenance rectified, consult your
-- flashing/ -- schedule due in authorised dealer.
continuous ’xx’ hours*.
LIGHT maintenance
-- -- -- schedule due in
’xx’ hours*.
* ’xx’ represents number of hours before next service.
2--65

POWER COMMANDT TRANSMISSION
Power Command is an electronically controlled full

powershift transmission of an advanced design that
offers many automated functions for easier
operation.
Subject to legal requirements in your country, the

following transmissions are available
50 km/h transmission.
19 forward and 6 reverse ratios
IMPORTANT: When travelling at high road speeds
with trailed or semi--mounted equipment attached to
the tractor, ensure the equipment is rated for 50 km/h
operation in respect to its construction, brakes and
114
tyres.
40 km/h Economy transmission
19 forward and 6 reverse ratios.
40 km/h transmission
plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range.
30 km/h transmission
(18th. gear cannot be selected)
plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range.
Details of creeper gear operation will be found on

page 2--81.
IMPORTANT: A tractor fitted with Power Command

transmission cannot be tow--started and must not be
towed other than to remove it from a field or onto a
trailer or truck. When towing the tractor, the speed
should not exceed 5k/mh (3.1 MPH) with the engine
switched off, or 10 k/mh (6.2 MPH) with the engine
running.
GROUND SPEED CHARTS
The ground speed of your tractor may be displayed

on the instrument panel. If your tractor is equipped
with radar then the ground speed displayed will be a
true reading. Tractors without radar will display a
ground speed that is subject to minor inaccuracies
due to the effects of wheel slip, tyre pressures,
change of tyre size, etc.
The charts starting on page 2--83 show the ground

speeds in km/h and MPH. To find the road speed for
your tractor in any given gear ratio, use the column
with your rear tyre size in the heading.
2--66

Clutch Pedal
A clutch pedal (1) is provided but is not required for
gear changes or forward/reverse shuttle operations.
The clutch pedal is required only for positioning the
tractor to attach equipment or if operating in confined
spaces when the low ratios do not provide a slow
enough speed, at moderate/low engine speeds, to
give precise control.
NOTE: The clutch pedal incorporates a safety start
device and must be depressed when starting the
tractor engine.
IMPORTANT: To avoid premature wear, do not use

115
the clutch pedal as a footrest.
Powershift Control
Power Command transmission is operated by

means of a powershift control incorporating two push
buttons. The buttons are used to make upward or
downward gear changes on the move, even when
performing operations such as ploughing, etc.
Each one of the gear ratios may be sequentially

selected using the upshift button (2) or downshift
button (1). A digital display (3) indicates the gear ratio
selected. It is not necessary to depress the clutch
pedal when using the upshift or downshift buttons.
116
The powershift control may be repositioned to suit

the operator. Loosen the clamp knob (2), move the
control to the most comfortable position by rotating
left or right, or by extending the arm forwards or
rearwards. Tighten the knob securely to clamp the
powershift control in the new position.
To adjust the height of the armrest, loosen the knob

(1). Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift
or lower the complete assembly. Re--tighten the
clamp knob securely.
117
2--67

Shuttle Lever
Selection of forward or reverse travel is by means of
the shuttle lever (1), located to the left of the steering
wheel, is used to select forward or reverse travel.
The lever is spring-loaded to prevent inadvertent
movement. It is not necessary to depress the clutch
pedal when actuating the shuttle lever.
NOTE: If the shuttle lever is moved to the forward or

reverse position with the parking brake engaged, an
audible alarm will be heard.
NOTE: To select forward or reverse drive the
operator must be in the tractor seat. If the shuttle
118
lever is inadvertently moved from the neutral position
without the operator in the seat, one of the following
actions must be taken to re--enable drive:--
With the operator in the seat and the shuttle lever in
neutral, depress and release the clutch pedal.
OR
Release the parking brake with the shuttle lever in
the neutral position.
WARNING
To prevent inadvertent tractor movement, always
stop the engine, place the shuttle lever in neutral and
firmly apply the parking brake before leaving the
tractor. The transmission will not prevent the tractor
from rolling when the engine is shut off.
NOTE: When operating in low temperatures,

upshifting may be restricted to the lower gears until the
transmission oil temperature reaches 10° C (50° F).
Restricted upshifting will be accompanied by the
warning ’CL’ in the digital transmission display. With
cold transmission oil, avoid shuttle operations, as far as
practicable, until the oil has warmed up.
2--68

Driving the Tractor
Start the engine with the shuttle lever in neutral and

the clutch pedal depressed. The LCD on the
instrument panel will display ’N’. This will be repeated
in transmission gear display by a frame surrounding
the ‘N’ (for neutral) symbol. The figure ‘7’ will also
appear in the upper gear display. (When the tractor
is initially started, the transmission will automatically
select 7th. gear).
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in neutral
and the clutch pedal depressed. 119
For forward travel, with the engine idling, pull the

shuttle lever (1) toward the steering wheel, against
light spring-pressure, and move it up. The frame
around the ’N’ will move up to enclose the forward
direction symbol. Each time the shuttle lever is
operated, the ’frame’ will move to highlight the
forward, neutral or reverse symbol.
120
Once moving, select the required ratio with the

upshift button (2) or downshift button (1), as
previously described. An example of the display that
you will see is shown at (3), where the upper tractor
symbol indicates forward and ‘10’ indicates that 10th.
gear is selected. The LCD segment for 10th. gear will
also be displayed.
An alternative lower or higher ratio may be

preselected before pulling away. However, if a ratio
higher than 12 is selected then the electronic control
will select 12, this being the highest ratio permissible
when pulling away from a standstill.
121
2--69

If, for example, 15th. gear is selected before pulling

away, the 15th. gear segment will flash and the 12th.
gear segment will be steady. The tractor will pull
away in 12th. gear and change up, sequentially, to
the selected gear as engine load, engine speed and
road speed are optimised. The segments for 13th.
and 14th. gears will appear, as these ratios are
automatically selected, then the 15th. gear segment
will stop flashing and become steady as that gear is
reached.
NOTE: In very cold conditions it may be necessary

to allow the transmission oil to warm up before
attempting to shift into the higher gears. Should this
occur, a warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. When the symbol disappears from the
display the transmission will function normally. See
page 2--61 for details.
To reverse the direction of travel, reduce engine

speed, pull the shuttle lever (1) toward the steering
wheel, then move it down.
NOTE: When changing from forward to reverse

travel, the nearest available ratio will be selected. As
there are six ratios available in reverse, the ground
speed in reverse gear may be different to the speed
in the selected forward gear.
122
When performing shuttle operations in a high gear,
for example forward F15 selected, when the shuttle
lever is moved to the reverse position, the
transmission will select the highest available ratio in
reverse (R6).
When the shuttle lever is moved forward again, ratio

(F12) will be selected and the F12 segment will
appear in the display.
123
2--70

Auto Shift Function
Engaging Auto shift permits automatic gear

changing in the forward ratios. Two auto shift ranges
are available:
Auto Field mode --

a range of five gears may be selected between
ratios 1 and 11.
Auto Transport mode --

Lowest auto gear -- 17 (30 km/h transmission)
or, Lowest auto gear -- 18 (40 km/h transmission)
or, Lowest auto gear -- 19 (50 km/h transmission)
124
Auto Transport Mode
While travelling forward in 12th. gear or higher, press

and release the AUTO function switch (1)
Figure 124, this will provide Auto shifting from 12th
gear upwards.
If required, the range of Auto shift gears can be

expanded to include additional lower gears where
necessary. Any gear between 7 and 11 can be
programmed as the Lowest Auto Gear (LAG). To set
the lowest gear carry out the following procedure.
• With the key-start off, move the shuttle lever (1)

to the forward gear position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the

programme procedure.
• Press and hold down the AUTO switch (1)

Figure 124.
• While holding down the AUTO switch, turn on the

key-start switch (but do not start the engine). The
central display will show ’OPt’.
• Release the AUTO switch and, using the clock 125

’H’ or ’M’ buttons, select ’OPt 2’. Pause for two
seconds until the display changes to show the
currently selected Lowest Auto Gear.
2--71

• Using the clock buttons again, select the new

lowest gear between gears 7 and 11. Depressing
the hour button (1) will select a higher gear,
depressing the minute button (2) will select a
lower gear.
• When the new lowest gear has been selected,

turn off the key--start to store the setting.
The transmission is now able to automatically make

upshifts or downshifts within the selected range of
gears, as dictated by engine torque, speed, and the
use of brakes and foot throttle.
126
It is now possible to engage the Auto Transport mode
while operating in the lower gears providing the
current gear engaged is within the extended auto
range but below 11th gear. To engage Auto Transport
press and release the AUTO function switch twice
within one second.
In Auto Transport, with the clutch pedal depressed

and the tractor stopped, Auto shift will automatically
select the lowest auto gear in the range in
preparation to move off.
The driver can, if required, manually select a higher

gear to move off i.e. on a downhill slope.
During road transport operations, it is possible to

override the auto function and manually select a
lower gear by depressing the downshift button.
Providing the downshift does not exceed the preset
auto shift load and speed parameters, the auto
function will remain engaged.
To disengage the Auto shift function and return to

manual shifting, press and release the AUTO switch
(1).
Alternatively, Auto Transport may be cancelled by

pressing the upshift button or by using the shuttle
lever to select reverse.
127
2--72

Shifting in Auto Field Mode
While operating in any forward gear between 1 and

11, press and release the AUTO function switch. This
will cause the transmission to momentarily upshift to
establish a torque output value from the engine. As
the engine speed drops the transmission will
downshift again.
This sequence will establish the shift parameters and

these will be entered into the auto memory.
Dependent on load and speed, the transmission is
now able to make automatic shifts within a span of
five gears.
The gear ratio currently selected will already be

shown in the Display of Gears with the appropriate
LCD segment. When Auto Field is engaged a plough
symbol will appear in the lower display.
Example 1: While operating in 7th. gear, ‘7’ is

displayed along with the 7th. gear segment. If the
AUTO switch is pressed, the segments for both 5th.
and 9th. gear will flash to indicate that automatic
upshifts or downshifts can occur within the 5 to 9 gear
span.
Example 2: With 11th gear selected and displayed,

press the AUTO function switch. The segments for
8th and 12th gears will start to flash indicating the 128
tractor will automatically shift between 8th and 12th
gears.
Auto Shifting and ’Go To’ modes
If the transmission is already in ’Go To’ mode (see

page 2--77) when the Auto Field function is selected,
the lowest ’Go To’ gear will become the lowest gear
of the Auto span unless the current operating gear
is lower. If the currently selected gear is lower, then
it will become the lowest ’Go To’ gear. With both Auto
Field and ’Go To’ modes selected, the lowest limit
gear for both functions will always be the same.
2--73

Changing the Auto Shift Point
IMPORTANT: Changes to the Auto Shift point must

be made before engaging the Auto Shift function.
To suit different applications, the point at which the

transmission makes an automatic gear shift may be
adjusted from the default setting of 20%. Auto Shift
gear changes are related to an increase or decrease
in engine speed which can be set at 5, 10, 15, 20 or
25 percent.
NOTE: For Auto Transport operations the shift point

will automatically default to 20% and remain at that
setting.
With the shift point set at 10%, a transmission upshift
will occur every time the engine speed increases by
10%. Consequently, as the engine speed decreases
by the same amount, the transmission will make a
downshift.
It is recommended that during field operations the

shift point is set at a low percentage.
To change the shift point, depress and hold the

AUTO function switch for at least one second. The
current shift point figure appears in the Display of
Gears and the ’ramp’ symbol (1) begins to flash.
1
Depress the AUTO function switch repeatedly to
scroll through the shift points.
With the new shift point selected, release the AUTO
switch and pause for five seconds. The new setting
will be memorised and the display will return to
normal.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic
programme settings made during tractor operation
are transferred from the operating memory to the 129
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.
2--74

Changing the Gear Span
The range of plus or minus two gears may be

expanded both up and down on the move, using the
downshift and upshift buttons (1) and (2).
Example 1: Upshift gears: When operating in Auto

mode in 7th. gear, as described previously, the
segments for 5th. and 9th. gear will flash. On
reaching 9th gear press the upshift button (2) once
to select 10th gear. When the tractor has upshifted
to 10th, press the button again to select 11th gear.
Auto shifting will now be provided between 5th and
11th gears. The segment for 5th will continue to flash 130
identifying this as the lowest limit gear currently
available.
Example 2: Downshift gears: Assuming 5th has

been selected as the lowest Auto ratio, slow the
tractor until this gear has been engaged. Then, using
the downshift button (1), select 4th gear and further
reduce speed until 4th gear engages. 3rd gear may
now be selected if required. Applying this technique
it is possible to select gears 1 to 11 in the Auto range.
Reducing the gear span
If necessary, the number of gears available in the

Auto Field range may be reduced by using the upshift
and downshift buttons in the following way.
Example 1: Upshift gears: With the upper limit gear

showing as 9th (flashing segment) and the tractor
operating in a lower gear, depress the downshift
button (1) Figure 130. The flashing segment will
show a one gear reduction each time the button is
depressed.
Example 2: Downshift gears: With the tractor 131

stopped and the engine running, depress the AUTO
function switch (1). Using the upshift button (2)
Figure 130, move the lower limit gear upwards
(flashing segment) until the desired gear is obtained,
release the switch. This procedure will permit the
lower limit gear to be changed without affecting the
upper limit gear setting in the Auto memory.
2--75

Changing gear shift threshold
The point at which the gears change is established

by the original throttle setting and torque applied to
the engine at the time the AUTO function switch was
depressed. It is possible to alter the upshift or
downshift point to a higher or lower engine rpm if
required.
Higher ERPM: Move the hand throttle (2), to a higher
erpm setting than originally set. The parameters for
the upshift will automatically update and gear shifts
will occur at a higher engine speed.
Lower ERPM: Reset the hand throttle (2), to provide 132
a lower engine speed than previously set and
depress the upshift button (1). The transmission will
upshift and the shift parameters will be updated. Auto
gear shifting will now occur at a lower engine speed.
NOTE: Changing the gear shift parameters may

cause the shift point for one or more gears to fall
outside the original 5 gear span. If this should occur,
widen the gear span using the procedure outlined on
the previous page.
Standby mode
The Auto Field function will be put into the standby

mode when:
• The 3 point hitch is raised.

• The clutch pedal is depressed.
• Shuttle lever is moved from the forward drive
position
While in the standby mode the gear segment LCD’s
will continue to flash (unless reverse direction is
selected) and the established shift parameters will
remain in the Auto function memory.
To exit the programme
The Auto Field function may be exited in three ways:
1. Momentarily depress the AUTO function switch

(1), while in Auto Field mode.
2. Select 13th gear or above while Auto Field

mode is active.
3. Engage creeper gears.
133
2--76

Go To Mode
An additional feature on your tractor is the ‘Go To’

mode. The ’Go To’ system can be programmed to
downshift to a lower gear below that of the working
gear whenever the implement is raised. This feature
can be further enhanced by selecting the Auto Field
function whereby the tractor will also automatically
upshift again on lowering the implement.
To programme ’Go To’ mode, proceed as follows.
With the engine running, press and hold the AUTO

function switch (1).
134
Within one second, press and release the top of the
fast raise switch (1) to raise the implement. The Auto
Field symbol will appear on the transmission display.
Continue to press and hold the AUTO function
switch.
135
With the AUTO function switch still depressed, select
the required ‘Go To’ gear using the upshift button (2)
or downshift button (1). The segment for the ’Go To’
gear selected will flash. Release the AUTO switch.
Lower the implement by pressing and releasing the
fast raise switch.
NOTE: Auto shift in the field range is disengaged

every time the implement is raised and re-engaged
when it is lowered.
136
2--77

To disengage ’Go To’ mode and return to normal

shifting, press and hold the AUTO switch (1). Move
the fast raise switch (1) Figure 135, to raise or lower
the implement.
NOTE: With Auto shift selected in conjunction with

the ’Go To’ mode, the lowest gear in the Auto function
becomes the ’Go To’ gear.
137
Speed Matching
When decelerating in the transport range of gears,

the transmission is able to automatically select a
gear to match engine speed and road speed.
As the tractor slows, either depress and release the

clutch pedal or, momentarily place the shuttle lever
in neutral. The transmission will automatically select
a lower gear to match engine speed with road speed.
Available ratios:
Road Transport -- Standard Mode
ratios 12 to 17, 18 or 19
Road Transport -- Extended Mode

ratios Lowest Auto Gear to 17, 18 or 19
NOTE: Providing the Extended Mode is activated,

Speed Matching will function down to the Lowest
Auto Gear.
The currently selected gear, if higher than the speed

matched gear, will be stored as the ’target’ gear
identified by its flashing LCD gear segment.
If, when in the Extended Mode, the clutch pedal is

depressed and the tractor stopped, Speed Matching
will enter standby mode. Releasing the clutch pedal
will re--engage the Speed Matching function and the
tractor will move off in the Lowest Auto Gear.
If required, the operator may manually select a

different gear to move off. Providing the chosen gear
is within the auto shift range, Speed Matching will
continue to operate across the full range of gears
from the Lowest Auto Gear upwards.
2--78

Programming Reverse Gear Ratios
When changing from forward to reverse, the

transmission will normally select the same or closest
possible ratio in reverse as was selected for forward
travel.
For special shuttle shift applications, Power

Command transmission offers the advantage of
automatically changing the reverse gear ratio up to
three ratios higher or lower than the currently
engaged forward gear ratio.
To programme an alternative reverse gear, proceed

as follows:
• Turn the key-start switch off.
138
• Move the shuttle lever (1) to the forward gear
position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the

programme procedure.
139
• Press and hold down the AUTO switch (1).
• While holding down the AUTO switch, turn on the

key-start switch (but do not start the engine). The
central display will show ’OPt’.
• Release the AUTO switch and, using the clock

’H’ or ’M’ buttons, select ’OPt 1’.
140
2--79

To programme a higher reverse ratio
• Pause for two seconds and the display will

change to show the currently programmed
reverse ratio.
NOTE: If the reverse ratio has not been previously

changed, the figure will be ’0’.
• Press the upshift button (2) one, two or three

times, as required. The display will show ‘1’, ‘2’
or ‘3’. This indicates that when reverse is
selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios
higher than the forward gear ratio. 141
To programme a lower reverse ratio
• Press the downshift button (1) one, two or three

times, as required. The display will show ‘--1’, ‘--2’
or ‘--3’. This indicates that when reverse is
selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios
lower than the forward gear ratio.
To exit the programme
• Turn the key-start switch off. The transmission is

now programmed.
NOTE: Remember that only six reverse gears are

available. Consequently, if travelling forward in ratio
F13 or above, the transmission will always behave as
if ratio F12 (the highest ratio in the field range) is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios lower in reverse, then
R4 will be selected.
Conversely, if travelling forward in ratios F1--6, the 142

transmission will always behave as if ratio 7 is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios higher in reverse, then
R3 will be selected.
2--80

CREEPER GEARS
(where fitted)
For operations requiring extra low ground speeds, a

reduction gear set (creeper gears) is available. The
reduction gear set is installed within the main
transmission housing.
With the reduction gears, an additional 10 forward

and 6 reverse creeper gear ratios are provided. The
reduction gear set has the effect of reducing the
ratios within the main transmission to provide very
low operating speeds.
The creeper gears are selected by means of a rocker

switch (1) located on the right-hand control console.
With the engine running, clutch depressed and the

shuttle lever in neutral, apply and hold down the
tractor footbrakes. Momentarily depress the upper
part of the selector switch (1), Figure 143, to engage
the creeper gears.
143
The creep speed symbol (1), will appear flashing in

the transmission display. When the creep gears are
fully engaged the symbol will cease to flash and
become steady.
To disengage creeper gears, repeat the above

procedure and depress the selector switch again.
The creep speed symbol will cease to illuminate.
IMPORTANT: The creeper gears offer very low

ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing
advantage to apply excessive draft loads to the
tractor.
144
2--81

Error Codes
In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in the

transmission controls or electronic circuit, the
malfunction symbol (1) and a four-digit error code
(2), will appear in the Dot Matrix Display on the 1
instrument panel. Error codes for the transmission
will start with the figure ’2’.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the

type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. In 2
this event, the tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become

disabled, contact your authorised dealer and report 145
the error code displayed.
There are a number of ’action reqired’ error codes

which can also appear in the Dot Matrix Display,
these are listed below.
Error
Code Action Required
P Park brake on, release brake lever.
CP Depress clutch pedal to enable
transmission (restore drive).
N Place the shuttle lever in neutral.
Transmission Calibration
Should transmission shifts become slow or jerky, the

clutches in the transmission may require
re--calibrating. Consult your authorised dealer.
CALCULATING P.T.O. SPEEDS
The gear speeds shown on the following pages are

at rated engine speed (2200 r.p.m.). To determine
the ground speeds for P.T.O. operations divide the
ground speeds in the chart by the rated engine speed
and multiply by the P.T.O. engine speed.
For example, to determine the ground speed at 540

rev/min P.T.O. speed in gear F7 (5.0 Km/h) use the
following calculation:
5.0 (Km/h) ÷ 2200 (rated speed) x 1950 (P.T.O. erpm)

= 4.43 Km/h
2--82

GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h
Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Models T7030, T7040 and T7050
Gear Ratio Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds
Km/h MPH Km/h MPH Km/h MPH
F1 1.7 1.0 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.1
F2 2.1 1.3 2.2 1.3 2.3 1.4
F3 2.4 1.4 2.6 1.6 2.7 1.6
F4 3.0 1.8 3.1 1.9 3.3 2.0
F5 3.6 2.2 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4
F6 4.3 2.6 4.6 2.8 4.8 2.9
F7 5.0 3.1 5.3 3.2 5.6 3.4
F8 6.0 3.7 6.3 3.9 6.7 4.1
F9 7.2 4.4 7.6 4.7 8.1 5.0
F10 8.7 5.4 9.2 5.7 9.7 6.0
F11 10.5 6.5 11.1 6.8 11.7 7.2
F12 12.5 7.7 13.3 8.2 14.1 8.7
F13 14.4 8.9 15.3 9.5 16.2 10.0
F14 17.4 10.8 18.4 11.4 19.5 12.1
F15 20.9 12.9 22.1 13.7 23.4 14.5
F16 25.1 15.5 26.6 16.5 28.2 17.5
F17 30.2 18.7 32.0 19.8 33.9 21.0
F18 36.3 22.5 38.5 23.9 40.7 25.2
F19 46.1 28.6 48.9 30.3 51.7 32.1
*F19 E 38.3 23.7 42.5 26.4 42.5 26.4
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available on 30 Km/h transmissions.
NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 Km/h and 40 Km/h economy transmissions.
NOTE: *With 40 Km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated.
Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds

R1 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4 4.2 2.6
R2 4.6 2.8 4.8 2.9 5.1 3.1
R3 5.5 3.4 5.8 3.6 6.1 3.7
R4 6.6 4.1 7.0 4.3 7.4 4.5
R5 7.9 4.9 8.4 5.2 8.9 5.5
R6 9.6 5.9 10.1 6.2 10.7 6.6
2--83

GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears,
Models T7030, T7040 and T7050
Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size

Gear Ratio
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
F1 0.28 0.17 0.30 0.18 0.32 0.19
F2 0.34 0.21 0.36 0.22 0.38 0.23
F3 0.41 0.25 0.44 0.27 0.46 0.28
F4 0.50 0.31 0.53 0.32 0.56 0.34
F5 0.60 0.37 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41
F6 0.72 0.44 0.76 0.47 0.81 0.50
F7 0.83 0.51 0.88 0.54 0.93 0.57
F8 1.00 0.62 1.06 0.65 1.12 0.69
F9 1.20 0.74 1.28 0.79 1.35 0.83
F10 1.45 0.90 1.54 0.95 1.62 1.0
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
R1 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41 0.71 0.44
R2 0.76 0.47 0.81 0.50 0.86 0.53
R3 0.92 0.57 0.97 0.60 1.03 0.64
R4 1.10 0.68 1.17 0.72 1.24 0.77
R5 1.33 0.82 1.41 0.87 1.49 0.92
R6 1.60 0.99 1.69 1.05 1.79 1.11
2--84

GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h
Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Model T7060
Gear Ratio Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds
F1 1.5 0.9 1.6 0.9 1.7 1.0
F2 1.9 1.1 2.0 1.2 2.1 1.3
F3 2.3 1.4 2.4 1.4 2.5 1.5
F4 2.7 (1.6 2.9 1.8 3.1 1.9
F5 3.4 2.1 3.6 2.2 3.6 2.2
F6 4.1 2.5 4.4 2.7 4.6 2.8
F7 4.6 2.8 4.9 3.0 5.1 3.1
F8 5.5 3.4 5.9 3.6 6.2 3.8
F9 6.6 4.1 7.0 4.3 7.4 4.5
F10 8.0 4.9 8.5 5.2 9.0 5.5
F11 10.0 6.2 10.6 6.5 11.2 6.9
F12 12.0 7.4 12.7 7.8 13.5 8.3
F13 13.3 8.2 14.1 8.7 14.9 9.2
F14 16.0 9.9 17.0 10.5 16.0 9.9
F15 19.3 11.9 20.4 12.6 21.6 13.4
F16 23.2 14.4 24.6 15.2 26.0 16.1
F17 26.9 16.7 30.7 19.0 32.4 20.1
F18 34.6 21.5 36.9 22.9 39.0 24.2
F19 42.6 26.4 45.2 28.0 47.8 29.7
*F19 E 35.6 22.1 37.8 23.4 39.9 24.7
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available on 30 Km/h transmissions.
NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 Km/h and 40 Km/h economy transmissions.
NOTE: *With 40 Km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated.
Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds

R1 3.5 2.1 3.7 2.2 3.9 2.4
R2 4.2 2.6 4.5 2.7 4.7 2.9
R3 5.1 3.1 5.4 3.3 5.7 3.5
R4 6.1 3.7 6.5 4.0 6.8 4.2
R5 7.6 4.7 8.1 5.0 8.5 5.2
R6 9.2 5.7 9.7 6.0 10.3 6.4
2--85

GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears,
Model T7060
Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size

Gear Ratio
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
F1 0.26 0.16 0.28 0.17 0.29 0.18
F2 0.32 0.19 0.33 0.20 0.35 0.21
F3 0.38 0.23 0.40 0.24 0.43 0.26
F4 0.46 0.28 0.49 0.30 0.51 0.31
F5 0.57 0.35 0.61 0.37 0.64 0.39
F6 0.69 0.42 0.73 0.45 0.77 0.47
F7 0.77 0.47 0.81 0.50 0.86 0.53
F8 0.92 0.57 0.98 0.60 1.04 0.64
F9 1.14 0.70 1.18 0.73 1.25 0.77
F10 1.34 0.83 1.42 0.88 1.50 0.93
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
R1 0.58 0.36 0.62 0.38 0.66 0.41
R2 0.70 0.43 0.75 0.46 0.79 0.49
R3 0.85 0.52 0.90 0.55 0.95 0.59
R4 1.02 0.63 1.08 0.67 1.14 0.70
R5 1.27 0.78 1.35 0.83 1.43 0.88
R6 1.53 0.95 1.82 1.13 1.71 1.06
2--86

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Four wheel drive tractors have a differential lock

installed in the front and rear axles to lock all four
wheels together in conditions where wheel slip may
occur. Two wheel drive tractors have a differential
lock in the rear axle only.
The differential locks are controlled by a spring

centred rocker switch on the console to the right of
the seat.
The differential lock(s) may be operated in manual

mode or automatic mode. To confirm mode selected, 146
the appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate
when engaged.
WARNING
Avoid using the differential lock at speeds above
8km/h (5 MPH) and never at speeds above 15 km/h
(9 MPH) or at any time when turning the tractor.
When engaged, the differential lock will make
steering the tractor very difficult.
IMPORTANT: If wheel spin is encountered, reduce

engine speed before engaging the differential lock,
to avoid shock loads to the transmission.
Operating in Manual Mode (all models)
In slippery conditions, momentarily depress the

bottom of the switch (1) Figure 146 , to lock both
wheels together. The differential lock(s) will engage
and a warning light in the switch and on the
instrument panel (1) will light up.
When one or both brake pedals are applied or if the

switch is returned to the off (central) position,
disengagement will occur and the warning lights in
the switch and instrument panel will go out.
Alternatively, depress the bottom of the switch again
to disengage the differential lock(s). 147
NOTE: The lock(s) will remain engaged until traction

at the wheels equalises.
2--87

Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage both front and rear differential locks in

automatic mode, depress the top of the switch (1).
The warning light in the switch will illuminate. The
indicator light (1) Figure 149 on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit while the
differential locks are engaged.
In automatic mode, disengagement of the locks will

occur as follows:
148
Fast raise switch Temporary

activated (to raise the disengagement (will
rear 3--point hitch) re--engage when 3--point
hitch is lowered
Either brake pedal is Temporary
applied disengagement
Both brake pedals are Differential lock remains
applied simultaneously engaged
Tractor speed exceeds Differential locks will
15 Km/h (9 MPH) permanently disengage
Front steering angle Temporary
exceeds pre--set limits disengagement (will
(where fitted) re--engage when
steering angle is 149
reduced)
Momentarily depress the Differential locks will
top of the differential lock permanently disengage
rocker switch
NOTE: If the differential lock is active when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain active when the
key--start is switched on again.
2--88

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (where fitted)
Four wheel drive greatly improves traction in difficult

conditions. The drive to the front wheels is designed
to be engaged or disengaged with the tractor
stationary or moving.
NOTE: The drive to the front wheels is actuated by

a three position rocker switch on the right--hand
control console. To confirm mode selected, the
appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate when
engaged.
150
Operating in Manual Mode
Press the bottom of the switch to engage the drive to

the front wheels. Warning lights in the switch and
instrument panel will illuminate when four wheel drive
is engaged. To disengage four wheel drive return the
switch to the off (central) position.
NOTE: If four wheel drive is engaged when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain engaged when
the key--start is switched on again.
Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage automatic four wheel drive mode, depress

the top of the four wheel drive switch (1) Figure 150.
The warning light in the switch will illuminate. The
indicator light (1) Figure 151 on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit while four
wheel drive is engaged.
Four wheel drive will remain permanently engaged

unless one of the following occurs:
• Wheel speed exceeds 20 Km/h (12.4 MPH).

Four wheel drive will re--engage when wheel 151
speed falls below 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)
2--89

NOTE: The following applies only to tractors fitted

with a steering angle sensor.
• Wheel speed falls below 10 Km/h (6.2 MPH) and

steering angle exceeds 30° (21° with
SuperSteer). Four wheel drive will re--engage
when the steering angle is reduced.
• Wheel speed is between 10 and 20 Km/h (6.2

and 12.4 MPH) and steering angle exceeds 25°
(17° with Supersteer). Four wheel drive will
re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during 152

manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is
required, consult your authorised dealer.
The indicator light (1) Figure 152 on the instrument

panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit when
four wheel drive is engaged.
4WD Operating Precautions NOTE: Keep the tractor in the same gear going
downhill as would be used when going uphill.
WARNING
Four wheel drive greatly increases traction. Extra CAUTION
caution is needed on slopes. Compared to two-wheel On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle is
drive, a 4WD tractor maintains traction on steeper automatically engaged when both brake pedals are
slopes, increasing the possibility of overturning. applied simultaneously to provide four wheel
braking. Additionally, you may have the optional front
disc brakes. The effectiveness of four wheel braking
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tyre wear when greatly enhances tractor braking performance
travelling on the public highway or any hard surface, therefore appropriate care should be exercised
it is recommended that four wheel drive be during heavy braking.
disengaged. Always use the specified front/rear tyre Front tyres should never be inflated above the
combinations to ensure acceptable tyre wear. recommended pressure. Ideally, rear tyre pressures
should be maintained at least 0.4 bar (6 lbf/in2) above
front tyre pressures, provided the manufacturers’
WARNING
recommendations are not exceeded.
Tractors with four wheel drive engaged or
disengaged should not be allowed to exceed 50 km/h
(31 MPH) where permitted. Overspeeding by towing IMPORTANT: Never attempt to drive the tractor with
or coasting downhill with clutch depressed or the drive shaft removed, even if you have no intention
transmission in neutral may cause loss of control, of using four wheel drive. With the drive shaft
personal injury to the operator or bystanders or removed, application of the brakes will result in
mechanical failure. severe damage to transmission components.
2--90

TERRAGLIDE™ FRONT AXLE

SUSPENSION (where fitted)
The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension will

provide improved stability, control, comfort and
traction. Terraglide is automatically activated each
time the tractor is started but will not function at
speeds below 1.5 k/mh (0.9 MPH).
When operating at speeds up to 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH),

the front axle suspension may be locked out if not
required.
153
To lock out the suspension, press the top of the

switch (1) on the control panel, a warning light (2) on
the instrument panel will illuminate to confirm the
suspension is locked. Press the top of the switch
again to reactivate the suspension facility.
At speeds above 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH), the suspension

will automatically re--engage, overriding axle lock
out. In this situation the warning light will remain on.
NOTE: Should the lock out switch warning light begin

to flash, this would indicate a malfunction of the
suspension system. Consult your authorised dealer.
154
IMPORTANT: See Ballasting and Tyres, page
3--144, regarding the use of front end weights with
front axle suspension.
WARNING
Hydraulic oil in the front axle suspension system
operates under very high pressure. Escaping
hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury. Unqualified persons should
not attempt to disconnect any pipework in the front
axle hydraulic system. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in serious injury.
WARNING
If a transmission ratio is engaged, with the engine
running and the tractor supported on axle stands, the
self-levelling function of the suspension may cause
the axle to make corrections (move up and down).
The suspension should be locked out to maintain
stability.
2--91

NOTES
2--92

SECTION 3
FIELD OPERATIONS
BEFORE OPERATING
CAUTION Page Subject

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. Important Information 3--2
Boosting the Tractor Battery 3--4
Read this section carefully for a thorough Starting the Engine 3--5
understanding of operational requirements. Even if
you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly Stopping the Engine 3--8
read this section of the manual and ensure that you
are familiar with the location and function of all the Engine Power Management (EPM) 3--10
features of your tractor.
Engine Speed Management (ESM) 3--11
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate Headland Turn Sequence (HTS) 3--13
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is Fast Steer 3--24
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of Rear Power Take--Off 3--26
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer.
Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift 3--40
PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS Electronic Draft Control 3--57
Your tractor is equipped with a sophisticated Load Sensing Remote Control Valves 3--69
electronic network system which utilises various
memory facilities to programme and control many of Electronic Remote Control Valves 3--75
the tractor functions. The operating memory Continuous Oil Supply for Remote Services 3--90
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made
while operating the tractor and these are transferred Three-point Hitch 3--93
to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
Quick Hitch 3--99
If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data Linkage Stabilisers 3--101
is being transferred between the operating and main
memories, some of the data may be lost or Drawbars and Towing Attachments 3--106
corrupted.
Trailer Braking Systems 3--119
If changes have been made to any memory settings Front Wheel Track Adjustment 3--126
while operating the tractor, pause for five seconds
between key--off and key--on to allow sufficient time Rear Wheel Track Adjustment 3--134
for data to transfer between the operating memory
and the main memory. Once transferred, the new Ballasting and Tyres 3--144
settings will remain unchanged until they are
re--programmed.
3--1

SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
Before operating your tractor in the field it is Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are
important you read the following information. thoroughly familiar with the location and operation of
the controls.
RUNNING--IN PROCEDURE
Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance
IMPORTANT: Your new tractor will provide long and operations in accordance with Section 4.
dependable service if given proper care during the 50
hour running--in period and if serviced at the After completing the daily maintenance operations,
recommended intervals. perform a walk around visual inspection of the
tractor. Pay particular attention to the following
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high items:
a gear under heavy load may cause excessive
engine overloading. Overloading occurs when the • Poly ’V’ belt for cracks or damage
engine will not respond to a throttle increase.
• Engine and exhaust areas for accumulation of
Do not operate without a load on the engine. This can debris
be as harmful to the engine as overloading. Vary the
type of operation undertaken so that the engine is
subjected to heavy as well as light loads during the • Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
running--in period.
• Tyres for damage
Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads
and avoid continuous operation at constant engine • Hardware for looseness
speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with
a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You • Driveline and hydraulic pump/filter areas for
will save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting leaks or debris accumulation
the correct gear ratio for each particular operation.
Check the instruments and warning lights frequently Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.
and keep the radiator and various oil reservoirs filled
to the recommended levels. PRESSURE WASHING THE TRACTOR
Your tractor is fitted with a number of Electronic

Control Units (ECU’s) that are linked to various
sensors throughout the vehicle. These units
electronically control many tractor functions
including engine, transmission, P.T.O. and hydraulic
systems.
It is very important therefore, when cleaning the

tractor body or chassis with a high pressure water jet,
that care should be taken not to aim the jet directly
at any electrical component, wiring harness or
connector.
3--2

TOWING THE TRACTOR CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A

TRANSPORTER
IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a
short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow Transport the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed
on roadways or as a method of transport. trailer or truck. Securely chain the tractor to the
transporter.
IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to tow the tractor, all
transmission controls must be moved to the IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel
neutral position before stopping the engine drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle
otherwise damage to transmission components may or other components that could be damaged by
occur during towing. If creeper gears (reduction gear contacting the chain or by heavy loading.
set) are fitted, then the selector control must be in the
off position. Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie
down point.
Use a strong chain when towing the tractor. Tow the IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the
tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear tow wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage the
hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor from the bearings. Turbocharger turbine freewheeling
front using the tow pin in the front weights or front (turning without engine running) must be avoided
support. Have an operator steer and brake the since lubrication will not be provided to the
tractor. turbocharger bearings.
To avoid damaging the transmission or other TILTING HIGH VISIBILITY ROOF PANEL
components that turn but are not lubricated during
towing, observe the following: Where road speeds in excess of 50 Km/h (31 MPH)
are likely to occur when transporting the tractor, it is
• Only tow a short distance advisable to secure the high visibility roof panel with
ties to prevent it from opening.
• Keep speed below 5 MPH (8 K/mh)
• If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication

and power steering.
IMPORTANT: The brakes on your tractor are

hydraulically power assisted. With the engine off, the
brakes will still function but with a higher pedal effort.
CAUTION
Do not tow the tractor faster than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
The steering is much slower and steering wheel
effort is much greater without the engine running.
1
WARNING Secure both handles to the sun--visor support using
Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the a flexible strap such as a cable tie (1) as shown in the
cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with illustration above. Do not use wire or metal straps as
sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using these may damage the paintwork.
a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side
facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down instead
of flying up.
NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the engine

is not running, regardless of the position of the 4WD
activation switch.
3--3

BOOSTING THE TRACTOR BATTERY
Your tractor is equipped with remote jump terminals

installed on the right-hand side of the engine.
WARNING
Always sit in the driver’s seat to operate the starter
motor. If the key-start switch is by-passed and the
tractor has been left in gear, sudden and unexpected
movement of the tractor or a tractor runaway may
result which could cause serious injury. Wear eye
protection when starting the tractor with jump leads
or when charging the battery.
If it is necessary to use jump leads (booster cables)

to start the tractor, use only heavy duty leads.
Proceed as follows:
The positive terminal (1), mounts on the starter

solenoid, and is encased in an insulated housing. 1
The negative terminal (2) attaches to the upper

mounting bolt of the starter.
Connect one end of red jump lead, to the positive,

(+), remote jump terminal (1), and the other end to 2
50032874
the positive (+), terminal of the auxiliary battery.
2
Connect one end of black jump lead, to the negative,
(--), remote jump terminal (2), and the other end to
negative, (--), terminal of auxiliary battery. Follow the
starting procedure as described later in this Section.
When the engine starts allow it to run at idle speed,

turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the
connecting procedure. This will help protect the
alternator from possible damage due to extreme load
changes.
3--4

Turn off all electrical equipment and run the tractor

engine until the battery is fully charged.
IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to

start the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump
leads is correct -- positive to positive, negative to
negative, otherwise the alternator may be damaged.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the tractor batteries
are discharged. Excessive amperage (above 1600
cca) may damage the starting motor. In the event of
the batteries being severely discharged, such that
terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require
a special charging procedure. See your authorised
dealer.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting the engine, always carry out the

following procedure:
• Sit in the driver’s seat.
• Ensure the parking brake is firmly applied.
• Ensure the shuttle lever is in neutral.

• Ensure that the P.T.O. knob is in the ‘off’ position.
• Place the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position.
• Move the hydraulic lift control lever fully forward.
WARNING
Check the area beneath the equipment to ensure
that no injury or damage will be caused when
equipment is lowered.
• Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the

turbo-charger makes it essential that adequate
lubrication is assured when the engine is started.
Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for
approximately one minute before driving the tractor.
3--5

GRID HEATER COLD START AID

(where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor may be equipped with an electronic cold
weather starting aid. Do not use ether with the cold
start aid installed. It will explode in the intake
manifold. If any difficulty is experienced when trying
to start your tractor in cold temperatures, consult
your authorised dealer.
The grid heater, which is effective in ambient

temperatures down to --18° C (0° F), consists of a
heating element installed in the intake manifold.
Operation of the grid heater is automatic when the
the engine coolant temperature falls to --3° C (26.6°
F) or below.
A warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate
to confirm operation.
If temperatures below --18° C (0° F) are

encountered, a block coolant heater is available as
an accessory. The block coolant heater is effective
in ambient temperatures down to --29° C (--20° F)
when used in conjunction with the grid heater. 3
Key Start Switch
A five-position key-start switch is installed. The

key-start switch positions are as follows:
Position 1 Not used

Position 2 Off
Position 3 Accessories on
Position 4 Warning lights, instruments and
Grid Heater on
Position 5 Grid heater on, Starter motor
engaged
IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start 4

the engine. Use an auxiliary battery and jump leads.
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in the
neutral (N) position.
3--6

Starting in cold weather (with a cold engine)
• Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch clockwise to position (4). An
indicator light (1) Figure 6, on the instrument
panel will illuminate for 10 to 15 seconds to show
the grid heater has been activated.
• When the light extinguishes, turn the key fully

clockwise to position (5). Crank the engine until
it starts but do not operate the starting motor for
more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: If cranking is not carried out within 30 5

seconds of the light extinguishing, turn the key--start
to the ’off’ position, pause and re--start the sequence.
• If the engine fails to start, repeat the foregoing

procedure. If the engine still fails to start, allow
the battery to recover for 4 -- 5 minutes then
repeat the procedure.
• When the engine starts, return the throttle to the

idle position and check that all warning lights
extinguish and gauge readings are normal.
6
Starting in warm weather or when the engine is
hot
• Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch fully clockwise to position (5)
Figure 5, to operate the starting motor. Crank the
engine until it starts but do not operate the
starting motor for more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: Once the starter motor has been operated,

it is necessary to return the key-start switch back to
the ‘off’ position before the starting motor can be
re-activated.
• Return the throttle to the idle position and check

that all warning lights extinguish and gauge
readings are normal.
3--7

STOPPING THE ENGINE
IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at

1000 rev/min for approximately one minute. This will
allow the turbo--charger and manifold to cool and
prevent possible distortion of components.
To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:
• Sit in the driver’s seat.

• Close the throttle.
• Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.
• Ensure the P.T.O. is disengaged.

• Place the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position.
• Lower 3 point hitch mounted equipment to the
ground.
• Turn the key--start switch off -- position (2).
AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an engine

that has automatically shutdown, trace and rectify
the fault that caused the engine to be stopped.
Automatic engine shutdown is operated through the

electronic engine controller (ECU). In the unlikely
event that one or more of the following conditions
occurs then the engine will be shut down after 30
seconds.
• A critical error is detected within the engine
electronic control system.
• The generated engine horsepower attempts to
exceed the specified design limit.
Should either of the above occur and the engine

shuts down, consult your authorised dealer before
attempting further operations with the tractor.
NOTE: Automatic engine shutdown function is

permanantly activated and cannot be switched off.
3--8

Automatic Engine Shutdown with Enhanced

Keypad (where fitted)
The automatic engine shutdown system on tractors

equipped with the optional Enhanced Keypad
provides a further level of protection. The system
monitors four key areas that are critical to the safe
operation of engine and driveline and, in the unlikely
event that one or more of these reaches a critical
condition, the engine will be shut down.
• Engine oil pressure falls below safe limits.

• Engine coolant temperature exceeds safe limits.
• Driveline oil pressure falls below safe limits.

• Driveline oil temperature rises above safe limits.
Prior to engine shutdown the red Stop light will start

to flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition,
the engine fault warning and malfunction symbols
will flash alternately in the Dot Matrix Display. If, after
30 seconds, the operator has not stopped the
engine, the automatic shutdown feature will be
activated and the engine will be shut down.
7
After the engine has shut down, the red Stop light will
remain on but the alarm will cease to sound. Both
engine and malfunction symbols will continue to flash
alternately.
The automatic engine shutdown function may be

programmed by your authorised dealer to operate in
one of three modes:
1. No engine shutdown. In this mode the engine is

not capable of automatic shutdown.
2. Always engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown at any time if one or more of the
monitored conditions reaches a critical level.
3. Stationary engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown only during stationary operations if
one or more of the monitored conditions reaches
a critical level.
Although the Automatic Engine Shudown linked to

the Keypad can be disabled, the ECU controlled
system will continue to function in the normal way.
3--9

ENGINE POWER MANAGEMENT
Engine Power Management is an automatic system

designed to boost engine power levels where tractor
performance may be compromised due to increased
loads.
Once activated, EPM will monitor and respond to

increased power demands by gradually raising the
level of horsepower available.
IMPORTANT: Engine Power Management will be

disabled if the engine coolant temperature exceeds
105°C (221°F). In this situation either increase the
engine speed or reduce the load on the engine until
the coolant temperature is reduced.
P.T.O. Operations
Before EPM will operate the following must apply:

Engine sped above 1300 e.r.p.m.
Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH).
PTO power output is above 27 kW (36.2 hp.).
PTO driveline torque is above 250 Nm.
NOTE: Engine Power Management will operate at all

P.T.O. speeds, i.e. 540, 540E and 1000 r.p.m.
With the tractor moving and the engine speed above

1300 r.p.m. engaging the rear P.T.O. will put EPM
into standby mode. As the torque and load on the 8
PTO reaches or exceeds the above levels, the
warning light (1) will illuminate and Engine Power
Management will be activated.
When the power requirement is reduced, the amount

of boost is also reduced until the system reverts to
standby.
Road Transport Applications
Before EPM will operate the following must apply:

16th gear or above must be selected.
Auto Transport mode selected.
Engine speed between 1800 and 2200 e.r.p.m.
Engine Power Management will only function when

Auto Shift is selected and the tractor is operating in
16th gear or above. EPM will be de--activated if one
or more of the following occurs:
Downshifting below 16th gear.
Engine speed falls below 1800 e.r.p.m.
Auto Shift is disengaged.
3--10

ENGINE SPEED MANAGEMENT
With Engine Speed Management, the operator may

pre--set one or two fixed engine speeds appropriate
to the work in hand.
With ESM engaged the indicator light on the

instrument panel (1), will illuminate to confirm
operation.
When in operation ESM constantly monitors engine

load and speed for any change. If engine load
increases and the r.p.m. drops, ESM will adjust the
engine speed control unit to compensate, thereby 9
maintaining a constant engine r.p.m.
Setting Engine Speed Management
With the engine running, set the hand throttle to 1000

r.p.m. To activate Speed Management, momentarily
depress the top of the switch (2) on the right--hand
console. To deactivate, depress the top of the switch
again.
Select programme 1 by momentarily depressing the

bottom of switch (2) and then, using the speed
control switch (1), increase the engine speed to the
desired level. When the speed for programme 1 has
been entered, programme 2 can then be selected (if
required) by momentarily depressing the bottom of 10
switch (2) again. Repeat the above procedure to set
the second speed.
NOTE: Momentarily depressing the speed

adjustment switch will increase or decrease the
speed in 10 rpm increments. Maintaining pressure
on the switch will permit the speed to ramp up or
down at 100 rpm/second, providing there is no load
on the engine.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), programme

settings made during tractor operation are
transferred from the operating memory to the main
memory. To provide sufficient time for the data to
transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.
3--11

Operating with Engine Speed Management
The Engine Speed Management function can be

engaged at any time providing the engine is running
above 1000 r.p.m. Momentarily depress the Speed
Control switch (2) to activate ESM. The system will
automatically default to programme 1, depress the
bottom of the control switch to select programme 2.
When operating in the field, shuttling between

programmes 1 and 2 may be achieved by repeatedly
depressing the bottom of the control switch or, if
more convenient, the Headland Turn Sequence step
switch (3) Figure 12. 11
NOTE: If the HTS step switch is used to shuttle

between ESM speeds, the control switch (2),will be
disabled. To re--enable switch operation, exit and
re--enter the ESM function.
NOTE: Moving the hand throttle in ESM mode will

disable the speed settings and return engine speed
control to the hand or foot throttle.
Accessing a Previously Stored Setting
To access a previously stored speed setting, depress

and hold the top of the ESM switch (2), Figure 11.
The indicator light will start to flash in the instrument
panel.
NOTE: The hand throttle must be set to 1000 e.r.p.m.

before depressing the switch.
Continue to hold the switch until the light stops

flashing and goes out, the engine speed will increase
or decrease to the previously stored setting. Depress
the bottom of the control switch (2) or the HTS switch 12
(1) to select the required ESM programme.
NOTE: If the ESM switch (2) is released whilst the

light is flashing, Engine Speed Management will
reset to the default setting, depress and hold the
ESM switch again to re--start the procedure.
To exit Engine Speed Management:
Depress the ESM control switch.

Move the hand throttle to idle.
Turn the key--start to the off position.
3--12

HEADLAND TURN SEQUENCE
Quick Guide to Headland Turn Sequence (HTS)
Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of

actions, such as those made during a headland turn,
HTS can be used to create, store and play--back a
programme of these actions.
The following text is provided as a quick guide to the

operation of Headland Turn Sequence. A more
comprehensive guide to the operation of HTS can be
found beginning on page 3--15.
NOTE: For HTS to function, the hand throttle must

be set above 900 e.r.p.m. and the tractor travelling
at a speed above 0.5 K/mh (0.3 MPH).
ACTION -- RECORDING CONTROL VISUAL

1. Depress and hold the top of the record switch for three
seconds. The recording symbol will flash in the Display of
Gears.
2. To start recording a sequence, momentarily depress the step

switch. The recording symbol will cease to flash and will
remain displayed.
3. Carry out the headland turn sequence in the normal way. As

each step in the sequence is recorded, the relevant symbol
will appear in the Display of Gears.
Gears When a step is completed
and a new one started, the symbol for the completed step will
scroll downwards to be replaced by the new one.
To record a second HTS sequence go to paragraph 4. To end

the current recording go to paragraph 6.
4. To record a second sequence after the first one is completed,

depress and hold the step switch for three seconds, the
recording symbol will start to flash.
5. To start recording, depress the step switch again. The

recording symbol will cease to flash and will remain on, the
sequence can now be started.
6. When the HTS recordings are completed, momentarily

depress the top of the record switch to save the recorded
sequences and exit HTS.
3--13

ACTION -- PLAYBACK CONTROL VISUAL
1
1. To enter play--back mode, depress and hold the top or
bottom of the play--back switch. The programme number will
appear below the playback icon.
Release the switch and the programme symbols will start to
flash indicating HTS is in standby mode.
NOTE: Depress the top of the switch to provide AUTOMATIC

re--play of all programme steps, depress the bottom of the
switch to select MANUAL re--play of each individual step.
2. If a second sequence was recorded, continue to depress the

top or bottom of the play--back switch until the required
programme number, 1 or 2 is displayed, then release the
switch.
2
The programme number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol.
3. To begin play--back, depress and hold the step switch until a

’beep’ is heard. The play--back symbol will stop flashing and
will remain on.
NOTE: In MANUAL re--play the programme will pause after
each step is completed, momentarily depress the step switch
to re--play the next step.
3. During play--back, the function symbols will scroll upwards

towards the top of the HTS display.
4. After the current sequence has been re--played, the next

sequence will be held in standby mode (play--back symbol
flashing). Depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is
heard, release the switch to begin play--back of the next
sequence.
5. To skip a play--back sequence it will be necessary to exit HTS

by depressing the record switch. To re--enter HTS, start at
paragraph 1 above.
See page 3--17 for an explanation of HTS symbols.
3--14

Headland Turn Sequence Operation (HTS)
In the recording mode a sequence of actions or

’steps’ are recorded to create a programme. In
play--back mode, HTS will re--play the sequence
exactly as recorded.
Programmes may be re--played as a continuous

operation (AUTOMATIC) or as a series of individual
steps (MANUAL) each one initiated by depressing
the step switch.
HTS permits up to 28 individual steps to be recorded

as one or two separate programmes.
Three switches control the operation of HTS:

1. Play--back switch. To re--play a programme
momentarily depress the top of this switch (A) for
AUTO re--play, depress the bottom of the switch
for MANUAL re--play.
2. Record switch. This switch is used to activate or
de--activate the system and to select the record
mode.
3. Step switch. The step switch is used to start,
pause or stop a programme. The step switch can 13
also be used to insert pauses during a recording
or to pause a programme during play--back.
NOTE: Each pause inserted during a recording will

be recognised as a programme step by HTS.
Where HTS is used to create a recording, the

following actions or functions may be included in the
programme.
• Regulate engine speed.

• Shift transmission gears up, and/or down.
• Raise and lower the rear three point hitch.*
• Raise and lower the front three point hitch.*
• Operate rear electronic remote valves.
14
3--15

IMPORTANT: When operating In Field Auto Mode,

activating HTS will suspend the Auto Mode function.
After completing a headland manoeuvre
programme, HTS will be suspended and the Field
Auto Mode programme will be resumed.
In a similar way, ESM will also be disabled when HTS
is active and will be re--enabled when HTS is
suspended. However, the ESM light will still remain
illuminated while the programme is disabled.
When activated, the HTS symbol will appear in the

Display of Gears.
The symbol at (2), Figure 15, will show whether HTS

is in record or play--back mode.
When recording or re--playing a programme, each

action or step will be represented by the appropriate
symbol, i.e. a gear change or series of gear changes
will be accompanied by a transmission symbol.
See page 3--17 for an explanation of HTS symbols.
As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol 15

will move down the display as the next step begins.
The symbol for the new step will appear immediately
below the record symbol.
During play--back, symbols will scroll upwards from

the bottom of the display. When a symbol reaches
the top of the display (below the play--back symbol)
the corresponding function will begin to operate.
A maximum of seven symbols may be displayed at

one time.
IMPORTANT: If a programme fault occurs and the

error symbol is displayed, exit and re--enter HTS to
clear the fault.
3--16

Explanation of HTS Symbols

The symbols shown below are examples of those which may, depending on programme content, appear in the
transmission gear display when HTS is active.
HTS Programme Engine Speed -- Decrease
2 Programme Number Transmission Upshift
Switch Symbol -- Record Mode Transmission Downshift
Record Mode Remote Cylinder -- Retract
Switch Symbol Remote Cylinder -- Extend

Manual Playback Mode
Switch Symbol Remote Cylinder -- Float

Automatic Playback Mode
Playback Mode Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Raise
Pause Programme Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Lower
Error Front 3--Point Hitch -- Raise
Engine Speed -- Increase Front 3--Point Hitch -- Lower
3--17

Recording a Programme
NOTE: For HTS to function, the hand throttle must

be set to provide an engine speed above 900 e.r.p.m.
IMPORTANT: If the tractor is stopped or no controls

used for approximately 13 minutes when recording
a sequence, the system will automatically revert to
standby and any steps recorded will be lost.
To record a Headland Turn Sequence, depress and

hold the top of the record switch (2), for three
seconds. This will activate HTS but the system will
remain in standby mode. 16
The HTS symbol will appear in the upper part of the

display accompanied by the recording symbol which
will start to flash.
To start recording, momentarily depress the step

switch (3). As each HTS linked control is operated,
a grey coloured symbol will appear in the display
immediately below the recording symbol.
As each symbol moves down the display to be

replaced by the next one, the colour will change from
grey to black.
NOTE: Symbols relating to the function in current 17

use, either in record or play--back mode, will always
appear inversed (grey symbol on black background).
After the first HTS sequence has been completed, a

second (opposite headland) sequence may be
recorded.
Depress and hold the step switch (3) for three

seconds to end the first recording and enter standby
mode. The recording symbol will start to flash.
To start recording a second sequence, momentarily

depress the step switch (3).
NOTE: Transmission shifts made whilst the tractor is

in reverse will not be recorded or played back by
HTS. A pause will be automatically entered in the
programme at this point.
3--18

During a recording, pauses may be inserted into the

programme by momentarily depressing the step
switch (3). HTS recording will pause at this point and
a pause symbol will be inserted in the sequence,
depress the step switch again to resume recording.
To store a recorded sequence, depress the the top

of the record switch (2) Figure 16. This will
de--activate the HTS function and no further
recording will occur.
NOTE: If, during a recording sequence, the engine

is stopped (key--off) then all steps recorded up to that
point will be saved. 18
NOTE: Shuttling actions are not recorded but a

pause is automatically inserted into the sequence
when the shuttle lever is operated.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), any

adjustments to electronically stored settings made
during tractor operation are transferred from the
operating memory to the main memory. To allow
sufficient time for the data to transfer, pause for a
minimum of five seconds before turning the key on
again.
IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote

valve operation in a HTS sequence, it is important to
allow sufficient time for the movement of the control
lever to be recorded as it passes through R, N, L and
F positions (or vice versa). Pausing the lever in each
position for approximately 1/2 second will provide
sufficient time for the step to be recorded accurately.
Moving the lever too quickly may confuse data
transfer causing the implement to respond
incorrectly on play--back.
NOTE: The maximum time permitted for a single

step in an EHR valve sequence is 25 seconds. After
this time another step will be created to continue the
19
operation and a new icon will appear in the display.
3--19

Playback a Programme
CAUTION
Before commencing work, it is recommended that
HTS programmes are given a ’dry run’ to ensure all
programme steps have been retained in the memory,
and any timed EHR sequences replay correctly.
To replay a recorded sequence, momentarily

depress the top of the play--back switch (1) for AUTO
re--play, depress the bottom of the switch for
MANUAL re--play. Play--back will be activated but will
remain in standby mode.
If the suspend/resume function (step switch) was

used to record a second programme, the operator
may now cycle between programmes 1 and 2 by
holding down the AUTO or MANUAL side of the
play--back switch.
When the correct number appears at the top of the

transmission display, release the switch. The 20
programme number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol.
When reaching the point at which the programme is

to start, depress and hold the step switch (3) until a
’beep’ is heard then release the switch. Play--back
will start as soon as the switch is released and the
first symbol in the sequence will appear below the
play--back symbol.
NOTE: To initiate playback, the engine speed must

be above 900 e.r.p.m. and the groundspeed must be
above 0.5 K/mh (0.31 MPH).
When play--back begins, the symbol will stop

flashing and will remain displayed.
21
As each function comes into play, the corresponding
symbol will appear immediately below the play--back
symbol. At this point it will change from black on grey
to grey on black (inversed).
3--20

Subsequent symbols in the programme sequence

will appear below the one currently in play. As each
step is completed, the corresponding symbol will
disappear from the display to be replaced by the next
one.
If play--back is activated in MANUAL mode,

depressing the step switch will only play the first step
in the sequence. When the first step is completed the
programme will pause until the step switch is
depressed again to start the next action in the
sequence.
In play--back, each step will be re--played exactly as

it was recorded.
NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be used to

increase engine speed during HTS play--back.
If pauses were inserted into the sequence during

recording, play--back will automatically stop at each
pause point. To resume the sequence, depress and
hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The next
step will start immediately the switch is released.
By delaying the point at where the step switch is used

to re--start a programme in AUTOMATIC mode,
adjustments can be made to the time span of a
sequence or to extend the delay between individual
steps. This only applies to pauses inserted at the
recording stage.
In play--back mode, the programme may be stopped

at any time by depressing the step switch (3). The 22
programme will pause and play--back symbol will
begin to flash.
3--21

IMPORTANT: If the step switch is used to suspend

a function in play, all current HTS actions, including
timed electronic remote valve sequences, will be
aborted and it may be necessary to manually
complete the paused step before re--starting HTS
play--back.
To resume programme play--back, depress and hold

the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, release the
switch.
IMPORTANT: During play--back, one or more of the

following actions will cause HTS to be stopped and
all automated functions, including timed EHR
sequences, to be terminated:
• Tractor speed drops below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH),

or is stationary for more than 10 seconds.
• The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds.
• Fender mounted 3--point hitch or P.T.O. controls
are operated.
• Hand throttle is set to idle.
• Operating one or more of the HTS linked tractor
controls to override the programme.
NOTE: A control is not regarded as overridden by

HTS until the sequence reaches the point at which
the automated operation of that control begins. At
this time, the sequence will be stopped.
On completion of a sequence, or if HTS is halted

during play--back, electronic remote valves will not
return to float even if the relevant lever is in the float
position unless:
• The lever was in the float position when the HTS
system was activated.
• The last HTS command step selected the valve
float function.
3--22

If an EHR function is in play and the step switch (3)

is used to cancel the action i.e. to stop a hydraulic
cylinder extending, then the cylinder will stop and
play--back will be suspended. The cancelled action
will be by--passed and the programme will move on
to the next step when play--back is re--started.
However, the cancelled action will remain in the

programme memory for subsequent re--plays.
To continue the programme, depress and hold the
step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, then release the
switch.
NOTE: When a HTS programme is suspended, the 23

symbols will flash in the display until the step switch
is depressed to re--start the programme.
IMPORTANT: If an HTS programme is halted by the

operator leaving the seat for more than 2 seconds,
the current engine speed will be maintained until the
operator returns to the seat, the throttle setting is
changed or the HTS sequence is cancelled.
Before leaving the seat, always deactivate HTS
and apply the tractor parking brake.
3--23

FAST STEER (where fitted)
The optional Fast Steer system is designed to

provide quick steering response when required i.e.
when operating with a front loader.
From the straight ahead position, Fast Steer will

provide full right or left hand steering lock with less
than a 10° movement of the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT: Before travelling on the public

highway Fast Steer must be de--activated and
normal steering re--instated. To check normal
steering operation, turn the wheel fully from lock to 24
lock before starting your journey.
NOTE: Fast Steer will not operate if the tractor speed

is above 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH).
To activate the Fast Steer function, depress the

isolator switch (1). A green warning light on the
instrument panel (3) will illuminate to confirm system
activation.
To operate Fast Steer, depress and hold the centre

ring (4) on the steering wheel, to disengage, release
the ring. With the centre ring depressed, a yellow
indicator light (2) will illuminate on the instrument
panel. It will extinguish when the centre ring is
released. 25
NOTE: If the isolator switch (1) is left in the ’ON’

position at engine key--off, then Fast Steer will be
de--activated at key--on. The isolator switch warning
light will not illuminate and the yellow indicator light
(2) will flash if the centre ring is depressed. To
re--activate Fast Steer turn the isolator switch ’OFF’
and then ’ON’.
Fast Steer can only be operated if the following three

conditions are met.
1. The isolator switch is in the ON position and the
green warning light is illuminated.
2. The speed of the tractor is below 10 K/mh
(6.2 MPH).
3. The transmission oil temperature is above 5° C.
NOTE: Attempting to use the Fast Steer function

without meeting all the above conditions, will cause
the yellow indicator light (2) to flash.
26
3--24

NOTE: If tractor speed exceeds 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH)

with Fast Steer in operation, it will be disengage and
the green indicator light (3) will flash.
NOTE: Where the transmission oil temperature is

low and Fast Steer is to be used, it is recommended
to turn the steering wheel twice, from full lock to full
lock, before operating with Fast Steer.
Fast Steer will be disabled if a fault occurs. Should

the system become disabled, an audible warning will
sound and an error code will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. If the fault is of a critical nature, the ’STOP’
warning lamp will also flash on the instrument panel, 27
consult your authorised dealer.
To re--activate Fast Steer, turn the isolator switch (1)

’OFF’, correct the fault, and then turn the isolator
switch ’ON’.
IMPORTANT: To promote safe operation of Fast

Steer, it is advised that the operator become familiar
with the system before operating in the field.
3--25

REAR POWER TAKE--OFF
Description
The P.T.O. is engaged and disengaged by means of

a knob (1) on the right-hand console. The adjacent
warning light (2) will illuminate when the P.T.O. is
engaged.
Three types of rear P.T.O. system are available,

dependent upon tractor model and country.
a) 540/1000 speeds with inter-changeable output

shafts.
b) 540/1000 shiftable with inter--changeable output

shafts and the option of fender--mounted
switches. 28
c) 540E/1000 shiftable with inter-changeable output

shafts and the option of fender-mounted
switches.
An automatic ‘soft start’ facility is provided to permit

easy start up of heavy, high inertia, P.T.O.--driven
equipment.
Soft start modulates P.T.O. clutch torque over the

first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower,
gradual take up of the drive.
NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of

1800 rev/min and below. Above this speed, normal
P.T.O. engagement will occur.
With shiftable P.T.O., a range lever is provided to

select 540 or 1000 P.T.O. speeds. The range lever
(1), is located at the rear of the right-hand console.
29
3--26

PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out
To engage the PTO, depress the knob (1) then lift the
collar (2) and knob together. This movement should
be decisive in its application as hesitant or incorrect
operation of the knob or collar may cause the PTO
system to Time--Out.
Do not:
• Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 10
seconds.
• Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the 30
PTO.
• Operate the fender mounted and internal PTO

controls simultaneously or within 2 seconds of
each other.
Any or all of the above actions will cause the PTO to

become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds.
Should this occur, the PTO Time--Out symbol will

appear in the Dot Matrix Display and the amber
warning light will flash for 10 seconds.
The non--critical alarm will sound for 4 seconds.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
3--27

ATTACHING P.T.O. DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Before attaching or detaching equipment or
changing the P.T.O. shaft:
• Firmly apply the parking brake.
• Ensure that all gearshift levers are in neutral.
• Disengage the P.T.O. (knob fully down) and wait
until the P.T.O. and equipment stops. Switch off
the engine before getting off the tractor.
With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is released

and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.
Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as

outlined in THREE--POINT HITCH on page 3--93.
A plastic P.T.O. cap (1) is supplied and should always

be installed over the shaft when the P.T.O. is not in
use. Store this cover in the tractor toolbox when
using the P.T.O..
A flip-up P.T.O. guard is fitted as standard. This also

serves as a support for drive-line shields used with 31
P.T.O.-driven equipment and provides for your
safety. Do not modify the guard.
Remove the ’R’ clip (1) from the locating pin and slide
the guard upwards to clear the pin. Rotate the guard
to gain access to the P.T.O. shaft. A second locating
pin allows the guard to be fixed at 45° if required.
To connect P.T.O.-driven equipment to the P.T.O.

shaft, tilt the guard up for access
NOTE: Tractors with slider type, vertically adjustable

drawbars have a flip--up P.T.O. guard plate fixed to
the slider frame. See ’Slider Frame Drawbars’ in
Section 7.
32
3--28

Attach the implement to the P.T.O. shaft, ensuring

that the implement driveshaft coupler lock pin (3) or
detent balls engage the groove in the P.T.O. shaft (2).
If the coupler does not have a locking arrangement,
pin the coupler to the shaft. Lower the flip-up guard
and replace the ’R’ clip.
IMPORTANT: After attaching mounted equipment,

carefully raise and lower using Position Control and
check clearances and P.T.O. shaft slide range and
articulation. When attaching trailed equipment,
ensure that the drawbar is correctly set.
33
P.T.O. Operating Precautions
WARNING
Whenever operating P.T.O. equipment, observe the
following precautions:
• Check that you are using the correct P.T.O.

speed for the implement. Follow the instructions
in the equipment operator’s manual.
• Ensure that the P.T.O. guard is installed when

using P.T.O. driven equipment.
• Do not wear loose clothing when operating

P.T.O. driven equipment.
• Firmly apply the parking brake, place all

gearshift levers in neutral and block all four
wheels before operating any stationary P.T.O.
equipment. 34
• Do not approach, clean or adjust P.T.O. driven

equipment while the tractor engine is still
running. Disengage the P.T.O. (knob fully down)
and wait until the P.T.O. and equipment stops.
Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.
• With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to
aid the installation or removal of the implement
P.T.O. shaft.
35
3--29

TWO--SPEED P.T.O. SYSTEMS
General Information Operating with Stationary P.T.O. Equipment
Generally speaking, P.T.O. driven equipment not Before operating static P.T.O. equipment, make sure
having a high power requirement is designed to run the tractor is safely positioned and the parking brake
at 540 P.T.O. rev/min and will have a 6--spline female is applied. Sitting in the seat, engage P.T.O. drive
coupling. A P.T.O. shaft speed of 540 rev/min is and, observing the instrument panel display, set the
obtained at an engine speed of 1950 rev/min. appropriate speed.
Equipment having a high power requirement is NOTE: On tractors fitted with Engine Speed
designed to operate at 1000 P.T.O. rev/min and will Management, it may be prudent to use the ESM
be provided with a 21--spline female coupling. With function to maintain a constant speed if the load on
the 21--spline shaft installed, run the engine at 2178 the P.T.O. is subject to variations.
rev/min to provide a P.T.O. speed of 1000 rev/min.
On leaving the tractor seat an intermittent alarm will
Tractors with 2--speed 540E/1000 P.T.O. have the sound for approximately 5 seconds and the amber
advantage of running low power 540 P.T.O. driven warning light will illuminate. If the alarm sound is a
equipment at a reduced engine speed by selecting constant tone, check to ensure the parking brake is
540E on the lever. See page 3--31 for P.T.O. and firmly applied.
engine speeds.
IMPORTANT: Implements with a high power

requirement should be operated with the 1000
rev/min. P.T.O. (21--spline shaft). If it is necessary to
use the 6--spline shaft (at 540 rev/min.) to operate
implements having a power requirement of more
than 75 horsepower, then it is strongly
recommended that the implement is fitted with a slip
clutch to avoid damage to the P.T.O. output shaft and
other tractor components.
NOTE: When required, change the P.T.O. shaft to

suit the operation and equipment in use, as
described under ‘Changing the P.T.O. Output Shaft’
on page 3--35 .
3--30

TWO--SPEED P.T.O. WITH INTER-

CHANGEABLE SHAFTS
A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
Dependent upon tractor specification, an alternative

21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,
designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., may also be
supplied with the tractor or is available from your
dealer.
An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm)

diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is
available from your dealer.
Operating
With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while
the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(2) will be illuminated.
NOTE: The light will be illuminated when the P.T.O.

is engaged. If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs
(P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the
1000 rev/min/shaft is in use, the light will also flash
(but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed passes 36
through the 630 rev/min range. The light will flash
again at 1100 P.T.O. rev/min to indicate that
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min
P.T.O. range.
Use the hand throttle to obtain the required

engine/P.T.O. speeds, the P.T.O. shaft speed can be
displayed at (1).
P.T.O. Speeds
540 @ 1950 e.r.p.m.
1000 @ 2178 e.r.p.m.
37
3--31

To disconnect P.T.O. drive, reduce engine speed and

press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the
Power Take Off.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure

any P.T.O. driven equipment is allowed to come to a
complete stop before leaving the seat.
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.
NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not 38

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob is reset. Return the selector knob manually to
the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.
IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed

to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be
equipped with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to
the brake when operating high inertia implements,
hold down the top of the switch (1), to disengage the
brake and allow the implement to come to rest
naturally.
39
3--32

TWO--SPEED, SHIFTABLE P.T.O.

(540/1000 or 540E/1000)
A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
Dependent upon tractor specification, an alternative

21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,
designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., may also be
supplied with the tractor or is available from your
dealer.
An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm)

diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is
available from your dealer.
Operating
Before engaging the P.T.O., select a P.T.O. ratio, as

follows:
With 6--spline shaft installed
• With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the
required speed by means of the range lever (1).
Lift the spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob
and move the lever to engage 540, 540E or 1000
P.T.O. speeds.
IMPORTANT: The P.T.O. range lever cannot be

moved until the spring-loaded collar beneath the
knob is lifted.
40
With 21--spline shaft installed
• With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, lift the
spring-loaded collar (2), beneath the knob, and
move the lever (1) fully to the right. This will
provide a P.T.O. speed of 1000 rev/min at 2178
engine rev/min.
NOTE: The P.T.O. range lever should always be in the

1000 rev/min position when the 21--spline shaft is
installed. If you only ever operate with a 21--spline
shaft, leave the range lever in this position.
41
3--33


(2) will be illuminated.
NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

knob is reset. Return the control knob manually to the
‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
42
With the P.T.O. engaged gradually increase engine

r.p.m. using the hand throttle until the appropriate
speed is displayed at (1).
Range Lever Engine Speed P.T.O. Speed

Position (rev/min) (rev/min)
Fully rearward
(540, 6--spline 1950 540
shaft)
Fully rearward
(540E, 6--spline 1526 540E
shaft)
Fully forward 43
1000, 21--spline 2178 1000
shaft
NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the
1000 rev/min shaft is in use, the light may also flash
(but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed passes
through the 630 rev/min range. The light will flash
again at 1100 P.T.O. rev/min to indicate that
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min
P.T.O. range.
To disconnect P.T.O. drive, reduce engine speed and

press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the
Power Take Off.
44
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure
any P.T.O. driven equipment is allowed to come to a
complete stop before leaving the seat.
3--34

IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed

to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be fitted
with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake
when operating high inertia implements, hold down
the top of the switch (1), to disengage the brake and
allow the implement to come to rest naturally.
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement, 45
CHANGING THE P.T.O. OUTPUT SHAFT
Using a suitable tool, compress and remove the

circlip (1) from the P.T.O. housing and carefully
withdraw the P.T.O. stub shaft.
With the shaft removed, check the ’O’ ring seal in the
P.T.O. housing for any damage. Replace ’O’ ring if
worn or damaged.
Thoroughly clean the replacement stub shaft before

inserting it into the housing. Replace the circlip
ensuring it engages fully with the groove in the P.T.O.
housing.
46
Protect the removed shaft by wrapping in a clean
cloth and place in the tool box.
3--35

Using the Auto P.T.O. Function (where fitted)
The Auto P.T.O. function provides automatic

engagement or disengagement of the rear P.T.O.
drive when using the EDC raise/lower switch (1).
Operating the switch to raise the implement will
automatically disengage P.T.O. drive. Lowering the
implement with the switch will re--engage P.T.O.
drive.
The height at which the P.T.O. is engaged or

disengaged can be set using the following method.
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the 47

P.T.O. switched off before attempting this procedure.
• With the engine running and the P.T.O. switched

off, operate the lift control to capture the hitch.
• Depress and hold the P.T.O. switch for 2

seconds. The central display will show ’u’
followed by two figures, for example, ’u38’. The
figure 38 representing the current height of the
hitch.
• Raise the hitch to point at which the P.T.O. is to

disengage. Depress the P.T.O. switch once, the
central display will show ’d xx’ (where ’xx’ is the
current height of the hitch).
• Lower the hitch to the point where the P.T.O. is

to re--engage and depress the P.T.O. switch
again. The central display will show ’End’ for two
seconds and then return to the option selected
prior to entering set--up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is

disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any
time. The new settings will remain in the memory until
re--programmed.
To activate the Auto function, engage the P.T.O. as

previously described and then depress and hold the
switch (1), for more than one second. The Auto
P.T.O. lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate to
confirm activation.
48
3--36

With the 3 point hitch in the lowered position and the

P.T.O. engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect P.T.O. drive
and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the
implement will re--engage P.T.O. drive, the Auto lamp
will cease to flash and will remain on.
Depressing the Auto P.T.O. switch again will

de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will
extinguish.
NOTE: The Auto P.T.O. function will be de--activated

every time the key start is switched off.
Auto P.T.O. will be de--activated should one or more

of the following occur:
• The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH)

with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
• With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed

falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds with the
3--point hitch in the raised position.
• If one of the external switches for P.T.O. or 3 point

hitch are operated.
• The P.T.O. is switched off using the internal or
external switches.
• Operating both internal and external P.T.O.
switches simultaneously.
• Ground drive P.T.O. is selected.
minutes with Auto P.T.O. activated and the 3
point hitch in the raised position.
To re--activate Auto P.T.O., clear the error and

re--engage the function as previously described.

every time the key start as switched off.
3--37

EXTERNAL P.T.O. CONTROLS

(where fitted)
An optional, fender-mounted P.T.O. switch (1), may

be installed on both rear fenders to aid alignment of
the P.T.O. shaft splines with equipment and facilitate
stationary P.T.O. operations.
With the engine running, touch the switch

momentarily to cause the P.T.O. shaft to index round
to align the shaft splines. If the switch is pressed for
less than 5 seconds, the shaft will stop turning when
the switch is released.
49
Press and hold in the switch for more than 5 seconds
and the P.T.O. will operate continuously. Press the
switch again to stop the P.T.O. Alternatively, the
P.T.O. may be stopped by means of the in-cab
controls, as previously described.
NOTE: The warning light, on the P.T.O. control

panel, will illuminate when the P.T.O. is engaged,
momentarily or permanently.
NOTE: The P.T.O. may be engaged or disengaged

from the fender switch, whether the in-cab control is
in the on or off position.
NOTE: Simultaneous operation, within two seconds,

of in cab and external P.T.O. controls will result in the
PTO delay symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix
Display. A 10 second delay will occur before P.T.O.
control operation will recommence.
NOTE: The soft start function will operate

irrespective of whether the P.T.O. is engaged from
inside the cab or from a fender switch.
3--38

CAUTION
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
Power Take Off switches:
• Move all transmission controls to neutral.
• Disengage the P.T.O.
• Apply the parking brake.
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever
to the low idle position (fully rearwards).
The operator must only activate the external Power

Take Off switches (1) while standing to the side of the
tractor (outboard of the rear tyres). To avoid damage
to implement or tractor, operation of the in cab and
external P.T.O. switches should not be carried out
simultaneously.
WARNING
Before using the external Power Take Off switches,
ensure that no person or object is in the area of the
implement, 3-point hitch or P.T.O. shaft.
Never operate the external switches while standing:
• Directly behind the tractor or tyres. 50
• Between the lower links.
• On or near the implement.
• Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or

any object into the area near the 3-point hitch,
P.T.O. shaft or implement while operating the
external switch.
• Never have an assistant working the opposite set

of controls.
• When moving to the opposite set of controls,

move around the tractor or implement.
• Do not cross between the implement and tractor.
3--39

FRONT P.T.O. AND 3--POINT HITCH

(where fitted)
Tractors with four wheel drive may be equipped with

an engine-driven P.T.O. and front 3--point hitch.
These features are available as a factory installed
option or dealer installed accessory.
FRONT P.T.O.
The front power take--off (P.T.O.) transfers engine

power directly to front-mounted equipment via a 6
spline shaft (1). The P.T.O. shaft rotates
anti-clockwise (as viewed from the front).
NOTE: A 21 spline shaft is available as a dealer

installed accessory.
A plastic cap is provided to protect the P.T.O. shaft

when not in use.
NOTE: With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment. 51
The front P.T.O. is electro--hydraulically operated

and is activated by a selector knob on the right-hand
console, similar to the rear P.T.O.
When fitted with the Auto P.T.O. feature, drive to the

implement can be programmed to disengage and
re--engage as the front hitch is raised and lowered.
An automatic ‘soft start’ facility is provided to permit

easy start up of heavy, high inertia, P.T.O.--driven
equipment.
Soft start modulates P.T.O. clutch torque over the

first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower,
gradual take up of the drive.
NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of

1800 rev/min and below. Above this speed, normal
P.T.O. engagement will occur.
3--40


(2) will be illuminated. Open the throttle to increase
engine speed to 2100 rev/min and provide a P.T.O.
shaft speed of 1000 rev/min. To disengage the
P.T.O., press the P.T.O. selector knob (1), down.
NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 1100 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. Reduce
engine speed to 2100 rev/min.
52
NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not
knob is reset. Return the selector knob manually to
the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out
Engagement of the PTO control should be decisive

in its application as hesitant or incorrect operation of
the knob or collar may cause the PTO system to
Time--Out.
Do not:
• Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 10
seconds.
• Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the
PTO.
Either action above will cause the PTO to become
inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds.
3--41

Should this occur, the PTO Time--Out symbol will

appear in the Dot Matrix Display and the amber
warning light will flash for 10 seconds.
The non--critical alarm will sound for 4 seconds.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
53
Using the Auto P.T.O. Function (where fitted)
The Auto P.T.O. function will automatically

disengage and re--engage front P.T.O. drive when
raising and lowering the front hitch.
Auto P.T.O. can be used in conjunction with the front

hitch height limiter. Raising the hitch will cause P.T.O.
drive to be dis--engaged at a predetermined point
and the hitch to continue lifting until it reaches the
maximum height setting.
The height at which the P.T.O. is engaged or

disengaged can be set using the following method. 54
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the

P.T.O. switched off before attempting this procedure.
• Depress and hold the front Auto P.T.O. switch (1)

for 2 seconds. The central display will show ’Fu’
followed by two figures, for example, ’Fu38’. The
figure 38 representing the current height of the
hitch.
3--42

• Raise the hitch to point at which the P.T.O. is to

disengage. Depress the Auto P.T.O. switch once,
the central display will show ’Fd xx’ (where ’xx’
is the current height of the hitch).
• Lower the hitch to the point where the P.T.O. is

to re--engage and depress the Auto P.T.O. switch
again. The central display will show ’End’ for two
seconds and then return to the option selected
prior to entering set--up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is

disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any
time. The new settings will remain in the memory until
re--programmed.
To activate the front function, engage the P.T.O. as

previously described and then depress and hold the
Auto P.T.O. switch for more than one second. The
front Auto P.T.O. lamp (1) on the instrument panel will
illuminate to confirm activation.
With the front 3 point hitch in the lowered position and

the P.T.O. engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect P.T.O. drive
and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the
implement will re--engage P.T.O. drive, the Auto lamp
will cease to flash and will remain on.
Depressing the front Auto P.T.O. switch again will 55

de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will
extinguish.
3--43


every time the key start is switched off.
Auto P.T.O. will be de--activated should one or more

of the following occur:
• The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH)

with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
• With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed

falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds with the
front 3--point hitch in the raised position.
• The P.T.O. is switched off.

minutes with Auto P.T.O. activated and the 3
point hitch in the raised position.
To re--activate Auto P.T.O., clear the error and

re--engage the function as previously described.
3--44

FRONT 3--POINT HITCH (where fitted)
The optional front hitch, consists of an adjustable top

link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2). The top
link and the lower links have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements.
The claws are equipped with self-locking latches to
ensure positive retention of the 3--point hitch to the
implement.
56
The front hitch can be operated by a rear or

mid--mount remote valve (where fitted). The height
of the hitch (1) can be shown in the Central Display
as a percentage (%) ranging from 0 (fully lowered) to
100 (full raise).
57
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the

implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin. The two plain ball-bushings (3) with their
detachable guides (2) should be installed on the
implement lower hitch pins.
58
3--45

Operating the Front Hitch
The front hitch may be operated by mechanical rear

remote valves, electronic rear remote valves or,
where fitted, electronic mid-mount remote valves.
A height limit control permits the operator to set a

pre--determined limit on the maximum lift height of
the hitch .
Setting the Height of the Front Hitch
Height limit control is provided by a rotary knob (1) on

the right-hand console. Turn fully clockwise for
maximum height. Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the
height. The height setting will be shown in the Dot
Matrix Display as a percentage (%) between 0 (fully
lowered) and 100 (full raise).
Turn the control fully anti--clockwise to disable the

height limit function.
NOTE: The height limit setting may be affected by

the oil flow through the system. If the height limit is 59
initially set at a low engine/hydraulic pump speed, it
may change if the engine speed is increased to a
higher setting.
With Mechanical Rear Remote Valves:

With the front hitch connected to the appropriate
valve, pull the lever rearwards (R) to raise the front
hitch. Move the lever to (N) to halt hitch movement,
the hitch will maintain its height position. Select (L)
to lower the hitch. With the lever in the float position
(F), the hitch can move up and down (float) allowing
the implement to follow the ground contours.
The front hitch may be connected to any of the rear

remote valves.
Where an implement requires additional hydraulic

services, these may be connected to any unused 60
valve.
3--46

With Electronic Remote Valves:
Electronic rear remote valves may be used to

operate the front hitch using the control lever or the
joystick, (where fitted).
As a factory fitted option, the default valve to operate

the hitch will always be valve number one whether rear
mount or mid mount valves are used.
The valve is programmed to operate in conjunction

with the front hitch height limiter previously
described.
61
With Joystick and Electronic Rear or Mid Mount

Remote Valves:
The joystick can be used to control the front hitch

using the electronic rear remote valves or, where
fitted, the mid--mount remote valves.
Where a front hitch is supplied as a factory option,

electronic mid--mount remote valve number one will
be used to operate the hitch.
On tractors equipped with both mid and rear

mounted electronic valves, the joystick can be used
to control either valve pack. A selector switch on the
cab ’C’ pillar allows the operator to switch joystick
control between the rear (2) and mid--mount remote
valve pack (1). 62
NOTE: Switching the joystick from mid--mount to

rear valve operation will automatically suspend lever
operation of the rear remote valves.
IMPORTANT: Before switching joystick operation

between mid and rear valve packs or vice versa,
ensure both remote valve levers and joystick are in
the neutral position.
3--47

At key--on, the joystick indicator lamps will start to

flash but the joystick will remain disabled. To activate
the joystick the operator must be in the seat and the
tractor engine running for a minimum of five seconds.
Once activated, the mid--mount valve indicator lamp
(3) will stop flashing and remain illuminated.
NOTE: Operation of the joystick will be disabled if the

operator leaves the seat or the tractor engine is
stopped.
63
Where it is required to operate the front hitch using
the rear remote valves and joystick, depress the
bottom of the selector switch (2). The mid--mount
indicator lamp will go out and the rear remote valve
indicator lamp will start to flash.
After five seconds the rear indicator lamp will stop

flashing and will remain on, confirming joystick
control of the rear remote valves has been activated.
NOTE: The mid--mount indicator lamp will flash even

where mid--mount valves are not fitted.
Operation of the front hitch may now be controlled by 64

the joystick through the rear remote valves.
NOTE: When using the rear electronic remote valves

with joystick control, no timed operation or
programmed motor functions are available.
Both rear mounted and mid--mount electronic

remote valves offer the following functions when
operated by the joystick.
Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards or

backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and
Float.
Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to
operate Raise, Neutral and Lower.
65
3--48

Where valves 3 and 4 are fitted, the joystick functions

as follows. This applies to both rear mount or
mid--mount valves.
Remote valve 3: Depress and hold the button (1)

and move the joystick forwards or backwards to
operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float.
Remote Valve 4: Depress and hold the button (1)
and move the joystick left or right to operate Raise,
Neutral and Lower.
Move the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the

implement. When the front hitch reaches the position
set by the height limit control the hitch will stop. 66
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will cause the implement to lower to the ground at a
controlled rate of descent.
Further forward movement of the joystick will select

‘float’ (F) which will allow the implement to lower
under its own weight. Float can also used to let the
hitch lift cylinder extend or retract freely allowing front
mounted equipment to follow ground contours.
NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a

single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for
double--acting cylinders only.
IMPORTANT: Always use ‘lower’ and ’float’

positions to operate a hydraulic motor. To stop the
motor, move the lever from the ‘lower’ position to the
‘float’ position. The motor will then slow to a gradual
halt and not stop abruptly which may cause internal
damage to the motor.
NOTE: With the joystick operating the rear electronic

remote valves, the float position for valves 2 and 4
(lateral movement of the joystick) is not available.
3--49

The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L),

to provide oil flow for equipment connected to the
optional front couplers.
By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders may

be operated simultaneously.
67
To switch control of the rear valves back to the levers,

depress the top of the selector switch (1), to activate
the mid--mount valves, the rear indicator lamp will go
out and the mid--mount indicator lamp will start to
flash. After two seconds the mid--mount lamp will
stay on confirming joystick operation has been
switched back to the mid--mount valves (where
fitted).
Operation of the rear remote valves is now by lever.
68
Auxiliary Front Couplers (where fitted)
Two auxiliary couplers with 1/2 inch female couplings

may be fitted to the front of the hitch frame. These will
provide a double--acting hydraulic service for
equipment mounted on the front 3--point hitch.
When operated by the joystick, lateral movement of

the lever (left or right) will provide pressurised oil at
the couplings. See page 3--48 for details.
NOTE: When the front couplers are not in use always

re--insert the protective plug into the coupler to
prevent dust or debris from entering the hydraulic 69
system.
3--50

Setting the Hitch Operating Mode
Located on the front of the hitch assembly, the two

selector levers (1) permit the front hitch to be
operated in single--acting mode, double--acting
mode, or to be set at a fixed height.
70
Position P1:
Upper lever horizontal, lower lever vertical.
Front hitch operates in single--acting mode being

hydraulically raised but lowered using weight of
implement.
Position P2:
Both levers horizontal.
Hitch operates in double--acting mode being

hydraulically raised and lowered. Operating in this
mode will provide additional penetration for ground
engaging equipment in hard soil conditions or when 71
using a front mounted scraper blade.
Lock Position:
Both levers vertical.
With the levers in this position, both lift cylinders are

hydraulically ’locked’ preventing movement of the
lower link arms. It is recommended this mode should
be selected when transporting front mounted
equipment on the highway.
3--51

EXTERNAL FRONT 3--POINT HITCH

CONTROLS (where fitted)
External raise and lower buttons are provided on the

left--hand side of the front hitch assembly. Depress
and hold the appropriate button to raise or lower the
hitch, release the button to halt movement of the
hitch.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
controls for the external front 3--point hitch.
NOTE: The external front 3--point hitch controls are

disabled when the operator is in the seat. 72

controls:

WARNING
Before using the external front 3--point hitch controls,
implement or 3-point hitch.
Never operate the external controls while standing:
WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any
object into the area near the front 3-point hitch or
implement while operating the external controls.
3--52

Transport Locks
When travelling on the highway, both mid--mount and

rear electronic remote valves can be disabled to
prevent inadvertent lowering of the front hitch which
may cause damage to the tractor or road surface.
Electronic Remote Valves

To isolate rear or mid--mount remote valve operation,
depress the top of the switch on the cab ’C’ pillar. The
warning lamp on the remote valve lever console will
illuminate to confirm the valves are disabled.
To re--enable operation of the rear remote valves,

depress the bottom of the switch.
73
Joystick
The electronic joystick is provided with a mechanical

transport lock. To engage the lock, grip the joystick,
push down and rotate clockwise. This will lock the
joystick in the neutral position. Reverse the
procedure to unlock the joystick.
74
3--53

Hitch Settings and Adjustments
Transport Position
The top link and lower links should be placed in the

transport position when not in use. Raise the top link
(1) to the vertical position and secure by sliding the
adjuster handle extensions (2) into the slots in the
support (3).
75
Each lower link pivots about the pin (2). This pin
should not be removed unless it is required to
remove the lower links. To raise the lower link, extract
the pin (3) from the support assembly and raise the
link (1) to the vertical position, as shown. Re--insert
the pin through the support when the holes in the
lower link and support are correctly aligned. Before
operating the tractor ensure both pins are fully
secured using the lock pins.
76
To convert to the working position, remove the lock

pins, pull out the pin (5) and manually lower the lower
link down to the operating position, as shown.
Re--install the pin in one of the holes (4) or (6), as
required and secure.
When installed in the rear hole (5), the lower link will
be locked as a rigid unit. If the pin is installed in the
front hole (6), the lower link will be allowed to move
up and down freely (float) through a range of approx.
75 mm (3 in). Secure the pin using the lock pins.
Repeat on the other lower link, ensuring that both

lower links are set up the same, i.e., both are locked 77
as rigid units or both are allowed to float.
3--54

NOTE: With the lower links pinned in the float

position, the left and right-hand sides of the
implement can move up and down independently to
allow for operation on uneven surfaces. In addition,
the remote control valve float function will allow the
whole implement to move up or down as it passes
over uneven ground.
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Start the engine. Move the remote valve lever or

joystick (where fitted) from neutral (N) to lower (L)
until the link arms are just clear of the ground.
Position the tractor so that the open claw ends are
beneath the implement hitch pins.
78
Slowly move the remote valve lever or joystick

rearward to raise the lower links until the claw
couplers engage the ball-bushings. An audible click
will be heard as the self-locking latches engage the
ball-bushings on the implement. The lift control
should be returned to the neutral position before the
lower links start to lift the implement from the ground.
IMPORTANT: Before operating the tractor, ensure

the release latches (1), are fully retracted into the link
end.
79
Attach the top link to the implement, adjusting to the

correct length by rotating the threaded centre section
(1) using the handles (2) as leverage. To prevent the
centre section from rotating while in work, place the
locking latch (3) over one of the adjuster handles.
The top link has a similar claw end to the lower links.
Lower the top link claw onto the upper implement
ball-bush and press down until the latch is heard to
engage.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the front hitch.
80
3--55

Uncoupling Implement from Tractor
Using the remote lever or joystick, lower the

implement to the ground, ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the front hitch. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull back the lever on the top link to release the claw
from the implement upper hitch pin.
Pull the ring (1) on both lower links fully rearwards.

The lever will lock in position with the latch retracted,
as shown. This will allow the links to clear the
ball-bushings on the implement lower hitch pins 81
when the links are lowered fully.
Fully lower the lower links using the remote lever or

joystick and reverse the tractor clear of the
implement.
3--56

ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL
The system described here is known as Electronic

Draft Control. This electronically controlled hydraulic
system senses changes in the draft loading via
sensors in the lower link pins of the 3--point hitch and
changes in the position of the hitch via a sensor on
the cross shaft. The system functions in Position
Control or Draft Control.
Position Control provides accurate control of

implements, such as sprayers, rakes, graders, etc.,
that operate above the ground. Once implement
height has been set, the system will maintain the
selected position irrespective of any external forces
acting upon it.
Draft Control is designed for mounted or

semi-mounted implements operating in the ground.
Changes in soil resistance cause the draft loading on
the implement to increase or decrease.
Draft Control Operational Notes
Draft control sets the working depth in the soil by

maintaining a constant draft load. If the Position
Control lever (1), is set just below the normal Draft
Control working depth, it will prevent the implement
from ‘diving’ or working too deep if an area of soft or
light soil is encountered.
Position Control will override draft control when the

Position Control lever is moved above the working
depth set by the draft loading wheel (2). Therefore,
the Position Control lever can be used to lift the
implement out of the ground, from the normal Draft 82
Control working depth, without changing the Draft
Control setting.
This function can be useful when a gradual lift out is

required. The thumbwheel stop can be set so that the
Position Control lever can be returned quickly to a
lower limit position just below the normal Draft
Control working depth.
The raise/lower switch would normally be used to

raise or lower an implement during a work cycle.
3--57

Control Pod
The thumbwheel (5), when rotated, will move the

adjustable stop (1).
The position control lever (2), is used to set

implement height, when operating in Position
Control. Use it to set the maximum implement depth
when operating in Draft Control.
The draft loading wheel (3), determines the draft load

and therefore implement working depth by setting a
force on the draft sensitivity pins. Selecting position
10 will provide maximum load and therefore 83
maximum implement depth.
The raise/lower switch (4) Figure 83, is a three

position, spring centred switch that enables the
operator to rapidly raise the implement to the position
set by the height limit control and to lower the
implement back down to the working depth/height
set by the Position or Draft Controls, without
disturbing the settings. The switch also provides for
faster ground engagement, if required. For detailed
information, see text on page 3--64.
EDC Panel
The draft sensitivity control (1), is used to make the

system more sensitive or less sensitive to changes
in draft loading. Maximum sensitivity is obtained by
rotating the control fully clockwise.
The drop rate control (2), adjusts the speed at which

the three--point hitch drops during the lowering cycle.
Position 1 selects the slowest drop and is denoted by
the tortoise symbol, position 7 provides the fastest
rate of drop.
The height limit control knob (3), limits the height to 84

which the hitch may be raised. Adjust this knob to
avoid the possibility of a large implement damaging
the tractor when fully raised.
The slip limit control knob (4), available only with the
optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold, above which the
implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the set
level.
3--58

Indicator Lights
The malfunction warning light (4), serves two

purposes:
-- Flashing light means that there is a malfunction
in the system circuits. This will be accompanied by
the hitch error symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix
Display.
-- Steady light signifies ‘hitch disabled’. Again, the
‘hitch disabled’ warning is repeated in the Dot Matrix
Display with the hitch symbol.
The indicator lights (1) and (2), operate when the
position control lever is used to raise or lower the 85
implement or as lift and lower corrections occur
during normal tractor operation. The lower light (2)
will illuminate when the 3--point hitch lowers. The
upper light (1) will illuminate when the hitch raises.
A slip limit ‘on’ indicator (3), illuminates when the

wheel slip limit control is activated.
Hitch Position Display
The digital display in the instrument panel indicates

the position of the lower links over a scale of ‘0’ to
‘100’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are fully
lowered. ‘100’ indicates they are fully raised. Select
the display using the CAL/SEL switch or the
Enhanced keypad (where fitted).
86
Malfunction Warning Light
In the unlikely event that a fault occurs in the EDC,

the malfunction warning light (1) Figure 85, will start
to flash. The warning light will be accompanied by the
appearance of the hitch symbol (1), and error code
(2), in the Dot Matrix Display.
87
3--59

The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in

which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g. short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. In this event
your tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
A steady malfunction warning light signifies ‘hitch

disabled’ which is repeated in the Dot Matrix Display
by the appearance of the hitch symbol (1) and error
code ’1024’ (2).
The ‘hitch disabled’ warning light signifies that the

position control setting does not correspond to the
position of the lower links with the result that the
lower links cannot be raised or lowered using the
in-cab controls. The ‘hitch disabled’ warning will
display if:
• The Position Control lever has been moved with

the engine stopped. 88
• One of the external power lift switches has been

operated to raise or lower the three-point hitch.
See ‘External Hydraulic Power Lift Controls’ on
page 3--67.
To put the Position Control lever back into phase with

the lower links, place the raise/lower switch in the
central position and, with the engine running, move
the Position Control lever (1) slowly forward or
rearward, as required, until the position of the lever
matches the hitch height. The ‘hitch disabled’
warning light will go out and the hitch error symbol will
disappear from the Dot Matrix Display. The 3--point
hitch will now raise or lower normally.
89
3--60

PRE--OPERATION SETTINGS
Attach the implement to the 3--point hitch.
Turn the draft loading wheel (2) fully forward to

position 10 -- this is the Position Control setting.
Start the engine and, using the Position Control lever

(1), raise the implement in stages, ensuring that
there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the
implement and any part of the tractor. Note the digital
display reading on the instrument panel. If the
reading is less than ‘99’ it means that the implement
is not fully raised. 90
Adjust the height limit control knob (2) to prevent the

hitch being raised further and so avoid the possibility
of the implement damaging the tractor when fully
raised.
When the raise/lower switch or the Position Control

lever is used to raise the implement, it will only raise
to the height set by the height limit control, as
determined in the previous step.
Adjust the rate of drop, to suit the size and weight of

the attached implement, by rotating the drop rate
control knob (1). Turn the knob clockwise to speed up
the drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the drop 91
rate.
IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up

for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow
drop position (‘tortoise’ symbol).
When the raise/lower switch is used to lower the

implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as
determined in the previous step.
3--61

DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION
To operate in Draft Control adjustment of several

controls is necessary to suit the implement and field
conditions.
The draft loading wheel (2), determines implement

depth by setting a required force on the draft sensing
pins Set the wheel to the mid-position (position 5)
prior to commencing work.
92
The position of the draft sensitivity knob (1),

determines the sensitivity of the system. Set the
knob to the mid-position before entering the field.
93
Drive the tractor into the field and lower the

implement into work by moving the Position Control
lever (2), forward. Use the Position Control lever to
set the maximum depth and so prevent ‘diving’ when
areas of light soil are encountered. Set the required
implement working depth by rotating the draft loading
wheel (3).
Rotate the thumbwheel (4) to move the adjustable

stop (1) against the Position Control lever so that the
selected setting may be quickly found.
94
3--62

Observe the implement as it pulls through the soil

and adjust the draft sensitivity knob (1), until the
tendency to raise or lower, due to variations in soil
resistance, is satisfactory. Once set, the tractor
hydraulic system will automatically adjust implement
depth to maintain an even pull (draft load) on the
tractor.
The optimum setting will be achieved by observing

the movement indicator lights (2) and (3). The upper
light (2) will illuminate every time the system raises
the implement as normal draft corrections occur. The
lower light (3) will illuminate as the implement lowers.
95
Turn the draft sensitivity knob (1) slowly clockwise.

The system will respond with smaller, quicker
movements as will be seen by both the indicator
lights flickering. At this point, turn the knob slightly
anti-clockwise until either of the indicator lights
flashes once every 2 or 3 seconds or, as required, to
suit the soil conditions.
Once the required working conditions have been

established there is no need to move the position
control lever again until the work in hand is
completed.
96
Upon reaching the headland, momentarily depress

the top of the raise/lower switch (3) to quickly lift the
implement to the position set by the height limit
control knob. When re-entering the working area,
momentarily depress the lower part of the switch and
the implement will descend at the rate set by the drop
rate control knob and stop when it reaches the depth
set by the draft loading wheel (2).
During the raise cycle, momentarily depressing the

top of the raise/lower switch will pause implement lift.
Depress the top of the switch again to resume the
cycle.
97
Depressing the lower part of the switch during the
lowering cycle will also pause implement drop.
3--63

Faster implement penetration may be required, for

example, after turning at a narrow headland. Also,
some implements are reluctant to penetrate,
particularly if the ground is heavy. Press and hold the
bottom of the raise/lower switch (3) and the
implement will lower at the rate set by the drop rate
control knob, until it contacts the ground. The drop
rate and the Position Control settings will then be
overridden and the implement will quickly penetrate
the ground, rising to the preset working depth when
the switch is released.
Alternatively, the adjustable stop may be used to set

the implement depth. When the required implement
98
depth has been established, rotate the thumbwheel
(4). This will move the stop (1) so that it is against the
front edge of the position control lever (2). Whenever
the implement is raised, using the Position Control
lever, it will always return to the same working depth
when the lever is moved forward to contact the stop.
NOTE: If required, the Position Control may be

eased sideways (to the left), in order to bypass the
stop, to lower the implement further.
The slip limit control knob (1), available only with the
optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold, above which the
implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the
preset level. The system overrides the normal Draft
and Position Control sensing signals of the
hydraulics so care must be taken not to select too low
or too high a slip limit. Setting the slip limit to a very
low level, unobtainable in wet conditions, may have
a detrimental effect on the work rate/depth.
99
The slip limit ‘on’ indicator (2) will illuminate when slip
control is activated and the implement is raising to
restore the selected slip rate. The knob is detented
at the ‘off’ position (knob fully clockwise).
100
3--64

POSITION CONTROL OPERATION
To operate in Position Control, the draft loading

wheel (3) should, ideally, be rotated fully forward to
position 10.
Use the Position Control lever (2) to raise and lower

the 3--point hitch. The implement will raise and stop
at the height set by the height limit control knob.
NOTE: The rate of lift will be adjusted automatically.

If a large movement of the position control lever is
made then the lower links will respond by moving
rapidly. As the links approach the position set by the 101
Position Control lever, implement movement will be
slower.
When the implement is at the required working

height, use thumbwheel (5) to set the adjustable stop
(1) against the Position Control lever (2). Every time
the Position Control lever is moved, it may be quickly
returned to it’s original position, against the stop, to
maintain the required implement height.
If it is required to raise the implement at the headland,

momentarily depress the top of the raise/lower
switch (4) to lift the implement to the position set by
the height limit control knob. When re-entering the
work area, depress the lower part of the switch and
the implement will return to the height originally set
by the Position Control lever (2).
3--65

TRANSPORT LOCK
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch, turn

the drop rate control knob (2), fully anti-clockwise to the
transport lock position (padlock symbol). This will
prevent the implement from accidentally lowering and
damaging the road surface.
DYNAMIC RIDE CONTROL
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch,

implement bounce can lead to lack of steering control
at transport speeds. With Ride Control selected,
when the front wheels hit a bump, causing the front
of the tractor to rise, the hydraulic system will
immediately react to counter the movement and
minimise implement bounce to provide a smoother
ride.
To engage Ride Control, turn the draft sensitivity

knob (1), fully anti-clockwise. Using the raise/lower
switch (4) Figure 103, raise the implement to the 102
height set by the height limit control (3).
Turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully

anti-clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock
symbol).
Ride Control will only operate at speeds above 8 kph

(5 MPH). When tractor speed exceeds 8 K/mh (5
MPH), the implement will drop by 4 -- 5 points (as
displayed on the instrument panel) as the hydraulic
system makes corrections to counteract implement
bounce. When tractor speed falls below 8 K/mh (5
MPH) the implement will raise again to the height set
by the height limit control and Ride Control will become
inoperative.
103
3--66

EXTERNAL 3--POINT HITCH CONTROLS

(where fitted)
Two external switches (1) are provided on each rear

fender assembly. Depress the upper switch to raise
the 3--point hitch, depressing the lower switch will
cause the hitch to drop.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
external 3--point hitch controls.
104
controls:
• Move all transmission controls to neutral.

WARNING
Before using the external 3--point hitch controls,
implement or 3-point hitch.
Never operate the external controls while standing:
• Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any
object into the area near the 3-point hitch or
implement while operating the external controls.
105
3--67

Never have an assistant working the opposite set of

controls. When moving to the opposite set of
controls, move around the tractor or implement. Do
not cross between the implement and tractor.
The operator must only activate the external

switches while standing to the side of the tractor
(outboard of the rear tyres).
Pressing the upper switch (1) will cause the hitch to

raise slowly. Pressing the lower switch will cause the
hitch to lower. When the lower links align with the
implement, release the switch and attach the
implement to the 3-point hitch in the normal way.
To transfer control of the hydraulic power lift back to

the lift control lever, move the lift control lever fully
rearwards and push forward again, more slowly. The
‘hitch enabled’ symbol will display in the instrument
panel, indicating that the 3-point hitch is in phase with
the lift control lever (see page 3--60).
IMPORTANT: When control of the 3-point hitch is 106

transferred back to the lift control lever, an attached
implement may raise fully and damage the rear of the
cab. Operator’s should be aware of this and take
appropriate action to stop raising before full lift height
is reached. Adjust the height limit control knob as
described under Position Control Operation.
3--68

LOAD-SENSING REMOTE
CONTROL VALVES (where fitted)
Description
The remote control valves described here are of the

load-sensing type. By automatically sensing oil
demand from the implement, load sensing valves
continually adjust the oil flow from the tractor to suit
implement requirements. Connect to the lower port
for Raise (R) and the upper port for Lower (L).
The valves are used to operate external hydraulic

cylinders, motors etc. Up to four remote control 107
valves may be installed and are located at the rear
of the tractor. All remote valves incorporate an
automatic lock valve in the lower (raise) port to
prevent inadvertent leak down of the implement.
The valves are operated by levers which are located

in the console to the right of the operator’s seat. The
levers and their respective valves are colour coded
for identification, as follows:
Lever Colour Valve Position/No.
1. Control lever I Right--hand outer (Green)

2. Control lever II Right--hand inner (Blue)
3. Control lever III Left--hand inner (Brown)
4. Control lever IIII Left--hand outer (Black)
Each remote control valve lever has four operating
positions, as follows:
108
1. Raise (R) -- Pull a lever rearward to extend the
cylinder to which it is connected and raise the
implement.
2. Neutral (N) -- Push the lever forward from the
raise position to select neutral and de-activate
the connected cylinder.
3. Lower (L) -- Push the lever further forward, past
neutral, to retract the cylinder and lower the
implement.
4. Float (F) -- Push the lever fully forward, beyond
the ‘lower’ position, to select ‘float’. This will
permit the cylinder to extend or retract freely,
thereby allowing equipment such as scraper
blades to ‘float’ or follow the ground contour.
The extend, neutral, retract and float positions are
identified by symbols on a decal adjacent to the
control levers.
3--69

Configurable Detent Operation

(where fitted)
Your tractor may be fitted with load sensing remote

valves having configurable detents. The rotary
control (1), is used to select one of five detent
settings.
To select a setting, rotate the control until the number

(1), on the end cap, aligns with the mark (2), on the
valve body.
NOTE: If the number on the rotary control is not

aligned correcty with the reference mark on the valve 109
body, the performance of the valve may be affected.
Before turning the selector, ensure any residual

pressure in the hydraulic system is exhausted. To do
this, stop the tractor engine, cycle the remote valve
lever through all positions and then place the lever in
neutral.
Each position offers the follwing functions:
I. Raise (R), Neutral (N), Lower (L) and Float (F) *To select position 5, place the remote valve lever in
positions available. neutral, select position I or IV then move the lever to
Detent position in Float only. the Float position. With the lever in Float select
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out). position V.
II. Raise, Neutral and Lower positions only. To de--select position V, put the remote valve lever
No Float facility. into float, turn the selector control to position I or IV
No detent positions available. and then move the remote valve lever to neutral. It
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out). is now possible to select positions I, II, III and IV.
III. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions IMPORTANT: To prevent inadvertent movement of
available. attached equipment when starting the tractor engine,
Detents in Raise, Lower and Float. ensure the remote valve levers are in the correct
Lever auto return to neutral (kick out) in Raise position before operating the key--start switch:
and Lower positions.
With the selector in positions I to IV -- Neutral
With the selector in position V -- Float
IV. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions
available.
Detents in Raise, Lower and Float.
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
V. *Raise and Float positions available.

Detents in Raise and Float.
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
3--70

Connecting Remote Cylinders

Each remote control valve has a pair of 1/2 in.
quick-disconnect, female couplers (1) and (2). The
couplers are of a self--sealing/locking design but will
allow remote cylinder hoses to pull free if the
implement should become disconnected from the
tractor. The lower coupler (2) of each pair is for the
feed hose, the upper coupler (1) is for the return
hose. The couplers referred to in this picture are for
remote control valve No. I.
110
Hinged, spring-loaded dust caps are provided on

each coupler. To connect a remote cylinder, lift the
dust cap (1) and insert the feed and/or return hose
into the coupler, ensuring that it is correctly seated.
Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the hose(s) to
allow the tractor/implement to turn in either direction.
To disconnect, grip the hose a short distance from
the coupler, push the hose forward, into the coupler,
then quickly pull on the hose to ‘pop’ the coupler free.
Operating Notes
A detent will hold the lever in the selected extend or
retract position until the remote cylinder reaches the
end of the stroke when the control lever will
111
automatically return to neutral. Alternatively, the
lever may be returned to neutral manually. The lever
will not return automatically from the float position.
NOTE: Do not hold the lever in the extend or retract

position once the remote cylinder has reached the
end of the stroke as this will cause the system to
operate at maximum pressure. Over an extended
period, this could overheat the oil and may lead to
failure of hydraulic and driveline components.
WARNING
Operating loaders with detented valves may result in
uncontrolled movement, resulting in spillage of
material from the bucket or objects rolling down the
loader arms onto the operator. If required, your
authorised dealer can convert the control valve to
operate without the detent feature.
3--71

Each remote control valve has its own flow control

valve (1) which permits individual flow control when
operating two or more valves simultaneously.
Turn the flow control knob anti-clockwise to

increase the rate of oil flow.
Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the rate of flow.

For flow rates, see Section 8 -- Specifications.
112
Connecting and Operating Double-Acting

Cylinders
Connect the feed hose (1) from a double-acting

cylinder to the lower coupler (3) on the remote
control valve. Connect the return hose (2) to the
upper coupler (4) on the same valve.
113
To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever rearwards, to the ‘raise’ position.
To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control

lever forward, past neutral to the ‘lower’ position.
Further forward movement of the lever will select

‘float’ which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract
freely. This feature is of material assistance when
carrying out work with equipment such as scraper
blades and loaders.
114
3--72

Connecting and Operating Single-Acting

Cylinders
Connect the hose (1) from a single-acting cylinder to

the lower coupler (2) on the remote control valve, as
previously described.
115
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control

Manually return the lever to the neutral position to

stop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allow
the valve to return to the neutral automatically when
the cylinder reaches the end of it’s stroke.
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever

fully forward, to the ‘float’ position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the ‘float’ position to lower

a single-acting cylinder. The ‘lower’ position is for
double-acting cylinders only. 116
Connecting and Operating Continuous Flow

Hydraulic Equipment
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic

motors) should be connected to the remote control
valve coupler with the feed hose (1) connected to the
upper coupler (4) and the return hose (2) connected
to the lower coupler (3) of the same valve.
117
3--73

With the remote control valve lever fully forward, in

the ‘float’ position the motor will be stationary. The
hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is moved to
the ‘lower’ position.
IMPORTANT: To stop the motor, move the lever fully

forward to the ‘float’ position. The motor will then slow
to a halt and not stop abruptly causing internal line
pressures which, unless relieved by special valves,
could damage the motor seals.
Observe the following to further protect the tractor

and equipment:
118
• Do not open any by-pass valve in the equipment
or motor. Use the flow control valve to control the Operating Several Remote Valves
rate of flow or speed of the motor. Simultaneously or Remote Valves and 3--Point
Lift Simultaneously
• To assure optimum hydraulic oil cooling and
prevent overheating, operate continuous flow If operating two or more remote control valves
equipment at the highest flow setting (by use of simultaneously or remote valves and 3--point lift, all
the flow control valve) and lowest engine speed the flow control valves should be adjusted to provide
that will give the required machine performance a partial flow. If not so adjusted, all the available flow
and speed. may be directed to the full flow circuit when the
pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other
• It is recommended that a temperature gauge, circuits in use.
where available, is installed in the remote circuit
when using hydraulic motors for continuous Bleeding Remote Cylinders
operation. If over-heating occurs, stop the
hydraulic motor until the oil cools. Ensure the flow When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a
control setting is at maximum and the engine new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
speed at a minimum, appropriate to machine that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
performance. necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
If operating conditions are normal and high With the hoses connected to the remote control valve
temperatures persist, install an oil cooler in the couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
motor return circuit. The maximum cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
recommended operating temperature of the oil is and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the
110°C (230°F). remote control valve operating lever.
Your dealer can supply a suitable oil cooler and the Check the rear axle oil level before and after
necessary fittings or make the installation for you. operating a remote cylinder.
3--74

ELECTRONIC REMOTE VALVES

(where fitted)
NOTE: Electronic remote valves are only available

in conjunction with the Enhanced keypad.
The electronic remote valves (EHR) provide similar

functions to the mechanical valves previously
described. However, the electronic remote valves
have a number of additional automated features
which are supported by visual displays in the Dot
Matrix screen.
Transport Lock
The remote valves cannot be operated unless the
system is energised using the transport lock switch
(1). Depress the bottom of the switch to energise the
remote valve electrical circuit, depress the top of the
switch to disable the circuit.
When the transport lock is engaged (power off), the
amber warning light on the remote valve lever
console will illuminate and the valve(s) will be
disabled. To prevent inadvertent movement of the
implement when travelling between fields or on the
highway, it is recommended that EHR functions are
disabled. 119
IMPORTANT:The transport switch may also be used
to quickly stop operation of the rear remote valves.
Depress the top of the switch to isolate remote valve
operation, this has no effect on three--point hitch
operation.
Control Lever Operation
At key--on all remote valves, levers and the joystick

(where fitted) must be in the neutral position. Any
control not in neutral will cause the corresponding
valve to be disabled, manually shift the control to
neutral to reactivate the valve.
If, during operation, a remote valve becomes stuck

in one position then the entire system will be disabled
until the fault is rectified or the valve electronically
disconnected from the system. Consult your
authorised dealer.
Each remote valve lever has four positions, Raise,

Neutral, Lower and Float. In Raise and Lower
modes, the detented positions are used for timed
remote valve functions.
3--75

Pull the lever back from the neutral position, (N), to

the Raise position, (R). From neutral, push forward
to the (Lower) position, (L). Push the lever fully
forward to the Float position, (F). Float will permit a
hydraulic cylinder to extend or retract freely, allowing
equipment such as scraper blades to “float” or follow
the ground contour.
The “float” position is also used for retracting a

single-acting cylinder and is the OFF position for
operating hydraulic motors.
CAUTION
Electronic Remote Control Valves have detented 120
lever positions. It is not recommended this type of
control valve be used for front loader operation.
IMPORTANT: In the unlikely event that a remote

valve ceases to operate or respond correctly to lever
movements, the system will require the attention of
Each control lever is equipped with an adjustable

’gate’ which is used to select or lock--out individual
remote valve functions. Detents on the lever (1) will
lock the ’gate’ in one of five positions.
I *. Neutral and Raise locked out (Motor Mode):

Lower and Float functional. Move the lever into
float before selecting this position.
II. Raise detent locked out: Neutral, Lower and
Float functions operative.
III. All valve functions are operative.
IV. Float locked out: Raise, Neutral and Lower 121

functional.
V. Lever locked in neutral: No valve functions are
available.
* Integral to each lever is a switch that is activated

when the ’gate’ is set to Motor Mode (I). Should a
system error occur to disable the remote valve it will
always default to the Float position (motor stops).
3--76

Electronic Joystick Operation (where fitted)

NOTE: At key--off, the joystick function is
de--activated. To activate the joystick the operator
must be in the seat with the engine running for more
thanfive seconds.
The optional electronic joystick can be used to

control either mid--mount or rear mounted electronic
remote valves (EHR’s).
A selector switch on the cab ’C’ pillar allows joystick

control to be switched between mid--mount (1) and
rear mounted valves (2).
122
NOTE: When using the joystick to control the rear
electronic remote valves, timer mode and hydraulic
motor mode are not available.
NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat, joystick

operation will be de--activated. When the operator is
re--seated, joystick operation will be re--activated
after two seconds.
To transfer control of the rear remote valves from

lever to joystick, depress the bottom of the selector
switch on the cab ’C’ pillar. The mid--mount indicator
lamp (3) will go out and the rear valve indicator lamp
(2) will flash for five seconds. When the lamp stops
flashing and remains on, operation of the rear remote
valves can be controlled by the joystick.
NOTE: Operation of the rear electronic remote

valves will always default to lever control at key--off.
123
3--77

When the joystick has been activated, the switch (1)

is then used to select operation of remote valves 3
and 4 (where fitted).
When operated by the joystick each remote valve

offers the following features:
Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards or

backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and
Float.
Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to

operate Raise, Neutral and Lower.
124
Remote valve 3: Depress and hold the switch (1)
and move the joystick forwards or backwards to
operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float.
Remote Valve4: Depress and hold the switch (1)

and move the joystick left or right to operate Raise,
Neutral and Lower.
Move the joystick rearwards (R) to extend a hydraulic

cylinder.
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will retract the cylinder.
Further forward movement of the joystick will select

‘float’ (F) which will allow the cylinder to extend or
retract freely.
NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a

single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for
double--acting cylinders only.
3--78

The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L),

to extend or retract a cylinder.
By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders may

be operated simultaneously.
NOTE: With the joystick operating the rear electronic

remote valves, the float (F) position for valves 2 and
4 (lateral movement of the joystick) are not available.
To switch control of the rear valves back to the levers,

depress the top of the selector switch, the rear
indicator lamp will go out and the mid--mount
indicator lamp will start to flash. After two seconds 125
the mid--mount lamp will stay on confirming joystick
operation has now been switched back to the
mid--mount valves (where fitted).
Operation of the rear remote valves is now

transferred to lever control.
Visual Displays
Depress the remote valve key on the keypad and the

following information will be displayed in the DMD for
each valve:
1. Momentary oil flow from the valve. The shaded

area represents the percentage of oil flow, this
will change as the flow increases or decreases.
2. Maximum flow rate (%) as set by the operator.

4 3
The extend/retract directional arrows represent
the maximum flow setting.
126
3. Number of the remote valve in operation.
4. Direction of cylinder movement, extend (Raise)

or retract (Lower). The direction of cylinder travel
is identified by the arrow.
3--79

Setting the Maximum Flow Rate
The maximum flow rate for each remote valve can be

set using the menu keys on the Enhanced keypad.
To adjust the remote valve flow rate, the key--start

must be switched ON.
Using the remote valve key (1), select the

appropriate valve (1, 2, 3, or 4).
127
With the selected valve number displayed in the

DMD, Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys (1 and 2), to 1
increase or decrease the maximum flow rate of the
selected valve. The flow rate will be stored in the
tractor control module until re--programmed, turning
the key--start off will not erase the setting.
NOTE: The remote valve flow rate setting (1),

Figure 129, will apply to both extend and retract
movements of the cylinder.
IMPORTANT: During remote valve set--up, a pause 2

of more than two seconds in key operation will exit
set--up and return to the previous setting, re--enter 128
set--up mode again to continue.
129
3--80

Additional Displays
As each of the electronic remote valve functions are

selected, a corresponding visual display will appear
in the Dot Matrix Screen.
NOTE: The following illustrations relate to remote

valve number 1, see page 3--79 for details on remote
valve numbering.
Number 1 remote valve lever in NEUTRAL position.
Number 1 remote valve operating at maximum

flow set by the operator. Illustration shows
cylinder operating in RETRACT mode.
Number 1 remote valve lever in FLOAT position.
Motor mode selected on remote valve number 1.

RETRACT and FLOAT positions only available.
Electronic remote valve system switched OFF.

All remote valve functions de--activated.
3--81

Manual and Programmed Lever Operation
The Enhanced keypad is used to select and

programme the timed functions for each of the
electronic remote valves. As each remote valve is
selected using the remote valve key (1), a visual
display of the valve functions will appear in the Dot
Matrix screen.
Depress the key once to activate the remote valve

display in the DMD. Repeated operation of the key
will cycle through each valve display individually.
130
Manual Operation
When used in manual mode, without the timer

function, the electronic remote valves will operate in
a similar way to the mechanical valves previously
described.
IMPORTANT:Care must be taken when operating in

the manual mode that the remote valve lever is not
left in the detented extend or retract positions when
using remote cylinders. When the cylinder has
reached the end of its stroke the control lever must
be returned to the neutral position manually. Failure
to observe this procedure will overheat the oil and
may lead to failure of hydraulic or driveline
components.
IMPORTANT: Never use the neutral position from

the extend or retract position to stop a hydraulic
motor. Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system may
cause extensive damage to the motor.
In manual mode, oil flow through each valve is

adjusted using the flow rate setting as previously
described.
3--82

Timed Programme Operation
Timed programme operation is provided primarily for

operation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature allows
the operator to programme a time delay between
when the control levers are activated and when the
oil flow to the implement is stopped.
To operate the electronic remote valves in

programmed mode, depress the appropriate side of
timer control switch (2) as shown. When the switch
is depressed, the green light (1) adjacent to the
remote valve lever will start to flash. The system is
now in standby mode ready to accept a programme
131
sequence. The light will continue to flash for ten
seconds allowing the operator sufficient time to begin
the programming sequence. If a programme is not
started within this period, the system will
automatically de--activate, depress the timer control
switch again to re--start the sequence.
Programming a Double Acting Service
To programme the remote valves, first ensure the

cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to
the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor
engine and set at the normal operating speed in
which the cylinder is to be operated. This is important
as the programming of the control levers is based on
a time interval corresponding to the time it takes the
cylinder rod to extend and retract. Any change in
engine rpm. will have an effect on hydraulic flow and
therefore the time taken for the cylinder to extend
and retract.
The timed period for control lever operation remains

the same regardless of oil flow, therefore consistent
operation is required for the system to function
correctly. Using the corresponding timer switch (1)
depress the switch so the light begins to flash. While
the light is flashing move control lever (2) to extend
the cylinder (R). At this point the light ceases to flash
and will remain on.
Hold the lever until the cylinder is extended to the

desired position and then return the lever to the
neutral position. When the lever is returned to the
neutral position the programming light will begin to
flash again indicating the retract phase of the cycle
should now be programmed. 132
3--83

Operate the control lever (2) to retract the cylinder

(L), and the programming light will cease to flash and
remain on. Hold the lever until the cylinder has
completed the retract cycle and then return to the
neutral position. After the second phase has been
programmed the light will remain on.
After the second phase has been completed and the

lever has been returned to neutral, the programme
will be automatically stored.
Repeat the above sequence to programme the

remaining control levers if required.
133
Programming of the control lever can be performed

in either sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend or
for one movement only, extend or retract. The
maximum allowable time span for any timed
operation is 30 seconds.
NOTE: Turning the key--start switch OFF will erase

the programme.
Programming a Single Acting Service
To programme a single acting service carry out the

same set--up procedure as previously described for
a double acting service.
With the programme light flashing, move the remote

valve lever from neutral to the extend position (R).
When the cylinder has extended to the desired
position, manually return the lever to the neutral
position. To store the setting, depress the timer
switch. In single acting mode the sequence will NOT
be automatically stored.
134
A single acting service can be programmed to
operate in either extend or retract modes.
NOTE: When using a timed sequence for a single

acting service i.e. programmed in extend mode only,
the retract mode will not function until the programme
sequence has been deleted.
If the control lever is moved to the float position no

timed programme is possible and the control lever
must be returned to neutral manually.
3--84

Setting Remote Valve Priority
A remote valve with oil flow priority will always take

precedence over other remote valves for hydraulic oil
flow. Irrespective of flow demand by the other valves,
the priority valve will always maintain a constant
output.
For implements requiring multiple remote valve

services, there may be a need for one of the valves
to have oil flow priority, i.e. to provide oil flow for a
hydraulic motor.
With electronic remote valves, the operator can 135

select one remote valve as the priority valve.

and hold the Menu/Enter key (4) Figure 135, until
the central LCD display reads Ehrx (where ’x’ is
the current priority valve number).
NOTE: If a dash (- ) appears in the display, the

remote valves are not prioritised.
• After a few seconds the LCD display will change

to read PEhr.
• Momentarily depress the EHR remote valve key

(1) Figure 136, to select the valve required for
prioritisation. Depressing the key repeatedly will 136
scroll through the valve numbers.
• When the desired valve number is shown in the

display, depress the Exit/Cancel key (2)
Figure 135, to exit set--up and return to the
previous display. The valve priority setting is now
memorised.
3--85

Replaying a Timed Programme Relieving System Pressure
The timed sequence begins as soon as the lever is

placed in the extend or retract detent position. On
WARNING
reaching the end of the timed period, oil flowing Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses
through the remote valve will be halted, the remote at the remote cylinders, relieve the pressure in the
valve lever should now be returned to the neutral circuit by first starting the engine and then move the
position ready for the next operation. Throughout the control levers fully forward to the “float” position.
replay sequence, the green warning light will remain Then stop the engine. Make sure no one will be
illuminated. injured by moving equipment when relieving
pressure in the system. Before disconnecting
Deleting Programmes cylinders or equipment, make sure the equipment or
implement is supported securely.
To delete a programme, depress the programme Never work under equipment supported by a
switch to de--activate timer operation. The light will hydraulic device because it may drop if the control is
extinguish and the memorised sequence will be actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the
cleared from the programme in the memory. event of hose failure, etc. always use a secure
support for equipment which must be serviced while
in the raised position. Make sure that oil contained
Recalling a Stored Programme within the remote cylinders is clean and is of the
correct grade.
With the key--start on and all remote valve levers in
neutral, hold down the timer switch for the EHR Operating with Headland Turn Sequence
required. Keep the timer switch depressed until the (where fitted)
light ceases to flash, the previously stored timer
sequence is now re--activated.
IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote
valve operation in a Headland Turn Sequence, it is
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic important to allow sufficient time for the movement
programme settings made during tractor operation of the control lever to be recorded as it passes
are transferred from the operating memory to the through each position (R,N,L,F or vice versa).
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data Pausing the lever in each position for approximately
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay 1/ second will provide sufficient time for the step to
2
before turning the key on again. be recorded accurately. Moving the lever too quickly
may confuse data transfer causing the implement to
respond incorrectly on playback.
3--86

Connecting Single-Acting Cylinders
Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to the

lower coupler on the remote control valve, as
previously described.
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever back to the extend position (R).
Manually return the lever to the neutral position to

stop the cylinder when it has reached the desired
position.
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever

fully forward to the float (F) position. 137
NOTE: In single acting timer mode the remote lever

will lock in the extend position and will not
automatically return to the neutral position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to

lower a single-acting cylinder. The “retract” position
is for double-acting cylinders only.
Connecting Double-Acting Cylinders
Connect the feed hose (1) from a double-acting

cylinder to the lower coupler (3) on the remote
control valve. Connect the return hose (2) to the
upper coupler (4) on the same valve.
To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control

To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control

lever forward, past neutral to the ‘lower’ position.
Further forward movement of the lever will select 138

‘float’ which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract
freely. This feature is of material assistance when
carrying out work with equipment such as scraper
blades and loaders.
3--87

Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic

motors) should be connected to the remote control
valve coupler with the feed hose (1) connected to the
upper coupler (4) and the return hose (2) connected
to the lower coupler (3) of the same valve.
Alternatively, the return hose may connected to the
low pressure return circuit (see page 3--91, ’Return
Oil Line’).
The oil flow should be adjusted to regulate the motor

speed. If the flow is too high, the 3-point hitch and 139
other remote valves may slow down or stop.
Controlling the flow in this way will ensure that the
hydraulic system will only supply the oil required by
the motor.
With the remote control valve lever fully forward in

the float (F) position, the motor will be stationary. The
hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is pulled back
to the retract position (Lower). To stop the motor,
move the lever from the lower position to the float
position. In the float position the motor will be able to
stop slowly, which will not damage the motor.
IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow

equipment, the remote control valve lever must not
be moved rearward to the neutral (N) or raise (R)
positions as damage to the equipment may result.
Select position 1 on the rolling gate to lock out the
neutral and extend services (see page 3--76)
140
Observe the following to further protect the tractor
and equipment.
• Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment

or motor. Adjust the oil flow through the valve to
regulate the rate of flow or speed of the motor.
• To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate
continuous flow equipment at the highest flow
setting and lowest engine speed that will give the
required machine performance and speed.
3--88

Operating Several Remote Valves

Simultaneously or Remote Valves and 1
Hydraulic Lift Simultaneously
If operating two or more remote control valves

simultaneously or remote valves and the hydraulic
lift, the flow through the valves should be adjusted
using the enhanced keypad to provide a partial flow,
as previously described in Setting the Maximum
Flow Rate. If not so adjusted, all the available flow
may be directed to the full flow circuit when the
pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other 2
circuits in use.
141
NOTE: For equipment using more than one remote
valve, the hydraulic service with the highest priority
should be connected to the valve that has been set
to provide oil flow priority, see page 3--85.
Bleeding Remote Cylinders
When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a

new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
With the hoses connected to the remote control valve

couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the
remote control valve operating lever.
Check the rear axle oil level before and after

operating a remote cylinder.
3--89

CONTINUOUS OIL SUPPLY FOR REMOTE

SERVICES (where fitted)
For implements or attachments requiring continuous

or high oil flow from the tractor hydraulic system,
provision is made to connect directly into the main
hydraulic circuit at the rear of the tractor.
To operate correctly the implement must be fitted

with a closed centre hydraulic valve system that will,
through a sensing line, control oil flow from the main
tractor hydraulic pump.
IMPORTANT: To ensure correct operation of the

system, the implement control valve, when in
neutral, must be capable of directing the pressure
from the load sensing line back to sump through the
return oil line.
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove any

blanking plugs or attach pipework, ensure the areas
around the plugs and pipe connections are
thoroughly clean to prevent contamination of the
tractor hydraulic system.
NOTE: Ensure the hoses have a suitable capacity to

accommodate the required oil flow, and that both the
sensing line and hoses are sufficiently long enough
to allow for implement movement or articulation
when in work.
Power Beyond Ports
P -- Pressure Line (1)

To connect the implement pressure line, remove the
plug (1) from the external services ’power beyond’
port on top of the remote valve manifold. Using a
suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5 (ISO 6149),
attach the implement supply line to this port. With the
implement control valve in neutral, a low standby
pressure of 21 to 24 bar (305 to 348 lbf. in.) will be
maintained in the pressure line connected to this
port.
142
3--90

LS -- Load Sensing Line (2)

Connect the sensing line from the M12 x 1.5/11.5
(ISO 6149) port (2), to the implement control valve.
It is the sensing line which generates and controls the
oil pressure and flow from the tractor hydraulic pump.
When an implement control valve is operated, the
low standby pressure from port ’P’, is diverted down
the sensing line to ’switch on’ the tractor hydraulic
pump. In operation, the load sensing line constantly
monitors pressure and flow to ensure supply never
exceeds demand.
NOTE: Tractors with solenoid operated hydraulic top

link and right hand lift rod will have a ’T’ piece in port 143
(2). Remove the cap from the ’T’ piece and connect
the sensing line in place of the cap. Use a 9/16 --18,
’O’ ring face seal fitting which complies to standards
ISO 8434--3 or SAE J1453. Do not overtighten the
connector.
R -- Return Oil Line (3)

The return oil line from the implement control valves
should be connected to the M27 x 2/19 (ISO 6149)
port (3). This will permit the oil to return directly back
into the tractor hydraulic system.
ISO Power Beyond Couplings
The ISO coupling consists of three ports.
1. Return oil line.

Coupling size: 25
Port size: M30 x 2/19
2. Oil supply (pressure) port.

Coupling size: 19
Port size: M27 x 2/19
3. Load sensing port.

Coupling size: 6.3 144
Port size: M14 x 1.5/11.5
The maximum flow available through the ISO

pressure port will depend on the output from the
tractor hydraulic pump. Full flow will be available
from a 120 litre pump assuming there are no other
hydraulic demands on the system.
With the high capacity pump, up to 140 litre/min is

available.
IMPORTANT: Always relieve hydraulic pressure in

remote cylinders before connecting or disconnecting
hydraulic hoses.
3--91

Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using

Remote Hydraulic Equipment
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good WARNING

practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on Hydraulic fluid or diesel oil escaping under pressure
the dipstick with the tractor parked on level ground can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
and the three--point hitch in the fully raised position.
However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to • Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a
the remote control valves it should be remembered piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and • Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
could seriously lower the oil level. Operating the connecting or disconnecting lines by moving the
tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the remote control valve lever(s) fully forward to the
rear axle and transmission components. ‘float’ position then back to neutral.
NOTE: Before connecting remote cylinders, stop the • Tighten all connections before starting the
engine and thoroughly clean the connections to engine or pressurising lines.
prevent oil contamination.
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
With the rear axle oil level up to the full mark on the attention immediately or gangrene may result.
dipstick, the following maximum oil volumes may be
taken from the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment
without the need to further top up the system:
Operating stationary equipment 21 litres
on level ground 22.1 U.S. qts. WARNING
Never work under or allow anyone near raised
Operating while driving in normal 15 litres equipment as it will drop when relieving pressure in
conditions (flat fields) for 15.8 U.S. qts. the system or in the event of hose failure, etc. Before
short periods only disconnecting cylinders or equipment ensure the
equipment or implement is supported securely.
Operating in other 9 litres Always use a secure support for equipment which
conditions, including 9.5 U.S. qts. must be serviced while in the raised position.
longer periods of use
Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be
added to the rear axle above the normal FULL level
is 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts.). With this quantity added to
the rear axle, the quantities stated above may be
increased by the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S.
qts.), but no more.
3--92

THREE-POINT HITCH
NOTE: Before attaching equipment read the

following text, carefully.
Description
The 3-point hitch enables semi-mounted and fully

mounted implements to be connected to the tractor,
operated and controlled by the tractor hydraulic
system. Flexible or Quick Hitch link ends (3) are
available to aid implement connection.
The lower links are raised and lowered by means of 145

the lift rods (2) connected to the lift arms. The lift rods
may be readily adjusted to aid proper alignment of
the implement to the tractor.
The top link (1) is connected to a bracket on the rear

axle centre housing. The rear of the top link should
be connected to the upper hitch pin of a mounted
implement. The top link is also adjustable to aid
implement alignment.
ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Before attaching equipment, adjust lift rods

and select the correct top link hole for the implement
and work to be carried out.
Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers or sway blocks

are installed and correctly adjusted. Remove the
swinging drawbar, if close-mounted equipment is
being attached.
IMPORTANT: Always select Position Control or set

the draft loading wheel to position 10 when attaching
equipment, transporting equipment, when no
equipment is attached or at any time when not
operating in Draft Control.
NOTE: See also ‘External Power Lift Control’ on

page 3--67 for more details.
3--93

Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or
follows: semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or
when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
points are level with and slightly ahead of the between the implement and the tractor.
implement hitch pins. Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere
with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
2. Attach the implement to the lower links, as steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or
described in ‘Flexible Link Ends’ on page 3--98 or stabilisers.
’Quick Hitch’ on page 3--99.
IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE
CAUTION
Engage the parking brake before leaving the tractor CAUTION
to make the connections. It is essential to have the Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may
engine running to operate the external interfere with or damage the cab. You may be injured
fender-mounted switches when making lower link by broken glass or the cab ROPS may be damaged
connections. If your tractor does not have these if equipment interferes with the cab.
switches or when making other connections, stop the
engine.
To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating
• Attach the equipment as outlined previously.
equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where
fitted) are locked in the operating position.
• Check for adequate clearance by slowly raising
the equipment with the lift control lever. If any
3. With the engine stopped and parking brake
part of the equipment comes closer than 100 mm
engaged, adjust the top link until the implement
(4 in.) to the cab, adjust the 3-point hitch height
mast pin can be inserted through the mast and
limit control knob (page 3--61) to limit upward
top link.
movement.
4. Connect remote equipment, where applicable.
When removing equipment, the procedure is the
5. After attaching implement and before actual reverse of attaching. The following information will
operation check that: make disconnection easier and safer.
• No interference occurs with tractor • Always park the equipment on a firm, level
components. surface.
• The top link does not contact the PTO guard • Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall
with the implement at its lowest position. when detached from the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven • Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote
equipment, check to make sure that the PTO cylinders by selecting the float position before
driveline will not over-extend so as to become disconnecting.
disengaged, bottom out or be at an excessive angle.
Ensure that the driveline shield does not contact the When attaching mounted equipment to the
PTO guard or drawbar. See ‘Attaching P.T.O.--Driven three-point hitch, the following adjustments may be
Equipment’ on page 3--28. made to ensure satisfactory operation:
3--94

LIFT RODS, LOWER LINKS AND TOP LINK

(mechanical adjust)
CAUTION
Before disconnecting a lift rod from the lower link,
lower attached equipment to the ground and stop the
engine. Before removing the securing pin, ensure
that attached equipment is correctly supported and
that no residual pressure remains in the hydraulic
system.
Electronic Draft Control
Before stopping the engine, move the position
control lever fully down to relieve any residual
pressure.
When adjusting lift rods, ensure that at least 40 mm
(1.6 in.) of thread remains engaged in the lower end
of the lift rod assembly.
Top Link Adjustment
The top link has a threaded centre section (1) , which,

when rotated, will shorten or lengthen the top link, as
required. Lift up the spring retainer (2) to allow the
centre section to rotate. To ease adjustment, lift the
handle (3) and use it as a lever. Alternatively, rotating
the link end (4) will permit limited adjustment of top
link length.
To lock the sleeve after adjustment, push the spring

retainer down so that it holds the handle (3) flush
against the sleeve.
146
When not in use, the top link can be removed and
stored in the tractor or left in an upright position and
retained by hooking the ball end of the handle (2) into
the bracket (1) on the rear axle housing.
147
3--95

Lift Rod Adjustment
The lift rods are adjusted by rotating the upper part

of the lift rod by means of the handle (1) on the
turnbuckle.
Before the turnbuckle can be rotated, it is necessary

to lift the handle to disengage it from the lock (2)
Figure 149, on the lower section of the lift rod. Rotate
the turnbuckle to lengthen or shorten the lift rod
assembly.
148
When adjustment is satisfactory, allow the

turnbuckle to lower into position. Ensure that the
turnbuckle is fully down and engaged with the lock to
prevent unintentional rotation.
Each lower link has two holes for attaching the lift
rods. Attach the lift rods to the front hole (nearest the
tractor) for maximum lift height. Use the rear hole for
maximum lift capacity.
149
Hitch Float
Remove the lower link retaining clip and lock plate
(1). Withdraw the pin (2) Figure 150, from the lift rod
to permit the outer lock plate to be rotated into the
vertical position. Replace the pin, inner lock plate and
retaining clip as shown. The hitch is now in the float
position.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or

semi--mounted equipment to the 3--point hitch or
when coupling trailed equipment to the drawbar or
automatic pick--up hitch, ensure that there is 150
adequate clearance between the implement and the
cab or rear window in any open position.
3--96

TOP LINK AND RIGHT-HAND LIFT ROD

(hydraulic adjust)
The hydraulic adjust top link (1) is available in

conjunction with a hydraulic adjust right-hand lift rod
(2). Both the top link and the lift rod incorporate a
double--acting ram cylinder connected into No. IIII
remote control valve.
151
With Electro--Mechanical Operation
To lengthen the right-hand lift rod and move the lower

link downwards, pull No. IIII remote control valve
lever (2) towards you. Push the lever away from you,
past the neutral position to retract the cylinder and
shorten the right-hand lift rod.
To lengthen the top link, depress and hold in the

button (1) on No. IIII remote control valve lever (2)
and pull the lever towards you. Push the lever away
from you, past the neutral position to retract the
cylinder and shorten the top link assembly.
152
With Electronic Operation
Two switches located on the cab ’C’ pillar operate the

hydraulic top link and right--hand lift rod. Both
switches are spring centered and will return to the
neutral position when released.
Depress and hold the top of the left--hand switch (1)

to retract the top link, depress the bottom of the
switch to extend the link.
Depressing the top of the right--hand switch (2) will

retract the hydraulic cylinder and raise the link arm,
depress the bottom of the switch to extend the 153
cylinder and lower the link arm.
Automatic check valves on the top link and lift rod

cylinders will prevent them from ’creeping’.
3--97

TOP LINK BRACKET

(all models)
Two holes are provided in the bracket for attachment

of the top link.
Insert the pin (2) through the upper hole, as shown,

for maximum lift capacity and the greatest implement
to cab clearance. Use the lower hole (3) for the best
ground penetration and greatest implement to
ground clearance (when the implement is raised).
To relocate the top link, pull out the ‘R’ clip (1) and
extract the securing pin. Relocate the top link and 154
pin, as required, ensuring that the tang on the end of
the securing pin handle locates in the other hole.
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with an automatic

pick--up hitch, the pin may foul the hitch lift rods
during removal. If necessary, use hydraulic power to
move the hitch lift rods to permit removal of the top
link securing pin.
FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS

(where fitted)
A release ring (1) is provided on the upper surface of

each link end. Pull up the ring to release the latch and
slide the link end rearwards. With the link ends
released, connection to the implement will be easier.
The link end (4) is shown in the extended position.
The link end (2) is shown in the closed (operating)
position.
With both link ends extended, as at (4), connect the

link ends to the equipment and secure with lynch
pins. Start the engine and carefully inch the tractor 155
rearwards until the latches lock in the detent (3) on
each link arm. Stop the engine and engage the
parking brake.
Attach the top link and adjust accordingly.
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the

equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are
locked in the operating position. Remove the
drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted
equipment.
3--98

QUICK HITCH
The Quick Hitch consists of an alternative pair of

lower links (2) and an adjustable top link (1). The
lower links and the top link have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements
without leaving the cab. The claws are equipped with
self-locking latches to ensure positive retention of
the tractor hitch to the implement. Cables are
provided for attachment to the latches.
156
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the
implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin. The two plain ball-bushings (3) with their
detachable guides (2) should be installed on the
implement lower hitch pins.
157
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Adjust the lower link stabilisers to maintain the tractor

lower links at the correct distance apart so they align
with the ball-bushings installed on the implement lower
hitch pins.
Fully raise the top link. With the lower links fully
lowered, the self-locking latches in the operating
position (1), reverse the tractor until the lower link
claw couplers are beneath the implement hitch pins.
The combination of large claw openings and the
guides on the implement ball-bushes make accurate
alignment of tractor to implement unnecessary. 158
3--99

Raise the lower links until the claw couplers engage

the ball-bushes. An audible click will be heard as the
self-locking latches engage the implement
ball-bushes. Lower the top link claw onto the upper
implement ball-bush and press down until the latch
is heard to engage. Increase or decrease top link
length, as necessary.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the 3-point hitch.
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor
Using the hydraulic lift control lever, fully lower the

implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the tractor. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull the release cable on the top link to release the

claw from the implement hitch.
Pull the release cable (2) on both lower links. The

lever will lock in position with the latch retracted (1).
This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on
the implement lower hitch pins when the links are 159
lowered fully. Fully lower the lower links and drive the
tractor forward, clear of the implement.
NOTE: Ensure the release cables do not foul wheels,

or moving parts of the 3--point hitch or implement.
When not in use, secure the cables to the rubber
strap on the rear right-hand side of the cab frame.
3--100

LINKAGE STABILISERS
CAUTION
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
telescopic stabilisers are installed and correctly
adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement.
ROUND SECTION SCREW TYPE
Telescopic stabilisers control the side to side

movement (sway) of the lower links and attached
equipment when in work or when being transported.
This is especially important when operating on
slopes or near fences, walls or ditches and with
certain implements. Check your implement
Operator’s Manual.
Each stabiliser consists of a fabricated tube (2) with

a coupling at each end. The end with the pin (4) is
attached to the 3--point hitch. The screw thread (3)
screws into the rear end of the tube to provide
adjustment. The ball end (6) is attached to a
mounting bracket (1) bolted to the outer end of the
rear axle housing. This ball end is a loose, sliding fit
within the tube. The pin (5) may be passed through
drillings in the tube and rod, as shown, to lock the
assembly as a unit.
In practice, the locating pin (5) should be removed

from both stabilisers and the implement attached to
the 3--point hitch. To remove the pin, pull back the
160
securing clip. When the implement is satisfactorily
aligned, the tube should be rotated until the holes in
the front end of the tube and the sliding ball end are
aligned. The locating pin should then be passed
through the holes and the securing clip replaced.
With the pins inserted in this manner, both stabilisers

will be locked as a rigid unit and the implement will be
prevented from swaying both in work or in the
transport position.
3--101

Under certain conditions or when using equipment

such as ploughs etc., it may be desirable to allow the
3--point hitch (and implement) to sway from side to
side.
If the pin is removed from the front hole, a limited

degree of sway will be permitted. The pin should be
re-inserted through the rear hole, as shown at (1).
The pin will act as a stop to limit the degree of sway.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length,

particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that
there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the
stabilisers or lower links. 161
NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick--Up Hitch,

ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide
adequate clearance between the lower links and the
hitch.
3--102

AUTOMATIC STABILISERS
Automatic telescopic stabilisers may be fitted in

place of the standard telescopic stabilisers,
described previously.
WARNING
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.
Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube

assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The
tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket
bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing.
An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the

lower links. The threaded rod engages with the
screwed thread in the tube assembly and the overall
length of the assembly is determined by screwing the
rod in or out, as required.
An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to
the rear cab support and at the other end, via a
spring, to a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part
of the stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of 162
the stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.
When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack

when the lower links are raised from the operating
position, so allowing the cover to drop down over the
lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down, as
shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset length.
The lower links are, therefore, retained at a set
distance apart, preventing them (and attached
equipment) from moving from side to side (swaying).
However, when the 3--point hitch is lowered into the
work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the
cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope
freely. The stabilisers (and implement) will then sway
when engaged in the ground. This feature is useful
as it provides greater implement control when turning
on the headlands of a field.
3--103

Adjusting the Stabilisers

In practice, the implement should be attached to the
3--point hitch with the cover (4) on both stabilisers
raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to telescope
freely.
Lift the locking/adjusting lever (2) up over the peg (1)
so that the lever is at right-angles to the stabiliser. Turn
the telescopic section, by means of the lever, so that
the threaded section (3) screws into or out of the
stabiliser. When the length is satisfactory, i.e., the notch
in the cover aligns with the lug on the stabiliser, lower
the lever back down over the peg and close the cover.
163
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the
appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the
cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement
is lowered into work.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to

provide sideways movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or
lower links.

hitch.
SWAY BLOCK STABILISERS

1 1
Sway block stabilisers may be installed as an
alternative to telescopic stabilisers and will control
the side to side movement (sway) of the lower links
and attached equipment when in work or when being
transported. This is especially important when
operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches
and with certain implements. Check your Implement
Operator’s Manual.
WARNING
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to 164
prevent excessive lateral movement.
Sway blocks consist of reversible blocks (1) bolted to

either side of the drawbar hanger. A steel wear pad
(2) bolted to the inner surface of each lower link,
contacts the sway block to prevent excessive sway
(lateral movement) of the lower links. The thickness
of the pad (and therefore the degree of sway) is
controlled by two spacer shims of 8 mm and 10 mm
thickness, respectively.
3--104

The positioning of the shims relative to the pad

depends upon the required width setting of the lower
links (to suit the attached implement) or the degree
of sway required.
Shim/Wear Pad Position

1 1
The left-hand side of Figure 165 shows both spacer
shims (3) and (4) installed between the wear pad (2)
and the lower link (1). This will increase the distance
between the lower links to suit a wider implement.
The right-hand side of Figure 165 shows the 8 mm

shim (4) on the outer surface of the lower link with the
10 mm shim (3) installed between the pad and the
lower link. Alternatively, the shims may be omitted
altogether to reduce the distance between the lower
links when operating with a narrower implement.
165
Sway Block Position
To allow lateral movement of the lower links (and

attached equipment) in both the operating and
transport positions, attach both sway blocks (1) so
that the flat surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown
in the right-hand side of Figure 166.
When it is desirable to have sideways movement of

the equipment in the operating position, but remain
rigid in the transport position, remove the bolts
securing the sway blocks to the drawbar hanger and
relocate the sway blocks (1) so that the curved
surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown in the 166
left-hand side of Figure 166.
This will allow the implement to sway when the lower

links are lowered into the working position but
become rigid when raised.
IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to

provide lateral movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the lower links or implement contacting
the rear tyres. Ensure that there is sufficient
clearance between the wear pads and the sway
blocks to allow the 3-point hitch to raise and lower
without the possibility of the lower links binding or
becoming bent.

hitch.
3--105

DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS
NOTE: Before attaching trailed equipment to the • Do not tow equipment weighing more than twice
tractor, read the following text carefully. the tractor weight.
ATTACHING/DETACHING TRAILED • Do not exceed 10 MPH (16 km/h) if towed

EQUIPMENT equipment weighs more than the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require • Do not exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h) while towing
brakes on towed equipment when operating on the equipment that weighs less than the tractor.
public highway. Before travelling on public roads,
make sure you comply with legal requirements. All Drawbars
To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and WARNING

implements: Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height. pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for
pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn
2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and rearwards.
implement hitch to align.
3. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine. NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar
ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not
4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer exceed the maximum static downward load or the
is in the latched position. rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see
Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or Section 3).
semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or
when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the
between the implement and the tractor. highway it is recommended that a safety chain
Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of
with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust the implement be installed between the tractor and
steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or implement hitch. See Safety Chain on page 3--110.
stabilisers.
SWINGING DRAWBARS
NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions
or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store Two types of swinging drawbar are available. The
the clevis and hitch pin. sliding type is illustrated in Figure 167. This drawbar
may be installed as part of a tow hitch or as an
Always use a safety chain installed between the independent unit.
tractor and implement hitch when transporting
equipment on the highway. See page 3--110. The roller type, shown in Figure 170, is
recommended when heavy draft, trailed equipment
Observe the following precautions for towing is used for extended periods. This drawbar is
equipment not equipped with brakes: mounted on rollers and offers additional turning ease
when compared with the sliding type.
3--106

Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar
The drawbar (2) pivots about a single pin at the front

end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to swing
the full width of the hanger. By inserting the swing
limiter pins (1) in the appropriate holes, restricted
movement of the drawbar is permitted. Alternatively,
the drawbar can be pinned in any one of three
positions by insertion of the pins in the appropriate
holes. In Figure 167, the drawbar is shown pinned
in the central position to prevent swinging.
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling

equipment which requires accurate positioning and 167
when transporting equipment.
Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground

engaging equipment which does not require
accurate positioning. This will make steering and
turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.
All Countries Except North America
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of three

holes in the drawbar to vary the P.T.O. shaft to hitch
point distance. See Figure 168 and the following
table:
Hole (see P.T.O. Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 168) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1440 kg (3175 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1680 kg (3700 lb.)
168
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 2575 kg (5675 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2300 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 1305 kg (2875 lb.)
3--107

Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.
When towing equipment exerting high static

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use the close-coupled position -- hole 3, with the
clevis in the uppermost position..
North America only
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of four

table:
Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 169 ) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 1000 kg (2204 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 1215 kg (2678 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1620 kg (3571 lb.) 169
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1900 kg (4188 lb.)
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 780 kg (1719 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 885 kg (1951 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)

downward forces, such as two--wheeled trailers,
etc., use the close-coupled positions -- holes 3 or 4
with the clevis in the uppermost position.
3--108

Roller Type Swinging Drawbar
The drawbar (2) Figure 170, pivots about a single pin

at the front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar
to swing the full width of the hanger. By inserting the
swing limiter pin (1) in the appropriate hole and
through the drawbar, the drawbar can be pinned in
any one of seven positions. Alternatively, the
drawbar may be allowed to swing the full width of the
hanger (3).
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling

equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to 170
swing when pulling ground engaging equipment
which does not require accurate positioning. This will
make steering and turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of two

table:
Hole (see P.T.O. Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 171) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1360 kg (2995 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1630 kg (3590 lb.)
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.) 171
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.
3--109


downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use hole 2 with the clevis in the uppermost position.
WARNING
Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
pick--up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for
pull--type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn
rearwards.
NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar

ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not
exceed the maximum static downward load or the
rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see
Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
Section 3).
IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the

highway it is recommended that a safety chain
having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of
the implement be installed between the tractor and
implement hitch. See following text and Figure 172.
SAFETY CHAIN
When towing implements on public roads, use a

safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or
greater than the gross weight of the implement to be
towed. This will control the implement (1) in case the
drawbar (3) and implement become disconnected.
After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by

driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short
distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If
necessary, re-adjust to eliminate a tight or loose
chain.
172
Check the implement operator’s manual for
implement weight and attaching hardware
specifications.
Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide

are available from your authorised dealer.
3--110

REAR TOW HITCH
Description
Various rear tow hitch options are available. All

versions consist of a fabricated steel frame bolted to
the rear axle centre housing. A tow pin or ball is
provided, adjustable for height.
The slider type frame is is equipped with rotating pins

that engage in notches in the frame to secure the
hitch at the required height.
With this type of frame, a second, fixed tow pin (piton)

is available as an option. The piton is installed at the
bottom of the assembly.
Four types of hitch assembly are available :--
• Heavy duty non-swivelling tow pin.

See Figure 173.
• Swivelling tow pin -- manual operation.

See Figure 175.
• Swivelling tow pin -- auto operation.

See Figure 177.
• K 80 ball.
See Figure 181.
A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part of

the assembly. See ‘Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar’
on page 3--107 for details of drawbar operation.
NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use

with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. Observe the
maximum static downward loads quoted in the text.
3--111

Slider Frame with non-swivelling Tow Pins

(where fitted)
The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, non-swivelling, tow pin assembly.
Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (5) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame. Using both hands on the handle (5) lift or lower
the tow pin assembly (4), as required. When at the
required height, support the tow pin with one hand and
lower the handle to the horizontal position. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower 173
the P.T.O. guard (6).
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (3) from the tow pin and lift out using the
handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes
through the eye of the trailer drawbar. Replace the ‘R’
clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed the rear tyre load capacity or the following
values, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and
Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
Category D3 tow pin 2500 kg (5500 lb.)
NOTE: A Category D3 tow pin is standard equipment

on your tractor. A Category D2 pin and housing is
available as a dealer installed accessory.
3--112

Slider Frame with Swivelling Tow Pins

(where fitted)
The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height

adjustable, swivelling tow pin assembly with manual
or auto operation.
With reference to Figure 174, adjust the height of the

tow pin assembly, as follows:
Grasp the handle (2) with the right hand. Press and
hold in the button (1) to release the locking mechanism.
Pull the handle (3) down to the horizontal position with
the left hand and release the push button to lock the 174
handle (3) in the horizontal position. Lowering the
handle will rotate the pins and disengage them from the
frame. Using both handles, lift or lower the complete
tow pin assembly. When at the required height, hold in
the push button and lift the left-hand handle up to the
vertical position, as shown in Figure 174. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower
the P.T.O. guard (4).
WARNING
Before attaching a trailer, ensure that the pins are
fully engaged in the notches, i.e. the handle (3)
Figure 174, is in the vertical position. The tow pin
assembly must not rest on the P.T.O. guard or on the
bolt heads at the end of the slider guides.
175
3--113

Attaching a Trailer
Swivelling Tow Pin -- Manual Engagement
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (1) Figure 175, from the tow pin and lift out
using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it
passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar.
Replace the ‘R’ clip.
The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening

the socket-headed screw (1) Figure 176 on the
underside of the tow pin assembly. This feature will
permit a trailer with a non-swivelling drawbar to 176
articulate relative to the towing tractor.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor tow pin to

swivel if the trailed equipment is equipped with a
swivelling tow pin connector.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
Swivelling Tow Pin -- Auto Engagement
The tow pin (2) Figure 177, is spring-loaded in the

engaged (down) position, as shown. To attach a trailer
to the tow pin, lift the release lever (1) to the vertical
position to retract the tow pin up into it’s housing.
The release lever is connected by the cable (4) to a

handle in the cab. This will permit trailer attachment
without leaving the cab. Pull up the handle (1) Figure
178 to actuate the cable release and retract the tow
pin up into it’s housing.
177
The pin will stay in the raised position until the trailer
drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the drawbar
will contact the trip lever (3) Figure 177 and cause
the pin to drop down into the engaged position.
Alternatively, the tow pin will drop down into the
engaged position if the lever (1) is pulled down.
WARNING
Do not attempt to trip the lever by hand as the fingers
may be trapped by the action of the spring-loaded
tow pin.
178
3--114

Fixed Tow Pin (Piton)
An optional fixed tow pin (piton) may be provided at

the bottom of the assembly.
To attach a trailer to the piton, remove the lynch pin

(2) and withdraw the retaining pin (4). Lift the security
latch (1) and lower the eye of the trailer drawbar over
the piton (3). Drop the security latch down, re-insert
the retaining pin and secure with the lynch pin. The
security latch will ensure that the trailer cannot
become accidentally detached from the piton
NOTE: The static downward load on the piton must 179

not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
180
3--115

Slider Frame with K 80 Ball
The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly.
Remove the securing clip (2) and lift the handle (1) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame. Using both hands on the handle, lift or lower the
tow ball assembly (3) as required. When at the required
height, support the tow ball with one hand and lower the
handle to the horizontal position. The pins will rotate
and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the
P.T.O. guard. 181
NOTE: When setting the height of the tow ball, it

should be adjusted to the lowest position relative to
the correct operating height of the implement
drawbar.
To attach a trailer, remove the ’R’ clip (5) and pull out
the locking pin (4). This will allow the security latch
to pivot forwards toward the tractor. When the
implement drawbar has been securely attached,
replace the locking pin so it passes through the
security latch and re--insert the ’R’ clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow ball

must not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre
load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre
Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
Section 3).
3--116

EXTENDIBLE PICK--UP HITCH AND DRAWBAR

(where fitted)
The extendible pick--up hitch is raised and lowered

by means of the tractor hydraulic system and can be
extended to aid visibility when attaching towed
equipment.
Operated through one of the rear remote valves, the

hitch is extended or retracted using the remote valve
lever. The hoses should be connected in such a way
that moving the remote valve lever to E (Extend) will
extend the hitch, moving the lever to R (Retract) will
retract the hitch.
NOTE: The illustration shows hitch operation

through remote valve number I, however, it may be
operated using an alternative valve where required.
182
To connect an implement to the pick--up hitch, move
both position and draft control levers fully rearwards
until the 3-point lift is supporting the weight of the
hitch.
To free the hitch, pull up and hold the release handle

(1). As soon as the hitch has cleared the locking
latches allow the release handle to lower.
Lower the hitch until it is clear of the locking latches

and then extend the hook or clevis rearwards by
moving the remote valve lever to (E). With the
drawbar extended continue to lower the hitch until it
is just above the ground. 183
3--117

Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is

beneath the eye of the implement drawbar eye and,
using the position control lever, raise the hitch until
the implement drawbar is just clear of the ground.
Fully retract the pick--up hitch by moving the remote

valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the hitch
release the tractor brakes to allow movement of the
tractor towards the trailer. Re--apply the handbrake
before leaving the tractor seat.
With the hitch in the fully retracted position raise it

slowly until an audible click indicates the locking
latches (1) have engaged the cross tubes (3). 184
NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the

hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg (6610 lb.)
To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the

pick--up hitch, extract the two securing pins (1) and
withdraw the hook assembly.
Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with

the two pins.
Maximum Permissible Clevis Load
P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
406 mm (16 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)
185
When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may be

stored in the bracket (1), attached to the rear axle.
Ensure the clamp screw (2), is fully tightened to
retain the drawbar in the bracket.
IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total weight
on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
downward load or the rear tyre load capacity,
whichever is the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and
Loads at the end of Section 3).
186
3--118

TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS

(where fitted)
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

(except Italy)
Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the

hydraulic system via a quick--release coupling (1) at
the rear of the tractor.
NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling may

vary slightly from that shown, dependent upon the
type of remote control valves installed.
187
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling
the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are

locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
WARNING
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure cannot
be applied to the trailer braking system. When
parking the tractor/trailer combination apply the
tractor and trailer parking brakes while the engine is
still running. With the footbrakes locked together
apply the parking brake, stop the engine and
immediately block the wheels. Always lock the brake
pedals together when a hydraulically braked trailer is
attached to the tractor.
NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap in place when the

trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
3--119

HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

(Italy only)
The hydraulic trailer braking system on tractors for

the Italian market function in a slightly different way
to the universal system previously described.
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling

the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor or when
the tractor parking brake is applied when the engine
is running. When the engine is switched off, the trailer
brakes will remain applied.
188
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are
locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
To release hydraulic pressure and free the trailer

brakes, start the engine, depress both brake pedals
and release the tractor parking brake.
NOTE: The light (1), on the instrument panel will

flash, accompanied by critical alarm, to indicate that
hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is low.
Stop the engine and investigate the cause.
ATTENTION: Should the trailer brake warning light

commence to flash, the trailer brakes will apply
automatically.
NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap in place when the

trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
189
3--120

AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKES

(except Italy)
WARNING
Single line pneumatic trailer braking systems are
designed for use up to a maximum speed of 25 km/h
(15 MPH). Tractor/trailer combinations with dual line
braking systems may be used at a higher speed but
must at all times comply with local legal
requirements. Gross train weight, i.e., tractor plus
trailer(s) and/or individual trailer weight must not
exceed that laid down in local regulations governing
the use of trailers.
The following text covers operation of the air-

operated trailer braking systems that may be
installed as an alternative, or in addition to,
hydraulically-actuated trailer brakes.
The system consists of an engine-driven air

compressor, one or two air reservoirs, dependent
upon type of system installed, a pressure gauge,
control valves, two or three couplers and related
pipework.
The couplers installed at the back of the tractor may

be connected to single or dual line trailer braking
systems. Either or both types may be installed. The
air lines connected to the couplers are colour-coded
black, red and yellow. The black line is used for a
single line system, the red and yellow lines are used
for dual line systems.
IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate

when both tractor brake pedals are applied.
Therefore, always lock the brake pedals together
when a trailer is attached to the tractor.
NOTE: The tractor parking brake is connected to the

main control valve. Whenever the parking brake is
applied, the trailer brakes are activated.
3--121

Operation
When starting the engine with a trailer connected into

the tractor air brake system, chock the wheels and
release the parking brake and footbrakes. The
warning light (1) Figure 190, will illuminate until air
pressure builds up to 4.5 -- 5.5 bar.
The pressure will continue to rise, as indicated by the

air pressure bargraph in the Dot Matrix Display,
Figure 191. To select the air pressure bargraph, use
the CAL/SEL switch or, where fitted, the enhanced
keypad.
190
The air tank(s) should reach operating pressure

within 3 minutes of start--up but may take longer,
dependent upon the size of the trailer brake
reservoir(s).
Once required pressure has been reached a loud

‘pop’ will be heard, signifying that the unload valve
has opened to allow excess pressure to escape to
atmosphere.
IMPORTANT: Apply the footbrakes several times,

ensuring that the pressure, as indicated by the
gauge, drops as the brakes are applied and rises
again when they are released. Never drive the tractor 191
with the trailer brake warning light on.
IMPORTANT: When the footbrakes are applied ,with

the parking brake off, ensure that the front wheel
drive indicator light (1) Figure 192 illuminates and
that all stop lights are functional.
IMPORTANT: Various types of trailer braking

systems are available. Check the trailer
manufacturers’ instruction manual before making
connections to the tractor air brake system.
Clean the trailer and tractor connectors before

coupling up the hose(s). Ensure that connections are
secure. Check the trailer brakes regularly to ensure
that they are functioning correctly. 192
CAUTION
Do not over use the brakes on steep down hill
gradients. Use the same gear going down hill as you
would use for going up the same hill.
3--122

Dual Line System
For a trailer with a dual line braking system, connect

the supply line hose to the red coupler (1) and the
control line hose to the yellow coupler (2).
IMPORTANT: The dual line system will only operate

if both the red and yellow lines are connected.
Red line (brake supply line) -- (1): Air is supplied to

the red coupler at full system pressure. This is the
brake supply line and charges the reservoir(s) on the
trailer. If the trailer braking system is disconnected
from the tractor for any reason, the air pressure will 193
fall to zero and the trailer brakes will be applied.
Yellow line (control line) -- (2): As the tractor

brakes are applied, increasing air pressure is
supplied, via the yellow coupler, to the control valve
on the trailer until full system pressure is generated.
Application of the trailer brakes is proportional to the
pressure applied to the tractor brake pedals.
194
Single Line System
If the trailer has a single line system an additional

coupler is supplied. Connect the hose to the black
coupler (1) Figure 195.
A pressure of 5.5 bar is available at the coupler at all

times when the tractor brake pedals and parking
brake are released. Application of the tractor brakes
causes the pressure to drop to zero allowing the
trailer brakes to be applied.
195
3--123

AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

(Italy only)
This system operates in a similar manner to the dual

line system, previously described, except that a
combined dual coupler is utilised. Please read all the
previous text relating to pneumatic trailer brakes plus
the following:
The coupler is protected by a metal cover. To remove

the cover, press the handle (2) down. The handle is
held in position by a stiff spring and some pressure
is required to move it down to release the cover (1).
196
Connections
The lines to the couplers are colour-coded for ease

of use. The supply line to the left-hand coupler (1) is
red and the control line to the right-hand coupler (2)
is yellow. The trailer hoses will have a male dual
coupler. Press down the handle (3) and insert the
trailer coupler. When the handle is released, it will
lock the trailer and tractor couplers together.
197
3--124

TRACTOR/TRAILER BRAKE BIAS CONTROL
When the tractor leaves the factory, this control is set

to allow maximum available braking effort to the
trailer. Under most conditions, the control will remain
in this position and will give well balanced braking.
Occasionally, with some trailers this setting may

provide a greater braking bias to the trailer than is
ideal. In this case the braking force to the trailer may
be reduced slightly by turning the adjuster (1) in an
anti--clockwise direction.
To turn the valve, it is first necessary to pull the knob 198

out. After adjustment, push the knob in to lock the
setting. The adjuster must be reset to the fully
clockwise position when a different trailer is used.
WARNING
The trailer brake bias adjustment is extremely
sensitive and should not be rotated more than one
half turn before testing with the attached trailer fully
loaded. If further adjustments are required, they
should be carried out following the same procedure.
Failure to do this may result in an imbalance between
tractor and trailer braking forces if the valve is rotated
too far in the anti--clockwise direction.
Auxiliary Air Supply Connector

(where fitted)
An auxiliary air supply is available for the purpose of

inflating tyres, etc. The air supply operates at full
system pressure -- 7 or 8 bar (100 or 115 lbf. in2) --
dependent upon system installed. When not in use,
ensure protective dust cap is fitted.
Always use a proprietary inflating gun, with gauge,

when inflating tyres. Connect the air hose to the air
outlet (1), located on the left-hand side of the rear
axle.
199
3--125

TRACK ADJUSTMENT
(two wheel drive)
CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting
regulations when operating or travelling on the public
highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before
travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall
tractor width does not exceed the maximum
permitted in your country.
Track Width Adjustment
To alter the track setting, apply the handbrake and

block the rear wheels. Jack up the front axle and
place on axle stands. Remove the nuts, bolts and
washers securing the right-hand telescopic section
(1) to the centre beam (2). Repeat on the left-hand
side of the axle.
200
The two adjustable track control rods consist of a

hollow tube that is attached to the central steering
pivot, and a solid, extendible rod that attaches to the
steering arm on the kingpin. Each control rod has a
number of adjustment holes at 50 mm (2 in.)
intervals.
The two locating bolts (1), pass through the hollow

tube and the holes in the extendible rod, locking the
track rod assembly at the desired length.
Additionally, the inner ends of each track rod have a
threaded section (2), and locknut (3), to provide fine
adjustment.
201
Remove the locating bolts (1) from the both track
rods. This will permit the track rods to extend or
retract freely.
3--126

Reset the left and right-hand axle telescopic

sections, passing the securing bolts through the
centre beam and telescopic sections, as indicated in
Figure 202 and table below:
Tighten the nuts on the axle extension securing bolts

to 530 -- 950 Nm (391 -- 701 lbf.ft.).
NOTE: If the outer locating bolt on the axle is in the

fourth hole from the kingpin, then the outer bolt on
the track control rod must also be in the fourth hole
from the outer end of the control rod.
Track Settings (11.0 x 16 tyres) 202

Track Setting Securing Bolt Locations
mm. (in.) Refer to Figure 202
1549 (61.0) A C
1651 (65.0) B D
1752 (69.0) C E
1854 (73.0) D F
1955 (77.0) E G
2057 (81.0) F H
Track Settings (14L x 16.1 tyres)

Track Setting Securing Bolt Locations
mm. (in.) Refer to Figure 202
1574 (62.0) A C
1676 (66.0) B D
1778 (70.0) C E
1879 (74.0) D F
1981 (78.0) E G
2082 (82.0) F H
With both front wheels parallel, reinstall the locating

bolts (1) in the nearest aligning holes in the track
control rod. Tighten the nuts on the locating bolts to
54 -- 68 Nm (40 -- 50 lbf. ft.).
Tighten the wheel hub bolts to:

190 to 217 Nm (140 to 160 lbf. ft.)
IMPORTANT: The front wheel discs are offset

relative to the centre line of the rim. The track settings
in the table above are with the deeply dished side
of the wheel nearest the axle hub. If the front
wheels are reversed on the hubs each track setting
will be increased by approximately 203 mm (8.0 in.). 203
3--127

Front Wheel Alignment
After resetting the track width, adjust the front wheel

alignment. For correct operation, the front wheels
should toe--in slightly.
With the tractor parked on a level surface, measure

the distance (1) between the wheel rims at hub height
at the front of the wheels. Move the tractor forward
to rotate both front wheels 180° and check the
measurements again, this time at the rear of the
wheels (2). This will eliminate wheel rim run--out
errors.
The measurement taken at the front of the rims 204
should be smaller by up to 9.0 mm (0.35 in.).
Toe--in Setting 6.0 +/ -- 3 mm

(0.23 +/ -- 0.11 in.)
To adjust the toe--in setting first loosen the locknut (3)

on the inner end of the track rod. Remove the two
clamp bolts (1) to allow the track rod tube to be
rotated. To increase toe--in the track rod must be
lengthened.
After adjusting, replace the two bolts (1) and tighten

to 54--68 Nm (40--50 lbf.ft.). Re--tighten the lock nut
(3) and check the toe--in setting again.
If the toe--in setting requires considerable

adjustment, both track control rods should be moved
by the same amount to ensure the steering action
remains centralised. 205
CAUTION
Operators should ensure that all steering
components are maintained in a reliable and
satisfactory condition to ensure safe operation and
comply with legal requirements.
3--128

FRONT WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

1
(four wheel drive)
CAUTION
206
Front wheel track adjustment is effected by changing 2

the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim
and/or the disc relative to the axle hub or by
inter--changing the wheels.
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and
cause injury.
There are three different designs of centre disc

dependent upon tyre size and tractor model. The 207
centre discs shown are as follows:
3
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1)
Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2)
Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 3)
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track

setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and
Figure 219 to see the wheel rim and disc positions
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
208
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1 and 2), are not
available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
3--129

WARNING
With a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractor
supported on a stand, never attempt to rotate the
wheel or start the engine. This may cause the rear
wheels to move resulting in the tractor falling from the A
stand. Wheels should always be supported such that
the tyres are only just clear of the ground.
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” at the top of the
tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of forward B
travel.
Front wheel drive tractors have fixed axle

assemblies. However the track width is fully
adjustable by changing the wheel rim relative to the
centre disc, the rim and/or disc relative to the axle
hub or by inter-changing both front wheels. (The C
track width is the distance between the centre of
each tyre at ground level).
The sectioned drawings shown illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings. The track widths available are as
follows: D
Track Settings
Adjustable Rim (Types 1 and 2)
Setting Track Width E

A 1552 mm (61.1 in.)
B 1664 mm (65.5 in.)
C 1758 mm (69.2 in.)
D 1869 mm (73.6 in.)
E 1952 mm (76.9 in.)
F
F 2064 mm (81.3 in.)
G 2158 mm (85.0 in.)
H 2269 mm (89.3 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 209, are nominal

and may vary by up to 25 mm (1 in.) dependent upon G
tyre size.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals. Owners should
ensure that all steering components are maintained H
in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe
operation and comply with legal requirements.
209
3--130

Track Setting -- 50 Km/h Models
Tractors equipped with a 50 Km/h (31 MPH)

transmission will have fixed front wheels offering a
choice of two track settings. To alter the track width, A
interchange both front wheels to provide a narrow (A)
or wide (B) track setting as required.
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tread at the
top of the tyre remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
B
210
Track Settings
4WD Front axle type -- Position All Models

Standard -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Suspended -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
SuperSteer -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Refitting the Front Wheels
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts

to the following torques then re-check after driving
the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 8
hours operation and, thereafter, at the 50 hour
service intervals:
Disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf.ft.)

Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with front fenders,

ensure there is adequate clearance under all
operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops and
or fender position, as necessary.
IMPORTANT: At the narrower track settings a foul

condition may occur between the tyre or fender and
the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full lock
position particularly when the axle is fully articulated.
To avoid this condition, adjust the fenders and/or
steering stops.
3--131

STEERING STOPS
Two steering stops are incorporated in the axle, one

at each end. The stops are adjustable and should be
set to provide a minimum clearance of 20 mm (0.75
in.) between the tyres and any part of the tractor on
full left and right lock with the axle fully articulated.
To adjust, slacken the locknut (1) and turn the stop

bolt (2) anti-clockwise to reduce the steering angle of
the wheels or clockwise to increase the steering
angle. Tighten the locknut to 150 Nm (110 lbf. ft.).
NOTE: After adjusting both steering stops, ensure 211

that there is adequate clearance between the tyres
and any part of the tractor with the axle fully
articulated.
FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION STOPS

Axle oscillation stops are installed, one each side of
the axle. Each stop consists of a plate (1), secured
to the underside of the front axle support by two flush
fitting, socket head screws. Oscillation of the axle
causes the stop plate to contact the projection (2) on
the axle casing, so preventing further movement.
With the stop plates in position, as shown, axle
oscillation is 8°.
Extract the screws and remove the stop plates to
increase axle oscillation to 12°.
NOTE: If the oscillation stops are removed, ensure

212
that there is adequate clearance between the front
tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle fully
articulated.
3--132

FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
After resetting the track width, the front wheel

alignment may require adjustment. For correct
operation, the front wheels should be parallel.
Measure the distance (1) between the wheel rims at

hub height at the front of the wheels. Rotate both
front wheels 180° and check the measurements
again, this time at the rear of the wheels (2). This will
eliminate wheel rim run--out errors.
The correct setting is 0 +/ -- 3.0 mm (0+/ -- 0.12 in.), i.e.

the measurement taken at the front of the rims
should be the same as the rear or not differ by more
than 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
Should it be necessary to adjust the front wheel

alignment, proceed as follows:
213
Remove and discard the self-locking nut (2) on the
left--hand end of the track control rod and extract the
track rod end (1).
Loosen the lock nut (3) and screw the track rod end
into or out of the track rod to shorten or lengthen the
assembly, as required.
Re-insert the track rod end and, when the alignment

is correct, secure with a new self-locking nut.
Tighten the nuts to the following torques:
Model Self--locking Locknut 214

nut (2) (3)
All 118Nm 196Nm

(87 lbf. ft.) (145 lbf. ft.)
3--133

REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

1
Your tractor may be fitted with a fixed flange type or
bar type rear axle. With a fixed flange type axle rear
wheel track adjustment is effected by changing the
wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or
the disc relative to the axle hub or by inter--changing
the rear wheels.
With bar axles, the same method of adjustment

applies but with the added advantage of being able
to move the wheel hub on the axle shaft. This
provides an infinite range of adjustment between the
narrowest and widest settings. 215
2
CAUTION
CAUTION 216
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and 3
cause injury.
NOTE: There are four different designs of centre

disc dependent upon tyre size and tractor model.
The centre discs shown are as follows:
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1)

Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2)
Cast centre disc -- variable track (Type 3)
Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 4) 217
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 and 3), are 4
not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track

setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and
Figure 219 to see the wheel rim and disc positions
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
WARNING
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals.
218
3--134

The sectioned drawings shown, illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings.
IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and A

right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the
tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of forward
travel.
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
to the following torques then re--check after driving
the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and B
again after 8 hours operation and thereafter at the 50
hour service intervals:
FLANGE AXLE
Disc to hub fixings
8 Stud/nuts x M18 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
C
Disc to rim fixings
Rim nuts x M16 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Track Settings
Adjustable Rim (Types 1, 2 and 3)
Track Disc types 1, 2 and 3

D
setting Figures 215, 216 and 217
Figure 219
A 1530 mm (60.2 in.)
B 1632 mm (64.2 in.)
C 1712 mm (67.4 in.)
D 1834 mm (72.2 in.) E
E 1930 mm (75.9 in.)
F 2032 mm (80.0 in.)
G 2130 mm (83.8 in.)
H 2232 mm (87.8 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 219 are nominal F

and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel
and tyre size.
NOTE: With the larger tyre sizes, the narrower track

settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyres and fenders or equipment.
The dimensions shown in the chart relating to G
Figure 219 are nominal and should be used as a
guide only. Track settings may vary dependent
upon wheel type and tyre size.
Fixed Rim (Type 4)
A minimal track adjustment of approximately 102mm H

(4.0in.) each side, may be achieved by interchanging
wheel assemblies.
219
3--135

BAR AXLE
(where fitted)
CAUTION
INTRODUCTION
Tractors equipped with a bar axle may have a steel

or cast centre disc (2) Figure 220 mounted on a cast
iron hub (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle (1).
With a cast centre disc, the hub is an integral part of
the disc.
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 or 3), are not

available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
Three bar axle lengths are available -- 2490 mm (98

in.), 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.). The
wheel may be moved along the bar to provide a range 220
of track widths. Depending on tyre size, a range of
190 mm (7.5 in.) per wheel or 380 mm (15 in.) overall
is available with the 98 inch axle. If the 112 inch axle
is installed, the range is increased to 735 mm (29 in.)
and with the 119 inch axle, 914 mm (36 in.) overall.
Track width adjustment is effected by moving the

complete wheel/hub assemblies in or out on the axle
shaft. Additionally, repositioning the wheel rim on the
centre disc and/or the rim on the axle hub or by
inter-changing the rear wheels provides a greater
range of adjustment.
Tractor wheels are very heavy so it is recommended

that you do not remove them to reposition the rims
on the disc unless the track setting required is
outside the slide range of the bar axle.
3--136

MOVING A WHEEL ON THE AXLE SHAFT

Block the front wheels and jack up and support the
rear axle.
Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by sliding
the complete wheel/hub assembly on the axle shaft.
Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1)Figure 221,

approximately 12 mm (0.5 in.). Remove the four
outer wedge bolts (2).
Clean the threads on the four bolts and the threaded

holes in the wedges before lubricating and installing
the removed bolts at (1) Figure 222. These bolts are
used to push against the wheel or hub to withdraw or
’jack’ the wedges from the hub. Tighten these bolts
evenly until the wedges loosen in the hub and the
wheel assembly can be moved on the axle shaft.
WARNING
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and 221
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than

407Nm (300 lbf.ft)) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft
and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.

Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the 222
original holes (2) Figure 221.
3--137

Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments of

68 Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until the final torque setting is
achieved.
6 x M20 Bolts (Cast centre) 300Nm (221 ft.lbs.)

6 x M22 Bolts Steel centre) 500Nm (369 ft.lbs)
IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened

evenly.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making
sure that both rear wheels are the same distance
from the ends of the axle shafts.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts

on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200 m
(200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation and
thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.
3--138

WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
The sectioned drawings shown in Figures 223, 224 and 225 illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions at various
track settings. In each table, two track width settings are quoted for each axle type. These are the minimum and
maximum achievable with both wheel assemblies moved fully in (toward the tractor) and fully out (away from
the tractor).
Track Adjustment Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1828 mm (60 -- 72 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2184 mm (60 -- 86 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2388 mm (60 -- 94 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1727 -- 2032 mm (68 -- 80 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1727 -- 2388 mm (68 -- 94 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1727 -- 2590 mm (68 -- 102 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2235 mm (76 -- 88 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2540 mm (76 -- 100 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2744 mm (76 -- 108 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

2133 -- 2438 mm (84 -- 96 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

2133 -- 2794 mm (84 -- 110 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

2133 -- 2998 mm (84 -- 118 in.)
223
Wheels with steel centre disc bolted to flange on the rim
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 223 are
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. wheel and tyre size.
3--139

2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2438mm (60 -- 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.)
224
Wheels with steel centre disc welded to flange on the rim
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be

possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender.
NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 223 are

nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on
wheel and tyre size.
Rear Wheel Hardware Torque Values

(with Steel Centre disc)
Disc to Hub Fixings

10 x M22 Bolt 500Nm ( 369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Nuts

All wheels (M16) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts

6 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft)
3--140

2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2438 mm (60 -- 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.)
225
Wheels with cast centre disc
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 225 are nominal WARNING

and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
and tyre size. disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
to the following torques then re--check after driving
IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 8
right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” at the hours operation and thereafter at the 50 hour service
top of the tyre tread remains pointing in the direction intervals.
of forward travel.
Wheel Hardware Torque Values
CAUTION (with Cast Centre disc)
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and Disc to Rim Nuts
cause injury. All wheels (M16 nuts) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts

6 x M20 Bolt 300 Nm (221 lbf.ft)
3--141

226
DUAL REAR WHEELS

(where fitted)
Dual rear wheels are available as a factory installed Figure 226 shows a typical wheel installation. The
option or dealer installed accessory, in conjunction inner (cast) wheel (4) is clamped onto the bar axle
with the 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.) bar (5). The outer (steel) wheel (1) is attached to the hub
axles equipped with cast iron or steel wheels. The by eight bolts (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle
dual wheel kit consists of an additional pair of steel by the four bolts (2) in a similar manner to the cast,
wheels, hubs and wheel-to-hub attaching hardware. inner wheel.
Customers may wish to mount their existing wheels When mounting wheels, the clearance between the
to make a dual wheel installation. In this instance, tyres on the inner wheels and the closest part of the
provided that the existing wheels have the same tractor must be no less than 100 mm (4 in.).
mounting dimensions, they will only need to obtain
the hub assembly. Additionally, a minimum clearance of 100 mm (4 in.)
must be maintained between the closest points of the
IMPORTANT: Dual wheels are intended for flotation. tyre walls. The clearance should be checked with the
Use of dual wheels under heavy traction tractor correctly ballasted and the attached
conditions could cause severe transmission implement in the raised position.
overload and is not approved.
Before the outer wheels can be installed, the inner

wheels must be adjusted to the minimum attainable
track width, as described in the previous text.
3--142

Moving the Outer Wheel on the Axle Shaft
Each wedge is retained in the hub by two M22 bolts

which pass through the hub and screw into the
wedge on the inside of the wheel. To loosen the
wedges, remove the bolts from their clamp position
(1) and replace in the threaded holes (2). Tighten the
bolts evenly until the wedges are loosened enough
to allow the wheel to be moved on the axle shaft.
After moving the wheel, replace the bolts in their
original positions (1) and re--tighten to clamp the
wheel to the axle shaft.
Tighten all wedge retaining bolts in increments of 227

68Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until a final torque of 500Nm (369
lbf.ft.) is achieved.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making
sure that both wheels are the same distance from the
outer ends of the axle shaft.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts

on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200m
(200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation and
thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.
(112 and 119 in. Axle)

Disc to Hub Fixings
10 x M22 Bolt 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts
4 x M22 Bolt 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Bolts
All wheels (M16 nuts) 250Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407

Nm (300 ft.-lbs.) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft
and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
3--143

BALLASTING AND TYRES
GENERAL Factors Affecting Tyre Performance
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon • Correct air pressure for the load
proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum
efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is • Correct wheel slip
correct for the application.
• Correct tyre size for expected load
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to
support the weight of the tractor and equipment and
• Correct fill of liquid ballast
must also be able to provide adequate traction to
utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful
drawbar horsepower. • Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on
a given axle.
Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre
to carry the load. Do not over inflate tyres. Selecting Ballast
NOTE: Radial tyres will work with lower air pressures When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum
and will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or bulge weight of the tractor will change. This means that
when correctly inflated. ballast may have to be added or removed to maintain
the best tractor performance. Proper ballast will
greatly improve tractor operation and ride.
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
The amount of ballast required is affected by:
IMPORTANT: On tractors fitted with front axle
suspension, correct ballasting is essential to
optimise suspension operation, particularly when • Weight of tractor
using heavy rear mounted equipment. For this
application, sufficient front ballast must be added by • Soil and traction conditions
the use of wafer weights in preference to liquid
ballast in the tyres • Type of implement: fully-mounted, semi-
In certain conditions, with insufficient front weight mounted or trailed
added, suspension operation may become disabled
and error code L7 displayed. Stop the tractor, switch • Working speed
off the engine and restart again to clear the error
code and re--enable the suspension. If the error code
re--occurs, then further front weight should be added • Tractor horsepower load
ensuring maximum axle and vehicle weights are not
exceeded. • Type and size of tyres
• Tyre pressures
Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast

should be removed when it is not required.
3--144

Too little ballast: For optimum performance and efficiency, two wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so that
• Rough ride approximately one third of the total tractor weight
(less implement) is on the front wheels. Four wheel
• Excessive wheel slip drive tractors should be ballasted so the weight on
the front wheels is approximately 40 -- 45% of the
• Power loss total tractor weight.
• Tyre wear Add additional front end ballast, as required, for

stability during operation and transport. Ballasting of
• Excessive fuel consumption the front end may not always provide adequate
stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on
• Lower productivity rough terrain. Reduce tractor speed and exercise
caution under these conditions.
Too much ballast:
• Higher maintenance costs When using front mounted implements it may be

necessary to add weight to the rear wheels to
• Increased driveline wear maintain traction and stability.
• Power loss Ballast Limitations
• Increased soil compaction Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or

tractor capacity. Each tyre has a recommended
• Excessive fuel consumption carrying capacity which should not be exceeded,
(see page 3--152).
• Lower productivity
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction,
For maximum performance in heavy draft conditions larger tyres should be used.
weight should be added to the tractor in the form of
liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a combination of
both. Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weights
or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tyres.
Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended because
Front end ballast may be required for stability and they can easily be removed when not needed.
steering control when weight is transferred from the
front to the rear wheels as rear mounted implement
is raised by the tractor 3--point hitch. IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross
vehicle weight shown on the following page. This can
cause an overload condition that may invalidate the
When a rear mounted implement is raised to the warranty and may exceed the load rating of the tyres.
transport position, the weight on the front wheels The maximum recommended gross vehicle weight is
should be at least 20% of total tractor weight. the weight of the tractor plus ballast plus any
mounted equipment such as sprayers, tanks etc. in
CAUTION the raised position. See the following tables:
Additional front ballast may be needed when
transporting large 3-point mounted equipment.
Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter
how much front ballast is used.
3--145

Maximum Vehicle Weights and Axle Loads
Gross Vehicle Weight 4WD Front Axle
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight Maximum Front Axle Loading --

4WD and SuperSteer Models#
kg lb
(Continuous Operation)
All Models 12000 26455
kg lb
IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some countries
may impose lower gross vehicle weight limits for road
transport than the figures quoted in the above table. # Includes a front end loader in the raised position but
with no load in the bucket.
Individual axles (front and rear) are also subject to
weight limitations, as follows: IMPORTANT: For four wheel drive vehicles, the
figures shown in the foregoing table are for
Rear Axle continuous operation. For intermittent operation, the
front axle loading (including loaded loader bucket)
may be increased to the following levels, provided
Maximum Rear Axle Loading that ground speed does not exceed 8 km/h (5 MPH)
kg lb and the track width settings are maintained within the
limits shown:
Maximum Front Axle Loading -- 4WD

NOTE: Total rear axle weight is measured with only
(Restricted Operation)*
the rear wheels on the scales inclusive of liquid and
cast iron ballast and with mounted equipment in the Track Setting
raised position. kg lb mm in
All
2WD Front Axle 8000 17636 1727 -- 2032 68 -- 80
Models
Maximum Front Axle Loading -- *Maximum track width 1829 mm (72.0in.).

2WD# (Continuous Operation)
kg lb
# Includes a front end loader in the raised position but

with no load in the bucket.
3--146

CAST IRON WEIGHTS

(where fitted)
Rear Wheel Weights
Up to three cast iron weights (1) may be added to

each rear wheel, as follows:
Max. Weight per Total Weight per

Wheel Axle
All Models 1 x 227 kg (500 lb) 454 kg (1000 lb)
IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to fit rear 228

wheel weights on tractors operating at speeds in
excess of 40 k/mh (25 MPH).
Front Weights
45 kg (99 lb.) wafer weights are available as a set of

10 or 22, mounted on a substantial cast iron carrier.
The maximum recommended front ballast weight is

as follows:
Front Axle Weight Total
Carrier
Type Pack Weight
10 x 45 kg 125 kg 575 kg
2WD/4WD
10 x 99 lb 275 lb 1265 lb
All 4WD 22 x 45 kg 125 kg 1115 kg
(except 229
SuperSteer) 22 x 99 lb 275 lb 2453 lb
4WD 10 x 45 kg 122 kg 572 kg

SuperSteer 10 x 99 lb 268 lb 1261 lb
4WD 22 x 45 kg 122 kg 569 kg

SuperSteer 22 x 99 lb 268 lb 2446 lb
In addition to the wafer weights, a 450 kg (992 lb.)

chassis weight may be fitted below the front of the
tractor behind the wafer weights. The chassis weight
is not compatible with SuperSteer models.
IMPORTANT: Before adding front weight see

reference to front axle suspension on page 3--144.
230
3--147

IMPORTANT: A set of 22 weights should not be

installed on two wheel drive tractors as the front tyre
capacity will be exceeded.
The weights are clamped together by means of the

long through bolts (1) and (3) and secured to the
carrier by the clamp bolts (2).
The weights may be removed as a complete set with

the aid of suitable lifting gear. Loosen the clamp bolts
(2) and slide the clamp assembly sideways out of the
weight pack. With a lifting bar passed through the
central hole in the weights, the complete weight set
may now be lifted off the carrier.
Alternatively, the weights can be removed

individually after loosening the clamp bolts and
removing all four through bolts (1) and (3). 231
CAUTION
The tractor must not be operated unless all four
through bolts and the clamp bolts are in position with
the bolts tightened to 125 lbf.ft. (169 Nm). Recheck
the bolt torques after 50 hours of operation if the bolts
have been disturbed for any reason.
A towing facility is built into the weight carrier.

However, if the weights are installed a tow pin (1) is
available that clamps onto the front of the weight
pack.
Front tow hook adds 8.5 kg to the total weight
232
Where front weights are not required, a tow pin (1) is
available for bolting directly to the front axle support.
233
3--148

LIQUID BALLAST
Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a

convenient method of adding weight. A solution of
calcium chloride and water is recommended. This
gives a low freezing point and provides a higher
density than plain water.
IMPORTANT: In some countries it is illegal to use

calcium chloride as a ballast solution for tyres.
Ensure that you comply with the legal requirements
of your country. Use cast iron weights as an
alternative to liquid ballast.
NOTE: When filling a tyre with calcium
chloride/water solution the valve should be at the
highest point on the wheel. The valve should be at
the lowest point when checking or adjusting air
pressure if the tyre contains liquid ballast. Special
equipment is required to water ballast tyres. See
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for details.
The following tables show the quantity of calcium

chloride and water required for each tyre size option
and is based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride per litre of
water. The figures in the table will give a 75% fill of
the tyre. This calcium chloride/water solution will give
protection from freezing down to an ambient
temperature of --50°C (--58°F).
WARNING
When mixing the ballast solution it is imperative the
calcium chloride flakes are added to the water and
the solution stirred until the calcium chloride is
dissolved.
Never add water to calcium chloride as considerable
heat is generated. If the flakes should contact the
eyes, wash the eyes immediately with clean, cold
water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a doctor as soon
as possible.
NOTE: Liquid ballasting of front tyres on a 2WD

installation is not recommended.
3--149

Front Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
16.9R -- 28 219 131 350 58 290 774
480/70R -- 28 222 133 355 59 294 785
540/65R -- 28 257 154 411 68 340 907
600/65R -- 28 344 206 550 91 454 1213
14.9R -- 30 174 104 278 46 231 616
16.9R -- 30 230 138 368 61 304 812
480/70R -- 30 234 140 374 62 309 825
540/65R -- 30 273 163 436 72 361 965
600/60R -- 30 309 185 494 82 409 1092
14.9 -- 34 193 115 308 51 255 680
320/85R -- 34 136 81 217 36 180 481
380/85R -- 34 188 112 300 50 248 663
420/85R -- 34 270 162 432 71 357 952
320/85R -- 38 116 69 185 31 154 411
Rear Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
20.8R -- 38 429 257 686 113 567 1513
580/70R -- 38 467 280 747 124 617 1648
650/65R -- 38 510 306 816 135 674 1800
650/75R -- 38 591 354 945 156 781 2285
710/70R -- 38 648 388 1036 171 856 2174
18.4R -- 42 352 211 563 93 465 1241
20.8R -- 42 453 271 724 120 599 1599
580/70R -- 42 420 252 672 111 555 1481
620/70R -- 42 496 297 793 131 655 1749
650/65R -- 42 526 315 841 139 694 1853
710/60R -- 42 577 346 923 153 763 2036
14.9R -- 46 245 147 392 65 324 865
420/80R -- 46 244 146 390 65 323 862
480/80R -- 46 359 215 574 95 474 1265
520/85R -- 46 439 263 702 116 580 1548
18.4R -- 46 395 237 632 104 522 1393
320/90R -- 50 153 91 244 40 202 539
320/90R -- 54 162 97 259 43 214 571
3--150

TYRE INFLATION
Upon receiving your tractor, check the air pressure • Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or
in the tyres and re--check every 50 hours or weekly. seriously under-inflated until it has been
The tyres fitted to your tractor may be of the tubed or inspected for damage by a qualified person.
tubeless type.
• Torque wheel to axle nuts to specification after
re--installing the wheel. Check nut tightness daily
When checking tyre pressures, inspect the tyres for
until torque stabilises.
damaged tread and side walls. Neglected damage
will lead to early tyre failure. • Refer to tractor weighting section before adding
ballast to the tyres.
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that
a tyre may carry. • Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.
• Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift your

Do not exceed the recommended load for the tyre tractor.
pressures in use, see the following page for details.
Do not over or under inflate the tyres. • Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to
support the tractor while repairing tyres.
DANGER • Do not put any part of your body under the tractor
Inflating or servicing tyres can be dangerous. or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.
Whenever possible, trained personnel should be
called in to service or install tyres. In any event, to • Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow
the safety precautions below: • Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or
damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or
use a damaged rim.
• Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road or • Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on
highway. the tractor or is secured so that it will not move
if the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
• Do not inflate steering tyres above the
manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on • When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip--on
the tyre or beyond the maximum shown in the valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows
Tyre Pressure and Load tables if the tyre is not the operator to stand clear of the tyre while
marked with the maximum pressure. inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.
3--151

TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

(Radial tyres) 1
Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load Index

and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating 141 A8 138
commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 234 B
shows typical markings to be found on the side wall
2 3
of radial ply tyres.
NOTE: Radial tyres will have a speed symbol of ‘A8’ MAX LOAD AT 40 KM/H
4 2575 KGS AT 1.6 BAR
and/or ’B’ which identifies the maximum speed rating
for that tyre. Tyres marked with the A8 symbol are REPLACES 10 P.R. 5
suitable for speeds up to 40km/h (25 MPH), those
marked with a ’B’ symbol may be operated at speeds
of 50k/mh (31 MPH). 234
The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre is 1. Load Index
dependent upon the Load Index shown on the side 2. Speed Symbol for 40 km/h (25 MPH)
wall. In the following charts the loads given are for 3. Speed Symbol for 50 km/h (31 MPH)
individual tyres operated at speeds up to 40 or 50 km/h 4. Maximum load/inflation pressure at
40 km/h (25MPH)
(25 or 31 MPH). The two right--hand columns indicate 5. Old ply rating mark
the maximum permissible load per tyre at speeds of
40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH).
WARNING
When operating at high road speeds, tyre pressures
and maximum load capacities advised by the tyre
manufacturer should be strictly adhered to. Consult
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for the correct
pressures and loads for the tyres fitted to your
tractor.
Inflation Pressure -- bar

Tyre Load 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 40 50
Size Index
Inde k/mh k/mh
Load Capacity per TYRE (kg) -- 30k/mh
153A8 - - - - 2210 2410 2460 2865 3140 3350 3350 -

20 8R x 38
20.8R (150B) - - - - 2430 2650 2900 3150 3450 3650 3650
155A8 3095 3355 3615 3875 - - - - - - 3875 -

580/70R38 (155B) 3095 3355 3615 3875 - - - - - - 3875
169A8 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200 -

650/75R38 (169B) 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200
171A8 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150 -
710/70R38 (171B) 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150
155A8 - - - - 2275 2550 2800 3050 3320 3550 3550 -

20 8R x 42
20.8R (152B) - - - - 2500 2800 3075 3350 3650 3875 3875
158A8 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250 -

18 4R x 46
18.4R (158B) 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
3--152

Inflation Pressure -- lbf/in2

Tyre Load 15 17 20 23 26 29 31 35 37 40 25 31
Size Index MPH MPH
Load Capacity per TYRE (lbs.) -- 18.6 MPH
153A8 - - - - 4872 5313 5423 6316 6922 7385 7385 -

20 8R x 38
20.8R (150B) - - - - 5357 5842 6393 6944 7605 8046 8046
155A8 6823 7396 7969 8542 - - - - - - 8542 -

580/70R38 (155B) 6823 7396 7969 8542 - - - - - - 8542
169A8 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 - - 13668 -

650/75R38 (169B) 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 - - 13668
171A8 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 - - 13558 -
710/70R38 (171B) 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 - - 13558
155A8 - - - - 5015 5621 6172 6723 7319 7826 7826 -

20 8R x 42
20.8R (152B) - - - - 5511 6172 6779 7385 8046 8542 8542
158A8 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369 -

18 4R x 46
18.4R (158B) 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
SYMBOL MARKED RADIAL TYRES

(North America Only)
Conventional sized radial agricultural tractor drive

tyres are marked with *, **,or *** symbols. The
maximum load rating for tyres marked with a * is
calculated at 18 psi inflation pressure. Tyres marked
with ** or *** have maximum load carrying capacities
at pressures of 24 psi and 30 psi respectively.
For information regarding specific inflation pressures

and load carrying capacities for the tyres fitted to
your tractor, consult your authorised dealer. 235
1. Load symbol
2. Maximum recommended load at marked pressure
3. Maximum load at 20 MPH
4. Previous ply ratings
3--153

NOTES
3--154

SECTION 4
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION WARNING SYMBOLS
This section gives full details of the service A number of maintenance items are represented by
procedures necessary to maintain your tractor at symbols that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display.
peak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenance For more information see page 2--63.
chart on page 4--10 provides a ready reference to
these requirements, each operation being numbered CONTENTS
for easy reference.
The subjects covered in this section are as listed
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS below. A full index is provided at the back of this book.
Read and observe all safety precautions listed in Page Subject

‘Servicing the Tractor’ in the Introduction section at
the front of this Manual.
Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly. Guard removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
Lubrication and maintenance chart . . . . . . . . . 4--10
CAUTION Lubricants and coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--8
Do not check, lubricate, service or make adjustments
to the tractor with the engine running. When the warning symbol appears . . . . . . . . 4--11
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--15
DURING THE FIRST 50 HOURS OPERATION 50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17

100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--28
In addition to the regular maintenance operations 300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--29
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or
daily during the first 50 hours of operation: 600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--33
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--40
• Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--46
• Wheel nuts for tightness Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--54
General maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . 4--55
• Front axle hub oil levels
Cleaning the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--71
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, Protecting Electronic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--72
where applicable, extend all cylinders before
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--73
checking oil levels. With some wheel equipment
fitted, it may be necessary to raise the front or rear
of the tractor to ensure it is level before checking the
oil.
4--1

SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
THE FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the service The chart on page 4--10 lists the intervals when
operations are carried out by your authorised dealer. routine checks, lubrication, service and/or
The items are listed in the ‘First 50-Hour Service’ adjustments should be performed. Use the chart as
checklist in Section 8. a quick reference guide when servicing the tractor.
The operations follow the chart.
Both 50 Hour Service sheets should be signed by
yourself and your dealer and one copy retained by FUELLING THE TRACTOR
the dealer for their records (Dealer’s copy).
CAUTION
IMPORTANT: Items listed in the first 50-hour check When handling diesel fuel, observe the following:
are important. If not performed, early component
failure and reduced tractor life may result. Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no
circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or
PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be
added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or
To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters, explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel
etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do
and drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal. not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not
Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil approved due to possible inadequate lubrication of
contained within them is clean, has not degenerated the fuel injection system.
due to long storage and is of the correct grade.
• Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess • Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce
grease from the fitting after greasing. overnight condensation.
• Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine

FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS running.
The intervals listed in the lubrication and • Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the
maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when fuel tank.
operating in normal working conditions.
• Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for
expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost,
Adjust the intervals for environmental and working replace it with a genuine original equipment
conditions. Intervals should be shortened under cap and tighten securely.
adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty)
working conditions.
• Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
ENGINE FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT: The fuel injectors on your tractor are

electronically controlled and do not require periodic
servicing or adjustment.
4--2

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The quality of fuel used is an important factor for For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel
dependable performance and satisfactory engine whenever temperatures allow.
life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and
non-corrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below
fuel of a known quality from a reputable supplier. --7° C (20° F). The cold temperatures will cause the
fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from
Use Number 2-D in temperatures above --7° C (20° F). running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)
Use Number 1-D in temperatures below --7° C (20° F). To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties,
enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier
wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the as well as the fuel user.
application and property requirements outlined in the
following ‘Diesel Fuel Selection Chart’. FUEL STORAGE
DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART Take the following precautions to ensure that stored
fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
General Final Cetane Sulphur • Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized
Fuel Boiling Rating Content tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel
Classification Point (max) (min) (max) and form compounds that will contaminate the
288° C injection pump and injectors.
No. 1-D 40* 0.3%
(550° F)
357° C • Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
No. 2-D 40 0.5% sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
(675° F)
the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather
conditions below 0°C (32°F) are encountered or • To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,
when continuously operating at an altitude above provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
5,000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel. opposite the outlet pipe.
*When continually operating at low temperatures or • If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
required. filler neck when refuelling.
Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5% • Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the are not held over and used in winter.
maintenance schedule.
The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above

1.3% is not recommended.
4--3

FILLING THE FUEL TANK
1. Clean the area around the fuel cap (1) to prevent

dirt from entering tank and contaminating the
fuel.
2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area during

refuelling. The cap is attached to the fuel tank by
a chain to prevent loss.
3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel

cap.
NOTE: The right-hand tank is filled via the filler on the

left-hand tank. 1
Fuel filler cap

The fuel filler cap on your tractor is of the vented type,
should it become lost or damaged always replace it
with one of the same type. Consult your authorised
dealer.
Fuel Capacity
Left tank 330 litres (87.1 U.S. galls)
Right tank 110 litres (29.0 U.S. galls)
4--4

PROTECTIVE GUARDS
CAUTION
Guards are fitted for your protection, if they are
removed for access to service items, they must be
replaced before operating the tractor.
ENGINE HOOD
For safety the hood must be closed and correctly

latched before operating the tractor.
The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access

to the engine area for routine maintenance. Two gas
struts (located under the hood) assist in raising the 2
hood to either of two positions. A safety stay holds
the hood in the selected position.
To open the hood, depress the release button (2),

and raise the hood using the grab handle (1). The gas
struts will take over and raise the hood to the first
position secured by the nylon retaining strap located
at the front of the hood. All routine maintenance
operations may be performed with the hood raised to
this position.
Additional guards are provided to prevent the fingers

being trapped by the fan/air conditioner drive belt
when the hood is lowered to the operating position.
Should it become necessary to raise the hood to its

full extent, unclip the retaining strap (1) from its
anchor bracket and, holding firmly onto the strap,
allow the hood to raise fully on the gas struts.
NOTE: Raising the hood to full height is only

necessary for service requirements that are best left
to your dealer.
To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the

retaining strap has been re--fitted to the anchor
bracket. An audible click will signal engagement of
the locking catch. Check that the hood is properly
closed. 3
4--5

Engine Side Panels
The engine side panels are secured by two turn lock

screws (1). Using a screwdriver with a broad blade,
turn the screws 1/4 turn anti--clockwise to release.
Hold the panel at the centre, pull outwards and slide
towards the front of the tractor until it clears the front
and rear support pins.
To refit the side panels, reverse the above procedure

ensuring both screws are locked before operating
the tractor.
RIGHT--HAND FOOTSTEPS
The right--hand footsteps on your tractor are

mounted on a hinged support bracket.
For improved access to the hydraulic oil filter(s),

battery, etc., the footsteps can be quickly lowered by
releasing the two locking catches (1).
To release the catches, lift and rotate to the

horizontal position.
Pull the steps outward from the top and allow to drop
downwards until fully lowered. 5
When raising the steps to the working position,

ensure both catches are securely locked.
4--6

RELAY AND FUSE PANEL COVER
The moulded panel on the right hand side of the cab

may be easily removed for service. Remove the four
screws (1) and remove the panel to gain access to
the relays and connectors.
Fuse Box Cover
To gain access to the fuses , undo the two retaining

screws (1) from the panel on the right--hand side of
the cab.
Maxi Fuse Box
The maxi fuses are mounted on the battery support

frame. To access the fuses, lower the right--hand
footsteps and release the battery cover by turning
the locking catch (1) anti--clockwise. Lift the cover
from the two guide pins that retain and support the
rear of the cover.
When replacing the battery cover ensure the two

slots at the rear of the cover engage with the support
lugs on the carrier frame.
4--7

LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS --30 °C --25 °C --15 °C +20 °C +40 °C

Lubricants
The correct engine oil viscosity grade is dependent SAE 5W--30

upon ambient temperature. Refer to the chart on the
right when selecting oil for your tractor engine.
SAE 10W--30
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme
temperatures are encountered, local lubricant
practices are acceptable; such as the use of SAE
SAE 15W--40
5W30 in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in
extreme high temperatures.
--22 °F --13 °F +5 °F +68 °F +104 °F
Sulphur in Fuel
The engine oil and filter change period are shown in

section 4. However, locally available fuel may have
a high sulphur content, in which case the engine oil
and filter change period should be adjusted as
follows:--
Sulphur Content % Oil Change Period
Below 0.5 Normal
From 0.5 -- 1.0 Half the normal
Above 1.0 One quarter normal.
NOTE:Theuseof fuelwithasulphurcontent above
1.3% is not recommended.
Coolants
To reduce the amount of deposits and corrosion, the

water used in the cooling system must comply with
the following values.
Total Hardness: Chloride: Sulphate:

300 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
IMPORTANT: See Operation 30, page 4--46,

regarding use of coolant inhibitor where the above
mentioned antifreeze is not available. In those hot
countries where antifreeze is not available, use clean
water only.
NOTE: See Operation 30, page 4--46, for further

details before topping up or changing the engine
coolant.
4--8

LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND New Holland International Approximate

APPLICATIONS Specification Specification Quantities
Engine Oil ACEA E7/E5
Ambra Mastergold HSP (15W--40) NH 330 H API CI--4CH--4
15 Litres (3.96 U.S. gals.)
Ambra Mastergold HSP (10W--30) NH 324 H CUMMINS
CES20078/77/76/72
Transmission, Rear Axle and
Hydraulic System Oil
NH 410 B API GL4, ISO 32/46
Ambra Multi G (10W30)
-- Power Command (All models) 100 Litres (26.4 U.S. gal)
Front Wheel Drive Oil
Ambra Multi G (10W30)
-- Axle (All models) NH 410 B API GL4, ISO 32/46 14 Litres (14.8 U.S. qts.)
-- Hubs (w/out brakes, per hub) 2.15 Litres (2.3 U.S. qts.)
-- Hubs (with brakes, per hub)
Front P.T.O. Gearbox Oil
Ambra Multi G (10W30) NH 410B API GL4, ISO 32/46 As Required
Engine Radiator Coolant
System Capacity 26 Litres (6.9 U.S. gal.)
*Water 50%
Ambra Agriflu NH 900 A Ethylene Glycol 50%
Air Conditioning Compressor Oil
Low Viscosity Oil SP10 n/a PAG--E13, ISO100 Viscosity As Required
Brake / Clutch Fluid
Ambra LHM Brake NH 610 A ISO 7308 As Required
Grease Fittings and Bearings
Ambra GR9 NH 710 A NLGI 2 As Required
*NOTE Use antifreeze (50%) plus clean, soft water (50%). In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water used
in the cooling system should not exceed the following limits:
4--9

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
C C L C A D
Service Operation h l u h d r Page
Interval No. Maintenance Requirement e e b a j a
c a e n u i No.
k n g s n
e t
When a warning 1 Engine air cleaner outer element X X 4--11

symbol
b l appears 2 Fuel filter/water separator X X 4--13
3 Engine coolant level X X 4--14
Every 10 hours or 4 Engine oil level X X 4--15
d il
daily 5 Windscreen washer reservoir fluid level (where fitted) X X 4--16
6 Air reservoir(s) (air operated trailer brakes) X 4--16
7 Radiator, intercooler, oil cooler and air conditioner condenser X X 4--17
8 Cab air filters X 4--18
Everyy 50 hours 9 All grease fittings X 4--20
10 Front and rear wheel nut torque X X 4--26
11 Tyre pressures and condition X X 4--27
Every 100 hours 12 Air brake compressor drive belts (where fitted) X 4--28
14 Poly V--belt X 4--30
13 Battery electrolyte level (tropical climates) X X X 4--29
Everyy 300 hours 15 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level X X 4--31
16 Parking brake X X 4--32
17 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level X X 4--32
*18 Engine oil and filter X 4--33
19 Hydraulic and transmission oil filters X 4--35
20 Engine air cleaner outer element X 4--36
Every 600 hours
21 Engine air intake connections X 4--37
22 Pre--fuel and secondary fuel filter elements X 4--38
23 Four wheel drive front axle and hubs oil level X X 4--39
24 Cab air filters X 4--40
25 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil and filter X 4--41
Every 1200 hours 26 FWD axle differential oil X 4--42
or annually
ll 27 FWD axle hub oil X 4--43
28 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil X 4--43
29 Battery electrolyte level (temperate climates) X X X 4--44
30 Engine coolant X 4--46
31 Engine air cleaner inner element X 4--50
Every 1200 hours
or two years 32 Engine valve tappet clearances X X 4--51
33 Engine breather filter X 4--52
34 Air brake dryer reservoir X 4--53
Every 3 years 35 Air conditioning system X X X 4--54
36 Bleeding the fuel system X X 4--55
37 Transmission calibration X X 4--56
38 Footbrakes X X 4--58
39 Automatic pick-up hitch X X 4--59
40 Remote control valve drain bottle(s) X 4--59
General
maintenance 41 Cab suspension adjustment X X 4--60
42 Headlight and worklamp adjustment X X 4--61
43 Bulb replacement X 4--62
44 Fuse replacement X 4--65
- Cleaning the tractor x x 4--71
- Storing the tractor x x x 4--73
* Oil change interval will be reduced if fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in extremely cold temperatures.
4--10

WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL

APPEARS
OPERATION 1
SERVICE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Service the outer element when the restriction

indicator symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display or
every 600 hours, whichever comes first. If the
symbol appears, perform the service within one hour
of operation.
IMPORTANT: Service the outer element only when

the restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning the filter
too frequently will decrease the service life of the
filter.
9
The dry air cleaner, which is located under the
left-hand side of the hood, consists of an inner and
outer paper element contained within an easily
accessible housing. See Figure 9.
1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 9, and lift

off the air cleaner assembly cover.
2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 10 from the

air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end
of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
10
IMPORTANT: Do not disturb or remove the inner
element.
3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust

is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced. The inner element (1) should
also be replaced at this time.
4. Clean the outer element using either method A

or B, depending on the element’s condition.
11
4--11

Method A
Lightly tap the ends of the element against the palm

of the hand. See Figure 12.
IMPORTANT: Do not tap the element against a hard

surface as this will damage the element.
12
Method B
Use compressed air, not exceeding 2 bar (30 lbf/in2).

Insert the air line nozzle inside the element. Hold the
nozzle 150 mm (6 in.) from the element and blow the
dust from the inside through the element to the
outside. See Figure 13.
WARNING
Wear eye protection and a face mask when carrying
out this operation.
13
5. Examine the element for damage by placing a

light inside the element. See Figure 14. Discard
the element if pin pricks of light can be seen or if
there are areas where the paper appears thin.
6. Check the element material for bunching; the

metal casing for distortion and the rubber gasket
for damage. Discard the filter element if it is
damaged.
7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using

a damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not
damage the inner filter element. Ensure that the
inner end of the housing is clean and smooth, to
ensure a good seating for the rubber seal on the 14
element.
4--12

8. Ensure the inner element (1) is located correctly

in the air cleaner assembly before installing the
outer element. Refit the end cover and securely
latch the three retaining clips.
If the restriction indicator light continues to illuminate

after cleaning the element, the outer or inner element
may need replacing. See operations 20 and 31.
15
OPERATION 2
DRAIN FUEL SYSTEM WATER SEPARATOR
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.
If the symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display, this

signals the presence of water in the fuel sedimenter,
drain the fuel filter and sedimenter assembly, as
follows:
1. Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter

assembly by rotating the collar (1) approximately
180° on the water sensor switch. Contaminated
fuel will drain from the tube (2).
NOTE: To loosen the drain tap (1) it may be 16

necessary to remove the sensor wire from the
terminal to allow the knob to rotate.
2. Allow contaminated fuel to drain until only clean

fuel runs out. Catch the fuel in a suitable
container and dispose of properly. Close the
drain tap.
The fuel system is self bleeding and should not
require priming after draining the sedimenter. If
priming is required, turn to page 4--55 for details on
priming the fuel system.
4--13

EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR

DAILY (whichever occurs first)
OPERATION 3
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the recovery tank (2) when

the engine is cold. The coolant level should be above
the bottom line (3) on the recovery tank. If coolant is
required, remove the cap (1) and add a 50/50 water
and antifreeze mixture as specified on page 4--8 of
this Manual.
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the pressure cap on the coolant
expansion tank. It is dangerous to remove the cap
while the system is hot. When the system has
cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the pressure cap
slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to 17
escape before fully removing the cap. Never remove
the cap from the top of the radiator unless the
expansion tank pressure cap has first been
removed.
CAUTION
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the coolant filter and
antifreeze container.
NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank,

the coolant level must be checked in the radiator.
Check the system for leaks and repair as required.
Remove the radiator filler cap when the system is

cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to just
below the top of the filler neck. Install the cap and add
coolant to the recovery tank, as described above.
4--14

OPERATION 4
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a

level surface and after the engine has been stopped
for a minimum of five minutes.
1. Remove the dipstick from the left-hand side of

the engine, wipe clean and re-insert fully.
2. Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
The oil level should fall between the high and low
level notches on the dipstick.
3. If more oil is required, remove the filler cap and add

fresh oil until the level is between the two notches
on the dipstick. The quantity of oil represented by
theupperandlowernotchesisapproximately4.0 18
litres (4.2 U.S.qts).
NOTE: Do not fill above the upper notch on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower
notch.
4. Re-install the filler cap.
See page 4--8 for the correct oil specification and

viscosity.
4--15

OPERATION 5
CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR
(where fitted)
The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located

beneath the rear of the cab on the left-hand side. The
same reservoir is utilised for both front and rear
windscreen washers.
Lift off the cap (1) and fill with washer solvent solution
up to the bend in the filler neck. In cold weather, use
a solvent with anti-freeze properties.
19
OPERATION 6
DRAIN THE AIR RESERVOIR(S) (Air operated
trailer brakes -- where fitted)
Every 10 hours or daily, whichever occurs first, drain

both air reservoirs. The reservoirs are mounted each
side of the tractor in front of the rear axle. (Rear
wheel has been removed for clarity)
Firmly apply the tractor parking brake, block all

wheels and switch off the engine.
There is a plunger on the base of each reservoir. To

drain a reservoir, move the plunger (1) laterally, in
any direction, and allow air pressure and any
accumulated water to escape. The reservoirs will
recharge with air when the engine is restarted.
20
4--16

EVERY 50 HOURS Complete the

preceding operations plus the
following:
OPERATION 7
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, INTERCOOLER, OIL
COOLERS AND AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER CORES
Check all cores for chaff accumulation or blockage.

If any is noted , clean as follows:
CAUTION
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.
NOTE: Tractors with front P.T.O. will have a small

additional oil cooler fitted.
1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2).
2. The air conditioner condenser (1) Figure 21, is

located in front of the engine intercooler and 21
transmission oil cooler. To gain access to the rear
of the condenser first release the fasteners (2) by
pulling forwards as shown, then swing the
condenser outwards.
3. Access to the rear of the intercooler and oil cooler

is gained by releasing the spring clip (3) and,
using the grab handle (4), pulling both coolers
upwards and outwards. The coolers will ’lock’ in
the raised position.
4. Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the
air conditioner condenser and, finally, the
driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any bent
fins.
5. To lower the intercooler and oil cooler grasp the

handle (3) and pull upwards, simultaneously
pushing in the top of the intercooler. As the 22
coolers begin to lower allow the grab handle to
drop. Re--attach the spring clip to the hook and
clamp securely.
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily

substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
it with a pressure washer.
4--17

OPERATION 8
CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTERS
Air drawn into the cab by the blower fan passes

through three filters, two externally mounted, and
one recirculation filter located inside the cab.
Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower and

close the roof hatch, all windows and one door.
Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back
pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the
underside of the external filters.
NOTE: In humid conditions, do not switch on the

blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles
drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove without
washing. 23
External Filters
To remove the external filter, unscrew the securing

clip (1) Figure 23, from the front end of the filter cover
(2).
Remove the cover (2) Figure 24, and the filter
element (3).
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air 24

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the upper surface through the element to the
underside. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm)
from the element to prevent damage to the filter
media
Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Re--install the filter elements with the clean side
uppermost and re-install the covers.
4--18

Internal Filter
To remove an internal filter, loosen the retaining

screws (1) anti clockwise and remove the filter cover.
25
Remove the cover (1) and extract the filter from the
housing.
NOTE: The filter (2) is made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the clean surface through the element to the dirty
side. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from
the element to prevent damage to the filter media.
26
4--19

OPERATION 9
ALL GREASE FITTINGS
Oil all pivots and apply a grease gun to the lubrication

fittings, as shown in Figures 27 to 47 inclusive.
See page 4--8 for the correct grease specification.
Right and Left-hand Lift Arm
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as

shown.
27
Right and Left-hand Lift Rod
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as

shown.
NOTE: Tractors equipped with a hydraulically

adjusted lift rod on the right--hand side will not have
this lubrication fitting.
28
Top Link

shown.
29
4--20

2WD Axle, Outer Steering Components and

Front Hubs

shown. (Wheel removed for clarity).
NOTE: The illustration identifies the right side

lubrication fitting, this is repeated on the right side of
the axle.
30
2WD Axle, Centre Steering Components

shown.
31
Front Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)

shown.
32
Rear Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)

shown.
33
4--21

Front Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

shown.
34
Rear Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

shown.
35
Lower Swivel Bearing (Supersteer 4WD Axle)

shown.
36
Front Trunnion Pin, Suspension Upper and
Lower Damper Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)

shown.
37
4--22

Panhard Rod Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)

shown.
38
Suspension Arm (suspended 4WD axle)
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting at the rear

of the suspension arm, located beneath the tractor,
in front of the transmission.
39
Drive Shaft Universal Joint (suspended and
Supersteer axles only)

shown.
NOTE: The grease fittings shown is at the rear of the

drive shaft. On some models, the shield completely
covers the drive shaft and a hole is provided for
access.
40
4WD Steering Cylinders and Track Rods

shown (Supersteer axle illustrated).
NOTE: The left-hand end of the axle is shown. There

are similar grease fittings on the left-hand steering
cylinder and track control rod.
41
4--23

4WD Hub Steering and Swivel Bearings

shown (Supersteer axle illustrated).
NOTE: The left-hand hub is shown. There are similar

grease fittings on the right-hand hub.
IMPORTANT: Tractors with steering angle sensor

have a sealed bearing on the right--hand upper
swivel and therefore do not have a grease fitting.
42
Rear Tow Hitch (auto engagement type)

shown.
43
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame)

shown.
44
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and swivel
coupling)

shown.
45
4--24

Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and K 80mm

ball)

shown.
46
Heavy Duty Roller Drawbar

shown.
47
Front Hitch

shown.
NOTE: The lubrication fittings shown are viewed

from the right side of the tractor, three more fittings
can be seen from the left side of the tractor.
48
Dynamic Fender Pivot

shown.
49
4--25

OPERATION 10
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS
Check the front and rear wheel nuts for tightness

using a torque wrench (with a torque multiplier,
where necessary).
The specified torque figures are shown in the

accompanying table:
Two wheel drive --

Front disc to hub bolts 210Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Four wheel drive -- Adjustable front wheels
Front disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Front disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
50
Manual adjust rear wheels -- Flanged axle

Disc to hub nuts 260 Nm (190 lbf. ft.)
Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Bar axle
Split wedge bolts
with cast wheel centre 300 Nm (220 lbf. ft.)
with 10 bolt hub 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to hub nuts

with 10 bolt hub 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to rim nuts (all) 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)

51
4--26

OPERATION 11
CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE
CONDITION
Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures.

Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage.
Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being

carried. See ‘Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads’
in Section 3.
NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium

chloride/water solution, use a special tyre gauge as
the solution will corrode a standard-type gauge.
Check pressure with the valve stem at the bottom.
52
4--27

EVERY 100 HOURS carry out the

following checks :
OPERATION 12
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT TENSION (Air
operated trailer brakes -- where fitted)
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.
53
4--28


preceding checks plus the following:
OPERATION 13
BATTERY ELECTROLITE CHECK
IMPORTANT: This operation applies to the battery

on tractors operating in tropical climates. Tractors
operating in temperate climates should have the
battery electrolyte level checked every 1200 hours or
12 months.
To gain access to the battery, release the locking

catches (1), pull the step frame outwards and allow
to lower fully.
Release the battery cover by turning the locking

catch (2) anti--clockwise. Lift the cover from the two
guide pins which retain and support the rear of the
cover. 54
Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs (1) from the
top of the top of the battery.
Check that the electrolyte level is above the top of the

separator plates in each cell.
If necessary, top up with distilled or de-mineralised

water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being

severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage
is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special 55
charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
4--29

OPERATION 14
INSPECT POLY V--BELT
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.
Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys

and check that the belt tensioner is operating
correctly.
56
4--30

OPERATION 15
CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE AND
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level

surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.
Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand
side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the the oil
level is between the high and low marks (1), in the
sight glass.
57
If necessary , remove the filler cap (1) and add oil, as

required.
See page 4--8 for the correct oil specification.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,

where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
checking the oil.
58
4--31

OPERATION 16
ADJUST PARKING BRAKE
Block the front wheels, jack up the rear of the tractor

and support the rear wheels just clear of the ground.
Unlatch the brake pedals.
Apply the parking brake so that the 4th. notch of the

ratchet is engaged. Remove or ease back the rubber
boot, loosen the locknuts and turn the adjuster nuts
on the operating cables until both wheels start to
lock. Release the parking brake and ensure that both
wheels are free to rotate. Re--apply the parking brake
to ensure that the system operates freely. Tighten
the locknuts.
Road test, using the parking brake to stop the tractor. 59

The tractor should stop in a straight line if the cables
have been correctly adjusted.
OPERATION 17
CHECK FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL LEVEL
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug.
60
4--32


ENGINE OIL CHANGE
IMPORTANT: Operation 22 depicts the normal 600

hour engine oil and filter change period. However,
the oil change period may be affected by other
factors:
Cold Temperature Operation

Engines operating in temperatures below -- 12 ° C
(10 ° F) or in arduous conditions should have the oil
changed every 300 hours of operation. (The oil filter
need only be changed at the normal 600 hour service
interval).
Diesel Fuel Sulphur Content

In some countries, locally available diesel may have
a high sulphur content, in which case the oil and filter
change period should be adjusted, as follows:
• Sulphur content between 0.5 and 1.0%

-- change engine oil every 300 hours.
• Sulphur content between 1.0 and 1.3%

-- change engine oil every 150 hours.
OPERATION 18
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Warm the engine to operating temperature. Stop the

engine, remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 61 and
catch the oil in a suitable container. Unscrew and
discard the oil filter (1).
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.
If the engine oil is extremely hot, allow it to cool to a
moderately warm temperature before proceeding.
To change the oil and filter:
1. Remove the engine oil drain plugs which are 61

located at the rear of the sump on either side of
the engine. Catch the oil in a suitable container
and dispose properly.
2. Replace the drain plugs after the oil has drained.
4--33

3. Clean the oil filter area. Unscrew the oil filter (1)
and discard. Catch any residual oil and dispose
of properly.
4. Clean the new filter mounting surface.
5. Apply a thin coat of oil on the new filter sealing

ring and install the filter. Turn until the sealing ring
contacts the mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten.
62
6. Remove Dipstick/Filler cap and fill with the

correct amount of fresh oil as indicated below.
Ensure the oil is of the correct grade and
viscosity.
7. Start the engine and run for 3 minutes at idle

speed then stop the engine.
8. Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for

leaks.
9. Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain into the

crankcase, then check the oil level on the
dipstick. The oil level should fall between the
‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ on the dipstick. Add more oil as 63
required.
NOTE: Do not fill above the ‘MAX’ indicator on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower
notch.
10. Re--install the dipstick/filler cap.
Oil Capacity (including filter):
All models 15.0 litres

(3.96 U.S gals.)
4--34

OPERATION 19
CHANGE HYDRAULIC AND TRANSMISSION
OIL FILTERS
The type of hydraulic filters is dependent upon tractor

specification. All filters are installed under the
right-hand side of the cab floor.
There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a
replaceable cartridge, and the charge filter (1) which
is a disposable type.
Before changing a disposable filter, clean the area

around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew
and discard safely.
Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter

mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of
the new filter and install on the tractor.
Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a

further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten.
Both types of main filter (3) have a replaceable

cartridge.
In Figure 64, access to the cartridge is gained by 64

removing the three retaining nuts (2) on the filter
head. Ensure filter cover is clean before installing the
new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring before
re--assembling to the tractor. Do not overtighten the
retaining nuts.
Before changing the main filter cartridge in

Figure 65, first release the air bleed valve (2) by
unscrewing fully. This will allow air into the filter so
that most of the oil can drain back into the hydraulic
system.
Wait a few moments and then remove the 19mm plug

(5) from the filter casing and allow the oil to drain out.
Using a 41mm socket or ring spanner, remove the
filter support plate by turning approximately 45° to
the left. Both plate and filter can now be removed
from the tractor.
Ensure the support plate is clean before installing the

65
new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring and refit the
assembly to the tractor. Ensure the plate locks into
place and the lug (4) aligns correctly with the arrow
on the filter casing.
4--35

OPERATION 20
CHANGE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Remove the outer element (1) as described in

Operation 1 and discard it.
Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a

damp lint--free cloth on a probe, taking care not to
damage the inner element. Install a new outer
element.
66
4--36

OPERATION 21
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS
Working from both sides of the engine, check all

intake system connection clamps for tightness.
From the left--hand side of the engine, check the air

cleaner intake connections at points (1) and (2) and
the turbocharger to intercooler connections at points
(2) and (4). Do not overtighten.
67
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the
intercooler to inlet manifold connections at points (1)
and (2). Do not overtighten.
It is essential that the clean air side of the filtration

system is sealing correctly at the connections (1) and
(3).
68
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the
exhaust aspirator connections at points (1) and (2)
for proper sealing and the clamps for tightness.
69
4--37

OPERATION 22
CHANGE FUEL PRE--FILTER AND FUEL FILTER
ELEMENTS
FUEL PRE--FILTER
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.
The primary and secondary fuel filters are both of the

disposable type. The primary filter incorporates a
water drain on the base of the filter.
1. Unscrew and remove the drain tap (1) at the base

of the primary filter/sedimenter. Allow the fuel to
drain out. Catch the fuel in a suitable container
and dispose of properly
NOTE: To allow removal of the drain tap it may be 70

necessary to remove the sensor wire.
2. Unscrew and remove the filter from the filter head

and dispose of properly.
3. Install a new filter to the head assembly.
4. Before installing the new filter lightly coat the filter

gasket with oil.
5. Rotate the filter until the filter gasket is touching

the filter head. Then give the filter a further 3/4
turn to tighten to correct torque (15Nm). Do not
overtighten.
Secondary Fuel Filter
6. Remove and replace the secondary fuel filter in

the same manner.
After replacing the fuel filters it will be necessary to

prime the fuel system before starting the engine. See
Operation 36, page 4--55.
4--38

OPERATION 23
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LUBRICATION
Front Axle
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) Figure 71

and ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening. If necessary, top up through the opening
with clean oil and replace the plug.
71
Front Hub
Position a front wheel with the combined level/filler

plug (1) at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
Remove the level/filler plug and ensure that the oil

reaches the bottom of the opening. If necessary, top
up through the opening with clean oil until oil just
overflows from the opening. Re-install the plug.
Repeat on the other front wheel.

72
4--39

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS

(whichever occurs first) carry out the
OPERATION 24
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERS
External Filters
To remove an external filter, turn the quick release

fastener 1/2 a turn anti--clockwise to free the front of
the filter cover. Remove the cover and the filter
element. Dispose of the filter elements properly.
Clean both filter chambers with a damp, lint--free

cloth.
Install new filter elements. A flow direction arrow is

moulded into the side of the filter. Install the filters
with the arrow pointing upwards. Re--install the
covers. 73
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded around the
sides. Take care not to damage the element during
installation.
Internal Filter
To remove the internal filter turn captive screws (1)

until the cover is loose.
74
Remove the filter cover and the filter element.
Dispose of the filter element properly.
Clean the filter chamber with a damp lint--free cloth.
Install the new filter element making sure that the

arrow on the filter points to the rear of the tractor.
Re--install the filter cover.
75
4--40

OPERATION 25
CHANGE TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/HYD-
RAULIC OIL AND FILTERS
Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate

the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the
tractor on level ground, lower the 3-point hitch and
stop the engine. Apply the parking brake and block
wheels on both sides.
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is
extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm
temperature before proceeding.
There are two drain plugs (1), for the oil reservoir, one
below the transmission and one below the rear axle. 76
To ensure the reservoir is completely drained, both
drain plugs should be removed using a hexagon key.
To change the oil:
1. Remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 76 and

completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of the oil properly.
2. Re-install both drain plugs after the oil has

drained.
IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 19 (change

hydraulic and transmission filters) before refilling
with oil.
3. Remove the filler plug cap (1) Figure 77 and refill 77

with new oil.
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic

system. Fully raise the 3-point hitch.
5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while

checking the system for leaks.
6. Check the oil level by means of the sight glass

(1). Add oil as required until the oil level is
between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marks.
NOTE: Do not fill above the full mark.
Oil Capacity:
All models with Power Command transmission:

100 litres
(26.4 U.S. gal.) 78
4--41

OPERATION 26
CHANGE 4WD DIFFERENTIAL OIL
Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park

brake.
To change the oil:
1. Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 79 and

2. Re-install the drain plug. Remove the level/filler

plug (1) Figure 80.
3. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the

level/filler plug hole. Re-install level/filler plug. 79
Oil Capacity:
All models 14 litres

(14.8 U.S. qts.)
80
4--42

OPERATION 27
CHANGE 4WD PLANETARY HUB OIL

brake.
To change the oil:
1. Position the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug (1)

is at the lowest point. Remove the plug and
2. Rotate the wheel so that the combined level/filler

plug (1) is at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
3. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the 81

bottom of the level/filler plug hole (3). Install the
plug.
4. Repeat the process on the other hub.
Oil Capacity (each hub):
W/out brakes 2.15 litres

(2.3 U.S. qts.)
With brakes litres
( U.S. qts.)
OPERATION 28
CHANGE FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL

brake.
1. Place a suitable container below the gearbox and

remove the level plug (1) and drain plugs (2).
Allow the oil to completely drain into the container
then replace the drain plugs. Dispose of oil
properly.
2. Refill the gearbox through the combined

level/filler plug until the oil reaches the bottom of
the opening.

82
4--43

OPERATION 29
BATTERY ELECTROLITE CHECK AND
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Checking the Electrolite
IMPORTANT: This operation applies only to

batteries on tractors operating in temperate climates.
Tractors operating in tropical climates should have
the battery electrolyte level checked every 300
hours. See operation 13.
To gain access to the battery, release the locking

catches (1), and pull the step frame outwards, allow
to lower fully.
1. Release the battery cover by turning the catch (2)

anti--clockwise. Lift the cover from the battery 83
ensuring it clears the support pins at the rear of
the battery carrier.
2. Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs (1) from

the top of the top of the battery. Check the
electrolyte level is above the top of the separator
plates in each cell.
If necessary top up with distilled or de-mineralised

water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals

should be cleaned and lightly coated with petroleum
jelly (Vaseline or similar).
84
IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being
severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage
is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special
charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
4--44

Battery Removal
NOTE: If the battery is being removed, disconnect

the battery leads before proceeding further. Always
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (1)
first, place in a safe position and then disconnect the
positive (+) lead.
1. Loosen the nuts (2) on the battery strap until the

strap can be unhooked from the carrier base.
2. Remove the set screws (4) from the side plate (3)
and lift off, taking care not to trap or damage the
wiring on the Maxi Fuse block. 85
3. Slide the battery out of the carrier.
CAUTION
Tractor batteries are very heavy, ensure the battery
is safely supported during the removal process.
To refit the battery, reverse the above procedure.

Ensure battery leads and cables are positioned so
they do not become trapped or chafe on a sharp
edges.
Refit the battery cover.
4--45

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS

(whichever occurs first) carry out the
OPERATION 30
COOLING SYSTEM
During manufacture, the engine cooling system is

filled with a high quality antifreeze and water solution.
The antifreeze contains a chemical inhibitor. This
inhibitor increases and extends the protection
offered by conventional antifreezes.
The inhibitor will:

• Increase rust prevention.
• Reduce scale formation.

• Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
• Reduce foaming of the coolant.
The chemical inhibitor must be replenished, at

intervals, to maintain the optimum protection level.
This protection is provided by draining and flushing
the system and refilling with a 50% solution of Ambra
Agriflu antifreeze or, where this antifreeze is not
available, with a measured dosage of chemical
inhibitor. See the following text.
Draining and Refilling the Cooling System
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1). It is
dangerous to remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot. When cool, use a thick cloth and turn
the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure
to escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant
should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions
outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor containers,
where used.
86
IMPORTANT: It is essential that an approved
pressure cap is used. If the cap is mislaid or
damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer.
4--46

1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximum

heat position (fully clockwise).
87
2. Disconnect the radiator lower hose and drain all
the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of
the coolant properly.
NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine

coolant hoses, to loosen the clamp it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner. Using a pair of pliers, carefully
pull off the alloy cover, this will expose a conventional
screw head. Turn anti--clockwise to loosen.
88
3. Remove the coolant drain plug (1) from the
right--hand side of the engine block. Drain all the
coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the
coolant properly.
4. To increase the drainage rate, remove the

radiator cap and recovery tank cap.
5. Flush the system with a commercial cooling

system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied
with the cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the
engine cool.
IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot

engine. The difference in temperature could cause 89
the the block or head to crack.
4--47

6. Re--install the radiator lower hose. Using Plain water
7. Fill the system with clean water and run the If you reside in a country where antifreeze is not
engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. available, use clean water premixed with 5%
Allow the engine to cool. chemical inhibitor. The inhibitor is available from your
authorised dealer and is supplied in 16 fl. oz. (473 ml)
8. Fill the system with a blend of antifreeze and bottles, the side of the bottle being marked in 1 fl.oz.
clean soft water. Add coolant slowly through the increments.
radiator filler neck until the coolant reaches the
bottom of the filler neck.
Mix three complete bottles of inhibitor with 28.5 litres
(7.5 U.S. gal.) of clean water. This will provide more
NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the
coolant mixture than is actually required. The excess
radiator as slowly as possible thereby allowing any
coolant should be kept in a specially marked
air pockets to disperse.
container and used for top up purposes.
The coolant to be used is dependent upon local
availability. See the following text: WARNING
Inhibitor solution is irritating to eyes and skin . It
contains buffered potassium hydroxide.
Using Ambra Agriflu antifreeze (NH900 A)
• Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged or
Use a solution of 50% clean water and 50% repeated skin contact.
antifreeze. The inhibitor already in this antifreeze is
sufficient to protect your engine for a further 1200 • Wear protective eyewear when using .
hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
• In case of contact with eyes, flush with water for
15 minutes and obtain medical attention.
• Wash skin with soap and water after use.
• Keep out of reach of children.
4--48

After Refilling the System -- All Coolant

Solutions
1. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

for leaks.
2. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill mark

(1).
3. Start the engine and run it until normal operating

temperature is reached.
NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is

pumped around the system.
90
4. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.
5. Remove the radiator cap (1) Figure 91 and add

coolant to the radiator to bring the coolant level
to the bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiator
cap. Add coolant to the recovery tank as required
to bring the level up to the cold mark (2).
NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated

immediately following this coolant change, run the
engine for one hour to ensure that the antifreeze
and/or chemical inhibitor is dispersed throughout the
cooling system. Allow the engine to cool and make
a final check to ensure that the coolant level is
satisfactory. 91
Coolant Capacity Chemical Inhibitor
All models 26.0 litres There are three part numbers for the inhibitor. The
(6.9 U.S. gal.) content of each bottle is identical, only the
instructions on the label differ, by language:
Clean Water Specification:
Part No. Languages on Label
Total Hardness 300 parts per million
83958743 English, French, Spanish,
Chlorides 100 parts per million
Portuguese and Greek
Sulphates 100 parts per million
83958744 English, French, German,
Antifreeze:
Italian and Dutch
Ambra Agriflu Anti--Freeze (NH 900A) is available
83958745 English, Danish, Norwegian,
from your authorised dealer in the following
Finnish and Swedish
quantities.
Part No. 2715 1502 (4x5 litre)

2715 1900 (20 litre)
2715 1100 (200 litre)
4--49

OPERATION 31
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER
ELEMENT
The air cleaner is accessible from the right--hand

side of the engine
1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 92, and

lift off the air cleaner assembly cover.
92
2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 93 from the

air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end
of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
NOTE: Examine the inside of the outer element. If

dust is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.
93
3. Pull the inner element straight out of the housing

and dispose of properly.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using

a damp lint--free cloth.
5. Install a new inner element and a new outer

element (if required). Ensure both elements are
correctly seated before replacing the housing
cover.
IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter

element properly could result in engine damage.
Therefore it is recommended that the element be
installed by an authorised dealer. 94
4--50

OPERATION 32
CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE
With the engine cold, ease the ventilation tube from

the valve rocker cover after loosening the retaining
clamp. Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve
cover and check the valve clearance.
The correct valve clearance for all models, Figure 95

, is:
Inlet 0.25 +/ -- 0.05mm(0.009+/ -- 0.002in.)
Exhaust 0.51 +/ -- 0.05mm(0.02+/ -- 0.002in.)
Check the valve clearance for all engines as follows:
Cylinder No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 95
Intake -- -- * -- * *
Exhaust -- * -- * -- *
Rotate the crankshaft and balance No. 1 cylinder
valves. Adjust the valves marked by the asterisk (*)
as shown in the table above:
Cylinder No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Intake * * -- * -- --
Exhaust * -- * -- * --
Rotate the crankshaft and balance No.6 cylinder
valves. Adjust the valves marked by the asterisk (*)
as shown in the table above:
4--51

OPERATION 33
CHANGE ENGINE BREATHER FILTER
With the engine cold, ease the ventilation tube from

the valve rocker cover after loosening the retaining
clamp. Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve
cover.
Remove the breather pipe elbow by turning 1/4 turn

anti--clockwise and withdrawing from the valve
cover. Loosen and remove the thumb screw (1) to
release the filter assembly from inside the valve
cover.
NOTE: Should severe oil staining appear around the

pressure regulator (2), it would indicate the breather
filter requires replacing. 96
Remove the 3 screws (2) holding the pressure

regulator (1) and extract both regulator and filter (3)
from the valve cover.
Thoroughly clean the valve cover before fitting the

new regulator, filter and breather pipe. Tighten the
regulator retaining screws to 5 Nm (3.6 lbf. ft.).
Replace the valve cover on the engine using a new

gasket and tighten the retaining nuts to 25 Nm (18.4
lbf. ft.).
97
4--52

OPERATION 34
CHANGE AIR BRAKE DRIER RESERVOIR
Removing the Drier Reservoir
Before attempting to change the drier reservoir (1),

thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir to
prevent debris from entering the air braking system.
1. Exhaust all air pressure in the system by opening

the drain tap on the main air tank/s.
2. Using a filter release tool, unscrew and remove

the drier reservoir. Dispose of properly according 98
to local regulations.
Installing a New Drier Reservoir
1. Clean the seal flange on the drier body and the

threaded pin, check for damage to the pin and
the seal contact surface of the flange.
2. Lightly grease the sealing ring on the reservoir

and the threaded pin on the drier body.
3. Screw the reservoir onto the drier body until the

seal touches the contact surface of the flange.
Tighten a further half--turn by hand. Tighten to a
maximum of 15 Nm (11 lbf. ft.) DO NOT
overtighten.
4. Pressurise the reservoir and check for leaks. If

further tightening is necessary, depressurise the
system before tightening.
5. Re--pressurise the air braking system and check

again for leaks.
4--53

EVERY 3 YEARS carry out the following:
OPERATION 35
SERVICE THE AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
After 3 seasons, the performance of the air

conditioner (1) may to be reduced. At this time it is
recommended to have the receiver/drier changed
and the complete system checked by your
authorised dealer using specialised equipment.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12 ° C (10 ° F).
• Never expose any part of the air conditioner
system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
• Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the 99
air conditioner system. escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
• If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the
same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38 ° C
(90 --100 ° F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
• If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the
eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. consult a doctor immediately.
4--54

GENERAL MAINTENANCE (to be

performed as and when required)
OPERATION 36
BLEEDING THE FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
To Bleed the Fuel System
It may be necessary after carrying out maintenance

work on the fuel injection system or, after running out
of fuel, to purge the system of air to allow the engine
to start.
If the engine fails to start after several turns, after one

of the above situations has occurred, bleed the
system using the following procedure:
1. Ensure the tractor has adequate fuel and the

battery is fully charged.
2. Unscrew the primer pump knob and proceed to

pump until a high resistance is felt when pushing
the pump downwards.
3. Slowly push the plunger down against the

resistance until the pump knob can be screwed
fully home into the filter head.
The fuel injectors and fuel injection pump are of the

self bleed type and therefore any air remaining in the
system will be purged as the engine is cranked to
start.
100
4--55

OPERATION 37
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CALIBRATION
Power Command Transmission
The Power Command transmission has a number of

clutch packs requiring periodic calibration to
compensate for wear. Calibration of the clutches
should be performed at the 50 Hour Service and
thereafter only if a deterioration in gear shift quality
is noted.
NOTE: During the calibration procedure the

electronic management system detects precisely the
point at which the clutches start to engage . The
engagement is detected by a reduction in engine
speed. During calibration it is essential that no action
is taken to to cause the engine speed to vary. Be sure
that the air conditioner and all electrical equipment is
101
switched off.
Do not operate the steering wheel, footbrakes, PTO
or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot
throttle.
Preparing the Tractor for Calibration Error Codes for Power Command
Transmission
NOTE: The clutches should be adjusted when the
transmission oil temperature is above 80°C (176°F). Code Meaning
U19 Oil too cold.
Park the tractor on level ground, away from
obstacles (in case of unexpected tractor movement). U21 Engine RPM too low.
U22 Engine RPM too high.
Place the transmission shuttle lever in neutral and U23 Shuttle lever not in forward drive position.
apply the parking brake. Switch off all electrical
U26 Clutch pedal not fully released.
equipment and air conditioning if fitted. Lower
hydraulic equipment to the ground, place all remote U31 Tractor wheel movement detected.
levers in neutral and stop the engine. U33 Hand brake not applied
U34 Operator seat switch not depressed.
With the operator in the seat, depress and hold down
the clutch pedal. With key start in the off position U36 Calibration high error.
depress and hold both transmission upshift and U37 Calibration low error.
downshift buttons, Figure 101. Start the engine and Ud1 Flywheel torque calibration too low
release the buttons to initiate the calibration mode.
Release the clutch pedal. Ud2 Flywheel torque calibration too high
NOTE: In ’automatic calibration sequence’ the seat

switch is constantly monitored, if the operator leaves
the seat the sequence will be stopped.
4--56

Depress the upshift button once to display the

transmission oil temperature. The temperature will
initially appear as a centigrade reading, this will be
replaced by one of the following codes.
If the temperature is between 10°C and 60°C, ‘‘CL”

will be displayed. If the temperature is too high,
above 105°C, ‘‘CH” will be displayed.
If ‘U19’ is displayed calibration will not be possible

and the oil will have to be warmed before proceeding.
102
With the oil at the correct temperature, depress the

upshift button, ’A’ will appear in the display. Depress
the clutch pedal and move the shuttle lever into
forward drive. Release the clutch pedal slowly.
Increase the engine speed to 1200 rpm and depress

the auto switch. Both FIELD and TRANSPORT auto
symbols will start to flash in the display. The clutches
will now calibrate one by one automatically.
If an error occurs while in auto mode the sequence

is stopped and the relevant code displayed. Press
the auto function push button or the upshift/downshift
button to clear the error. 103
After the reverse clutch has been calibrated, ’A’ will

appear in the display to confirm the calibration
sequence has been completed.
Key off the engine and wait for 10 seconds to allow

the calibration to be stored in the memory. The
tractor is now ready for normal operation.
CAUTION
The tractor is drivable even if calibration has not been
completed. Pay attention in this condition as the
tractor could be jerky or sluggish. Always pull away
using the clutch pedal very carefully.
104
4--57

OPERATION 38
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL LATCHING/UNLATCHING
CAUTION
Owners should be aware of local regulations
concerning the braking system. Regularly maintain
the brakes to ensure compliance with the law and
ensure your safety. If in doubt, contact your dealer.
The hydraulically actuated brakes require no

adjustment. However, if any part of the brake pedal
linkage or the master cylinder assembly is replaced
or if the pedal latch will not readily engage the hole
in the right--hand pedal shank, adjust the pedal as
follows:
105
Adjust the clevis by loosening the locknut . The

distance from the bulkhead to the centre of the clevis
hole should be 137mm (5.4 in.). Adjust both pedals
and ensure pedal latch engages properly.
106
4--58

OPERATION 39
AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH
Place a load on the pick--up hitch hook. a trailer or

implement is suggested. Ensure that the hitch will
latch and unlatch satisfactorily.
If adjustment is necessary, remove the load from the

hitch hook. Loosen the locknuts (1) and turn the
adjuster (2) on each lift rod equally. Ensure that both
hitch lift arms are supporting the hitch equally at the
start of raise. Check that the hitch will latch and
unlatch.
When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system

relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods are
not under tension. Both these symptoms indicate 107
that the hitch lift rods are too short.
Tighten the locknuts to 100 Nm (72 lbf. ft.).
With the hitch latched in the raised position, adjust

the operating cable by means of the adjuster nuts (3)
to remove all slack from the inner cable.
OPERATION 40
CHECK REMOTE CONTROL VALVE DRAIN
BOTTLES
Every time a hydraulic hose is connected or

disconnected, a small amount of oil is discharged
from the remote control valve coupler. Drain bottles
are located below each remote control valve to catch
the discharged oil.
Visually check the oil level in the bottles. If necessary,

unclip the bottle (2) by releasing the spring catch (1),
remove the cap and empty the oil into a suitable
container. Re-install the bottle, ensuring it is correctly
seated below the valve.
108
4--59

OPERATION 41
CAB SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENT
(where fitted)
On tractors with a suspended cab the pre--load on

the suspension unit (1) Figure 109, may be adjusted
to suit heavier or lighter weights carried in the cab.
NOTE: Depending on track setting, the tractor rear

wheel may need to be removed for easy access to
the cab suspension adjuster.
Suspension Setting
The pre--load adjuster is used to set the cab

suspension so it operates in the optimum comfort
zone for normal driving conditions. Position II
provides the ideal setting for a 68kg (150 lbs.)
operator plus additional equipment weighing 22kg 109
(48 lbs.) carried in the cab.
NOTE: To provide optimum suspension

performance, the weight of any heavy items carried
in the cab (tow chains, linkages, toolboxes etc.) must
always be taken into consideration when adjusting
the suspension.
The cab suspension adjustment has five pre--load

settings which can be ’clicked’ into position by
rotating the upper pre--load adjuster. Each setting is
identified by vertical markings (2) on the lower collar.
When adjusted correctly, the arrow on the upper
collar (1) will align with the vertical markings on the
lower collar.
Select position I for operators having a lighter body

weight than 68kg (150 lbs.), positions III and IIII are
used for operators with a heavier body weight. With
two people in the cab, positions IIII and IIIII should be
used.
110
IMPORTANT: For correct suspension operation it is
vital that both suspension units are adjusted to the
same setting. An imbalance in adjustment will cause
unnecessary wear on the suspension units.
A ’C’ spanner is included in the tractor tool kit for

adjusting the cab suspension. Engage the ’C’
spanner in the slot of the pre--load adjuster and rotate
to the desired position.
NOTE: Use only the special tool provided to carry out

any pre--load adjustment, using alternative
equipment may damage the adjuster components.
4--60

OPERATION 42
HEADLIGHT AND WORKLAMP ADJUSTMENT
Headlights
To avoid blinding on coming drivers, adjust the angle

of the headlight beams.
Each headlight is adjusted by rotating the two

adjusters (1) clockwise or anti--clockwise according
to the amount of correction required.
111
Worklamps
Dependant upon model and specification, adjustable

worklamps may be installed on the front and rear of
of the cab roof, low down at the front of the cab or on
the rear fenders. Non--adjustable worklamps are
mounted on the front of the hood , adjacent to the
headlights.
Cab roof mounted worklamps are adjusted by

moving the protruding lever (1), backwards or
forwards.
112
4--61

OPERATION 43
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights and Hood--mounted Worklamps
IMPORTANT: All headlights and worklamps have

halogen bulbs. Never touch a halogen bulb with the
fingers. Natural moisture in the skin may cause the
bulb to fail prematurely when switched on. Always
use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen
bulbs.
The headlights and two non--adjustable worklamps

are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front
hood assembly. All bulbs are accessible from the
rear of the lamp unit inside the hood area.
113
To remove bulb from front headlight assembly, raise

hood as previously described in this section. Press
the retaining clip (1) to unhinge the rear part of the
headlight. Detach the retaining spring and remove
the bulb.
To remove the bulb from the integral worklamp

simply rotate the bulb holder assembly (1)
anti--clockwise approximately 20 degrees. The bulb
can then be removed by pressing in the bulb and then
releasing it.
114
Adjustable Worklamps
Grabrail mounted worklamps
To replace the bulbs on the grabrail mounted

worklamps, remove the two retaining screws. Pull
out the lens housing from the main lamp housing.
Squeeze together the ends of the wire retaining clip
(1) and pull the bulb holder from the assembly.
Remove the bulb making sure to use a clean cloth or
tissue.
115
4--62

Cab roof mounted worklamps
Remove the two retaining screws (1) and lower the

lamp assembly from the roof. Rotate the bulb holder
counter--clockwise and pull from the lamp housing.
Rotate the bulb counter--clockwise and remove from
the bulb holder making sure to use a clean cloth or
a tissue.
116
Turn/Position Lights
To gain access to the lower rear turn/position bulbs

remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens.
To remove the bulbs (1) rotate counter clockwise.
117
The front turn/position lamps are located on the
grabrails. Remove the two retaining screws.
Remove the lens. To remove the turn indicator bulb
(1) or the position bulb (3) rotate counter clockwise.
When re--fitting the lens ensure the sealing rubber (2)
is fully seated in the lamp housing.
118
The turn position lamps (Front and Rear) are located
in the cab roof. Remove the two retaining bolts (1)
and pull the lamp assembly from the housing. Rotate
the harness connector counter--clockwise to remove
the lamp housing from the bulb holder. To remove the
bulb rotate the bulb counter--clockwise and pull from
the bulb holder.
119
4--63

To remove the bulb rotate the bulb

counter--clockwise and pull from the bulb holder.
120
Puddle Lights
Remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens

housing assembly (1) from the cab roof. Disconnect
the harness connector and remove the light
assembly. To remove the bulb housing (3) rotate the
harness connector counter clockwise. To remove the
bulb (2) rotate counter clockwise.
121
Rocker Switch Bulbs

1
Certain of the rocker switches are internally
illuminated, the bulb being removeable from the rear
of the switch assembly.
The switch assembly is retained by a sprung tag (3) 2

at either end. Use a small screwdriver to pry one end
of the rocker switch from the sheet metal and
withdraw the switch assembly.
To change a bulb, press in the tag (2) using a small

3
screwdriver and pull the bulb retainer (1) from the
back of the assembly. The bulbs are of the capless 122
type, rated at 1.2w and are a push fit in the retainer.
After changing the bulb, push the retainer into the

back of the switch assembly until the tag locates in
the aperture. Re-install the switch assembly.
4--64

OPERATION 44
FUSES AND RELAYS
The fuse box is located behind a panel on the top of

the right --hand control console.
To check or change fuses, remove the two screws

securing the panel to the console. The fuses and
relays are shown diagrammatically in Figures 126
and 127. In addition to the main fuses there are
additional ‘maxi’ fuses which are provided to protect
the main fuses and electrical circuit.
There is provision for 60 fuses although they may not

all be fitted to your tractor. In addition, certain items
of equipment may not be installed on your tractor.
However, the fuses for these features are still fitted 123
and may be used as spares.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with

another of a different rating.
The fuses are numbered and colour--coded. Their

position and rating are shown in the chart on the next
page.
More relays are located behind the front of the

right--hand control console, Figure 124.
124
In addition to the fuses in the internal fuse box , there

are also extra fuses located on the battery tray. A
250 amp ‘MEGA‘ fuse (1) which protects the main
electrical system and three 30 amp fuses (2) which
protect the front lift electrical system, electronics
supply and implement ISO BUS circuit (where fitted).
125
4--65

Relay Descriptions 1--13
Relay Function
R1 Front Windscreen Wiper Module and
Rear Window Wiper Module
R2 Ignition Relay
R3 Side/Tail Lights and Illumination
R4 Starter
R5 Blower Motor
R6 Dipped Beam Headlamps
R7 Stoplamps
R8 Main Beam Headlamps
R9 Pneumatic Trailer Brake Supply
R10 Hydraulic Trailer Brake Supply
R11 Stoplamps Switch Feed and Pneumatic
Brakes
R12 Engine Cold Start Advance
(Mechanical Engines Only)
R13 Reverse Alarm and engine ECU power
126
4--66

Relay Descriptions 14--19 Maxi Fuses 1--6
Relay Function No. Amps Protected Components

R14 Front Lower Worklamps (Hood) MF1 80 Engine, Ignition Relay
R15 Rear Lower Worklamps MF2 30 Lighting, Ignition Switch, Main
Lighting Switch, Radio, Worklamp
R16 Electrical Supply
ECU, Fender Worklamps, Front
R17 Electronic Battery Isolator Worklamps, Roof Worklamps
R18 Air Conditioner Clutch MF3 80 B + KAM ADIC, Engine ECU,
R19 Electronic Remote Valve Power Transmission ECU, Fender Work-
lamps, Roof Worklamps, Front
Worklamps
MF4 80 Implement Socket Rear, Hood
Worklamps, Grab Rail Worklamps
MF5 80 Lighting
MF6 80 Accessories Cab
127
4--67

Mini Fuses 1--30
No. Amps Circuit 16 15 Trailer Brake

1 10 Interior and Puddle Lights + 17 25 Accessory Sockets
Parking Brake Lamp 18 15 Blower Motor + Seat
2 25 Cigar Lighter + Power Studs 19 15 Heated Mirrors
3 10 A/C Clutch 20 10 Radar Socket + ADIC KeyPad +
4 10 Accessory Sockets Radar
5 30 Blower Motor 21 15 Grid Heater + Water In Fuel
6 10 Radio KAM + Worklamp ECU Sensor + Brake Fluid Level Switch
7 20 Main Lights + Hazard Switch 22 15 Sidelamps RH
8 20 Starter Switch 23 15 Sidelamps LH
9 25 Loader 24 10 Illumination
10 30 Rear Implement Socket 25 15 Dip Beam Headlamps
11 10 Front and Rear Windscreen Wiper 26 15 Main Beam Headlamps
12 10 Wiper Switch and Rear Wiper Park 27 15 Front Worklamps (Hood)
13 15 Stoplamps 28 15 Worklamp ECU
14 15 Main Light Switch + Flasher Unit 29 30 Worklamp ECU
15 20 Stoplamp Switch + Pedal Latch 30 15 Rear Lower Worklamps
128
4--68

Mini Fuses 31--60
31 15 Beacon ECU 44 25 Front Implement Power Socket

32 30 Flasher Unit 45 25 Front Ignition + 8 Amp Socket
33 25 Diagnostic Connector + Engine 46 15 Electronic Engine ECU
ECU
47 10 Electronic Engine ECU
34 10 Instrument Cluster B+
48 Not Used
35 10 DC Mem + SCM + ACM
49 15 Electronic Engine ECU
36 10 Instrument Cluster Ignition
50 Not Used
37 15 Transmission Ignition
51 Not Used
38 10 Rear PTO Switch + Rear PTO
52 Not Used
Lamp + HPL + SCM + Ground
Speed PTO + Display Of Gears 53 Not Used
Connector
54 Not Used
39 10 HPL + Seat + Armrest + EDC +
55 Not Used
EHR Levers
40 10 Radio 56 Not Used
41 15 Front Suspension and PTO + EHR 57 Not Used

Levers 58 Not Used
42 10 Front Suspension 59 Not Used
43 10 Starter Switch (Run position) 60 10 Battery Isolator Control
129
4--69

Power Fuses
(All Models)
Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No.
PF1 250 Power B + Main Supply
PF2 30 Power E Electronic Supply
PF3 30 Power B + Front Implement
Socket
130
ISO BUS Power Fuses

(where fitted)
Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No.
PF4 30 Implement ISO BUS circuit
PF5 30 Implement ISO BUS circuit
131
4--70

CLEANING THE TRACTOR
Cab Interior
When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes

dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and squeeze out as much
of the water as possible.
The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water

to flow out through the open doors. Wash the
covering carefully and allow to dry naturally. Avoid
getting water under the mat.
NOTE: When operating with chemical sprayers,

clean the interior of the cab on a more frequent basis 132
to prevent a build up of chemical residue.
Cleaning the Seat and Seat Belt -- When fully dry, apply a good quality polish and
buff to a shine.
The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do
not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these Maintenance of the paintwork is normally carried out
chemicals will weaken the webbing. by washing, at intervals that depend on the
conditions of use and the environment. In areas
prone to atmospheric pollution and coastal zones,
Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying, washing should be carried out more frequently,
damage or general wear. whereas if organic or chemical substances are
present, wash immediately after the tractor is used.
Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Use only warm Use a low pressure water spray, sponge down with
water with a little detergent added or a proprietary a solution of automotive shampoo and water, rinsing
brand of automotive upholstery cleaner. Avoid the sponge frequently. Rinse the tractor thoroughly
wetting the seat more than is absolutely necessary. and dry off.
Avoid washing the tractor if it is hot or has been

Cleaning the Exterior of the Tractor standing in the sun. This will help to protect the shine
on the paintwork.
In the event of abrasions or deep scratches that
expose the metal under the paintwork, the area Protect the paintwork by means of periodical
concerned will need to be retouched and treated polishing with special products (silicone waxes)
immediately with specified original products as which are available from your authorised dealer. Use
follows: wax polish should the paintwork start to dull as this
has a slightly abrasive action.
-- Rub down the immediate area surrounding the
damage with fine abrasive paper. NOTE: When carrying out operations involving
-- Apply a coat of primer. materials or crops which may become airborne,
frequently check the tractor for build up of debris
-- Leave to dry and then rub down with fine abrasive around the radiator, engine and exhaust system to
paper to ’key’ the surface. prevent overheating or the possibility of catching fire.
-- Apply the paint. For best results apply several
light applications of paint rather than one heavy
coat. Paint and primer are available from your
authorised dealer.
4--71

PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC AND

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING BATTERY
CHARGING OR WELDING
Precautions 7. If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to

a computer module, then the module should be
To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical removed from the tractor. It is recommended that
systems, always observe the following: this procedure be carried out by an authorised
dealer.
1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit
8. Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or
connections, including the battery connections,
across any electrical wiring or electronic
when the engine is running.
component while welding is in progress.
2. Never short any of the charging components to
9. Always disconnect the negative cable from the
earth.
batteries when charging the batteries in the
3. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts tractor with a battery charger.
nominal voltage.
WARNING
4. Always observe correct polarity when installing Batteries contain sulphuric acid. In case of contact
the batteries or using a slave battery to jump start with skin, flush the affected area with water for five
the engine. Follow the instructions in the minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Avoid
operator’s manual when jump starting the contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye
tractor. Connect positive to positive and negative protection when working near batteries.
to negative.
5. Always disconnect the earth cable from the IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth
batteries before carrying out arc welding on the cable connections at the battery prior to charging the
tractor or on any implement attached to the batteries or welding on the tractor or attached
tractor. implement will result in damage to the electronic and
electrical systems.
6. Position the welder earth cable clamp as close to
the welding area as possible.
4--72

STORING THE TRACTOR PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER STORAGE
The following text is given for your information and After extended storage, prepare the tractor for
guidance. For further information concerning long further use, as follows:
term storage of your tractor, please consult your
authorised dealer. • Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure and lower
the tractor to the ground.
TRACTOR STORAGE
• Refill the fuel tank(s).
Before storing the tractor for an extended period, the
following precautions should be taken: • Check the radiator coolant level.
• Clean the tractor. • Check all oil levels.
• Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and • Install fully charged batteries.
refill with clean oil.
• Remove the exhaust pipe covering.
• Drain the fuel tank(s) and pour approximately
two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the • Start the engine and check that all instruments
tank. Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to and controls are functioning correctly. Using the
ensure complete distribution of the calibrating tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, fully
fuel throughout the injection system. See the raise the 3--point hitch and remove the supports.
next item before running the engine.
• Check operation of heating and air conditioning
• Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is systems (where fitted).
within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush
and refill the system. See Operation 30 in
Section 4. Run the engine for one hour to • Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it
disperse the coolant throughout the system. is operating satisfactorily.
• Lubricate all grease fittings.
• Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position

Control, raise the 3--point hitch and support the
lift arms in the raised position.
• Lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods

with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder
rams, lift assist rams, spool valves, etc.
• Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry

atmosphere. Recharge periodically.
• Raise the tractor and place supports under the

axles to take the weight off the tyres.
• Cover the exhaust pipe opening.
4--73

NOTES
4--74

SECTION 5
FAULT FINDING
INTRODUCTION
The following information is intended as a guide to
assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor
malfunctions and fault conditions.
The information provided is as follows:
• ERROR CODES
• SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES
Your tractor makes extensive use of electronics to

control and monitor major components within the
driveline, electrical and hydraulic systems. In the
unlikely event of a fault occurring in one of these
areas, the malfunction will be identified with a symbol
and a four or five digit error code in the Dot Matrix
Display on the instrument panel. The first digit(s) of
each number provide the general location of the fault
and the subsequent numbers confirm the exact 1
nature of the fault.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING
type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. Each
error code will be supported by the relevant symbol The following information lists possible problems,
displayed above the number. their cause and corrective action. The systems are
listed as follows:
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become
disabled, an error code will be displayed in the Subject Page
instrument panel. If this should happen and you are
unable to rectify the fault yourself, contact your Fault codes and symbols 5--2
authorised dealer and report the error code
Engine 5--4
displayed.
Transmission 5--7
Hydraulics 5--8
3-point hitch 5--9
Brakes 5--10
Cab 5--10
Electrical 5--11
5--1

SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION
-- 1------ Electronic draft control.
-- 2------ Transmission.
-- 3------ Engine.
-- 4------ Rear electronic remote valves.
-- 45---- Front electronic remote valves.

F
The system fault symbols relate
-- 5------ Rear PTO system. to an operational fault in one or
more of the tractors main
components either electrical,
components, electrical
mechanical or hydraulic.
-- 6------ Front wheel drive.
The appearance of a fault
symbol
b l may beb accompanied i d by
b
a four or five digit fault code.
-- 7------ Rear differential lock.
-- 8------ Front PTO system.
-- 9------ Front 3--point hitch.
-- 10------ Front suspension.
-- 15------ Fast Steer system.
-- 16------ Cab auto temperature control
5--2

FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION
-- 14------ Instrument cluster.
-- 14------ Electronic system malfunction.
-- 14------ Data network system.
The system fault symbols relate

-- 14------ Steering sensor. to an operational fault in one or
more of the tractors main
components either electrical,
components, electrical
mechanical or hydraulic.
-- 14------ 5 volt supply voltage.
The appearance
pp of a fault
symbol may be accompanied by
-- 14------ Starter motor power supply. a four digit fault code.
-- 14------ Fuel level sensor.
-- 14------ Air brake system fault.
-- 14------ Alternator charging failure.
Intelliview monitor present but

-- 14------ Configure to ’ON LINE’ status.
not configured ’ON LINE’.
5--3

ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Engine will not start Incorrect starting procedure. Review starting procedure.
or is difficult to start
Low or no fuel. Check fuel level.
Air in fuel lines. Bleed fuel system.
Low ambient temperature. Use cold starting aid.
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Malfunctioning fuel pump See your authorised dealer.

or injectors.
Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or See your authorised dealer.

solenoid relay.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use correct viscosity oil.
Incorrect fuel for operating Use correct type fuel for temperature
temperature. conditions.
Slow starter speed. See slow starter speed in Electrical.
Engine runs roughly Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
and/or stalls
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted. See your authorised dealer.
Fuel cap vent blocked. Wash cap in clean fuel oil.
5--4

ENGINE (continued)
Engine lacks power Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning fuel injection See your authorised dealer.

pump.
Maximum ‘no--load’ speed set See your authorised dealer.

too low.
Leaking air intake boost pipes or Check and rectify or see your authorised
exhaust manifold. dealer.
Turbocharger malfunctioning. See your authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
Engine knocks Fuel injection pump timing. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine oil pressure. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Engine overheats Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine coolant level. Fill coolant recovery tank. Check cooling
system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s). Check thermostat(s).
Dirty/blocked radiator core. Clean.
Excessive engine overload. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.
5--5

ENGINE (continued)
Engine overheats Faulty radiator pressure cap. Replace cap.
Cooling system blocked. Flush cooling system.
Loose or worn fan belt. Check tension, adjust or replace belt

if worn.
Leaking hose or connection. Tighten connection and/or replace hose.
Malfunctioning temperature See your authorised dealer.

gauge or sender.
Malfunctioning vistronic fan. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operat- Malfunctioning thermostat(s). Replace thermostat(s).

ing temperature
Vistronic fan locked up. See your Authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pres- Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
sure
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Excessive engine oil Engine oil level too high. Reduce oil level, as required.
consumption
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
External oil leaks. Repair leaks.
Worn valve guides/seals. See your authorised dealer.
Excessive fuel con- Low engine operating See Low engine operating temperature.
sumption temperature.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
5--6

ENGINE (continued)
Excessive fuel con- Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
sumption
(continued) Malfunctioning fuel injection pump. See your authorised dealer.
Leaking air intake or exhaust Check and rectify or see your authorised
manifold. dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
TRANSMISSION
Tractor does not Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see your
drive in any gear malfunction. authorised dealer.
Gear shift sequence Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see your
incorrect or gears malfunction. authorised dealer.
missing
Jumping out of gear Worn synchronisers/couplers. Recalibrate the transmission or see your
or holding in gear authorised dealer.
Poor inching control Transmission clutches require Perform transmission clutch calibration
when using inching calibration. procedure or see your authorised dealer.
pedal (clutch pedal)
or jerky gear shifting
High transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

operating tempera-
ture Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Dirty or blocked transmission Clean.

oil cooler.
Low transmission oil Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

pressure
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Blocked transmission oil filter. Replace filter.
Noisy transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Worn bearings or failed parts. See your authorised dealer.
5--7

HYDRAULICS
Hydraulic system Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
does not operate malfunction.
Hydraulics oil level very low. Add oil, as required.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Hydraulic oil over- Hydraulics oil level too low or Adjust oil level, as required.
heats too high.
Hydraulics oil cooler blocked. Clean.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Flow control incorrectly adjusted. Allow to cool, adjust flow control before
operating again.
Hydraulic load not matched to See your authorised dealer.

tractor.
Remote control valve Detent release pressure set too low. Adjust detent pressure or see your
detent disengages authorised dealer.
prematurely
Remote equipment Flow control incorrectly set. Adjust flow control.

cylinder operates too
fast or too slowly
Remote equipment Hoses not correctly connected. Attach hoses correctly.

does not operate
Load exceeds system capacity. Reduce load or use correct size cylinder
(see your authorised dealer).
Remote control valve lever Adjust cables or see your authorised

movement restricted. dealer.
5--8

THREE--POINT HITCH
3--point hitch does Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
not move when con- malfunction.
trol lever is moved
Hitch not in phase with the control Put lift control lever back in phase with
lever. lower links.
Fast raise switch in external control Put switch in correct position.

position.
Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.

positioned.
External power lift Fast raise switch not in external Centralise switch (external control
control does not op- control position. position).
erate
3--point hitch does Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.
not raise fully positioned.
3--point hitch drops Drop rate control incorrectly Adjust drop rate control.
slowly positioned.
3--point hitch slow to Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.

respond to draft adjusted.
loads
Drop rate too slow. Adjust drop rate control.
Implement not functioning properly. See implement operator’s manual.
3--point hitch too re- Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
sponsive to draft adjusted.
loads
3--point hitch status Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
light flashes continu- adjusted.
ally
5--9

BRAKES
Pedal(s) feel spongy Air in system. System requires bleeding. See

Excessive brake Brake piston seal leaking. See your authorised dealer.
pedal travel
Brake bleed valve leaking. See your authorised dealer.
Leakage in brake valve(s) See your authorised dealer.
Worn brake discs. See your authorised dealer.
CAB
Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter Check seal condition.
element(s).
Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.
Defective filter. Replace filter.
Damaged seals around Replace seal(s).

doors/windows or roof hatch.
Low pressuriser air Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.

flow
Heater or evaporator core blocked. See your authorised dealer.
Air conditioner does Heater control turned on. Turn temperature control knob fully anti-
not produce cool air clockwise.
Condenser blocked. Clean radiator, condenser and oil cooler.
Drive belt slipping, worn or Check automatic belt tensioner and belt
damaged. condition.
Low refrigerant level. See your authorised dealer.
5--10

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical system Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.

completely inopera- connections.
tive
Sulphated batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for
minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.
Starter speed slow -- Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.
engine cranks slowly connections.
Low battery output. Check battery open circuit voltage for

Incorrect viscosity engine oil. Use correct viscosity oil for ambient
temperature.
Starter inoperative Loose or corroded battery or Clean and tighten connections.

starter motor connections.
Dead batteries. Charge or replace batteries.
Starter safety switch(es) operative. Place all gear shift levers in neutral and
fully depress clutch pedal.
Alternator light stays Low engine idle speed. Increase engine idle speed.
on with engine run-
ning Broken/loose drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

authorised dealer.
Batteries will not Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

charge authorised dealer.
Loose or corroded terminals. Clean and tighten connections.
Loose or worn drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Replace belt, if required.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

5--11

NOTES
5--12

SECTION 6
ACCESSORIES
This section of the Manual describes the function Subject Page

and operation of features that are available for your
tractor as dealer installed accessories. Unless Intelliview II Monitor 6--2
otherwise stated, these features may also be
available as factory fitted options. Engine Coolant Immersion Heater 6--3
Maintenance requirements for these features will be Transmission Oil Heater 6--3
found in Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance.
Rotating Beacon 6--4
This subjects covered in this section are shown on Auxiliary Headlights 6--4
the right. A comprehensive index is provided at the
end of this book. 40 Amp Socket and Cable 6--5
Battery Isolator Switch 6--6
Dynamic Front Fenders 6--7
6--1

SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES
INTELLIVIEW II MONITOR
(where fitted)
The optional Intelliview II monitor provides a

comprehensive range of information on tractor
operating functions.
It can also be used to store, process and display

information relating to applications and work
environments.
USB Port
A USB port is located at the top of the left--hand cab

’C’ pillar. This port is a direct link to the monitor and
provides the ability to upload and download
information between the monitor and a USB storage
device.
NOTE: Details on the operation of the monitor and

ISO electrical system can be found in the Intelliview
II Operator’s Manual.
ISO Connector
Implements equipped with an ISO standard

electronic control unit/s can be connected to the
monitor via the multi--pin ISO connector at the rear
of the tractor.
6--2

COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER
WARNING
To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an
unearthed or inadequate extension lead with the
coolant or oil heater. Always use an earthed, three
core extension lead, which is rated for at least a 15
amp load, in conjunction with a residual current
circuit breaker or earth leakage trip device.
This accessory consists of a heating element fitted

into one of the core plug apertures on the right--hand
side of the block. The heater is available in 115 or 230 5
volts A.C only. This accessory provides easier
starting down to --29° C (--20° F).
To operate the heater, connect the heater extension

cable to the socket (1) adjacent to the right--hand cab
steps. Plug the free end of the heater cable into a
suitable electrical outlet for up to four hours before
carrying out the cold weather starting procedure.
TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER
This accessory consists of a 115 or 230 volts A.C.

heating element installed in the transmission
housing. Connect the heater extension cable to the
plug (1) on the left side of the rear axle housing. This
accessory provides for faster warm up of the
transmission/hydraulic oil when operating in cold
climates.
To operate the heater, connect the plug on the free

end of the heater cable to a suitable 115 volt outlet
(using a voltage transformer, if necessary) for up to
four hours before starting the engine. 6
NOTE: The coolant or transmission oil heaters may

be left plugged in for more than four hours without
harm. However, no noticeable increase in the
heater’s effectiveness will be achieved after this
period.
6--3

ROTATING BEACON
The beacon switch is located in the control panel in

the roof. Press in the button identified with the
beacon symbol to provide power to the rotating
beacon socket outlet.
NOTE: Less cab models will have the beacon switch

located on the main switch panel on the right--hand
control console.
The roof beacon kit consists of a rotating beacon,

support bracket and fitting hardware to attach to the
roof of the tractor. 7
A socket connected to the tractor electrical circuit (1),

is provided each side of the cab at the rear of the
tractor. When not in use, ensure the socket cover is
replaced to prevent water ingress.
AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS
A set of additional dipping headlights are available for

use with front mounted equipment. Located on the
upper right and left--hand grab rails, the headlight
beams pass over front mounted equipment to
illuminate the road ahead.
To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the

switch on the lower left side of the instrument panel.
When switched on the auxiliary headlight beams
may be dipped using the multi--function switch on the
left of the steering column.
9
6--4

ADDITIONAL 40 AMP SOCKET
A second 4--pin, 40 amp socket is available as a

dealer installed accessory. The socket is mounted on
the underside of the lower, right-hand windscreen
frame.
A 4--pin to SAE 3--pin adaptor cable is available as

an accessory from your dealer. (See Figure 10).
4--PIN TO 3--PIN ADAPTOR
A 4--pin to SAE 3--pin adaptor cable is available as

an accessory from your dealer. The adaptor may be
used with the 4--pin, 40 amp implement socket.
10
6--5

BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH
Before disconnecting battery power with the isolator,

ensure the key--start and any other electrical
switches are turned OFF.
IMPORTANT: After turning the tractor key--start off,

wait for 60 seconds before isolating the battery
power. This will permit any unsaved information in
the tractor electronic processors to be memorised.
An inbuilt power reserve will maintain a small amount

of power to supply the electronic processors and
radio memories when the tractor battery is isolated.
Electronic Operation
The solenoid operated battery isolator is controlled

by a switch (1) located on the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar.
Depress the top of the switch to disconnect battery

power, an audible warning will sound for
approximately 5 seconds. Depress the bottom of the
switch to re--connect battery power.
IMPORTANT: When in the ’ON’ position, the isolator

switch solenoid consumes a small amount of
electrical power. If the tractor is left for an extended
period of time with the isolator on, battery power may 11
be reduced. Always turn the battery isolator switch
’OFF’ when the tractor is not in use.
NOTE: The key--start switch must be in the ’OFF’ or

’ACCESSORIES’ position to operate the battery
isolator, it will not function with the key--start in the
’ON’ (run) position.
Mechanical Operation
The mechanical isolator switch is attached to the

battery carrier on the right--hand side of the tractor.
Rotate the switch 1/4 turn anti--clockwise (position
’O’, red background) to disconnect battery power.
12
6--6

DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS

(where fitted)
Two types of optional front fender are available, both

offering a full range of adjustment to suit varying tyre
sizes and track widths. The method of adjustment is
very similar for both, but the following text describes
the setting of the dynamic fender. Ensure all fixing
bolts are re--tightened after adjustment.
Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels as the

tractor is steered. As the steering angle increases, a
spring centred pivot in the fender mount restricts the
turn angle of the fenders. This prevents interference
with the tractor hood or loader frame while allowing
the wheels to continue turning beneath the fender.
As a result, tighter turns can be achieved that would
not be possible with a conventional fender,
particularly at narrower track settings.
Lateral adjustment, fender support

A fender may be moved horizontally, towards or
away from the tractor, by relocating the metal shims
(2) either side of the fender support (1).
Vertical adjustment
The fender may be moved vertically by relocating the
bolts (3) in the appropriate holes in the fender
support. A number of the holes are elongated
allowing the fender to be tilted forward or rearward.
Fender turn stop 13

An adjustable stop bolt (3), is fitted to both fender
support brackets. When turning, the bolt contacts a
fixed stop (2) on the axle housing restricting the angle
at which the fender will turn while allowing the wheels
to continue turning beneath the fender. The stops
may require adjusting if the track width or tyre size is
changed.
Lateral adjustment, fender

The support and bracket attachment points (1)
beneath the fender, provide further lateral
adjustment allowing the fender to be centered over
the tyre.
14
Narrow Track Settings
With certain options and/or tyre sizes, the smaller
track settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyre or rim and any part of the
fender or attaching hardware.
6--7

NOTES
6--8

SECTION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
General Subject Page
General Dimensions 7--2
The specification figures in this section are provided
for your information and guidance. For further Vehicle Weights 7--5
information concerning your tractor and equipment,
consult your New Holland dealer. Lubricant and Fluid Capacities 7--6
Engine 7--7
New Holland policy is one of continuous
improvement and the right to change prices, Fuel System 7--7
specification or equipment at any time without notice
is reserved. Cooling System 7--8
Transmission Options 7--8

All data given in this manual is subject to production
variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate Maximum Operating Angles 7--9
only. The illustrations do not necessarily show
tractors in standard condition or imply that these Rear Power Take Off 7--9
features are available in all countries. For exact
information about any particular tractor, please Front Power Take Off 7--9
consult your New Holland dealer. Hydraulic System 7--10
Rear 3--Point Hitch 7--10
Remote Control Valves 7--14
Front 3--Point Hitch 7--14
Brakes 7--15
Steering 7--15
Electrical Equipment 7--16
Hardware Torque Tables 7--17
7--1

SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS ALL MODELS
NOTE:The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown.
Allowance must be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions:
T7030, T7040, T7050 and T7060
2WD 4WD 4WD 4WD

Standard Suspension SuperSteer
The following dimensions are based Front 11.00 x 16 480/70R30 (4WD models)
on tractors with tyre sizes shown: Rear 580/70R42 (2WD and 4WD)
A. Width across fenders

Standard fenders All models, 2158 mm (84.9 in.)
Extended fenders All models, 2334 mm (91.8 in.)
Extra wide fenders All models, 2682 mm (105.5 in.)
7--2

GENERAL DIMENSIONS T7030, T7040, T7050 and T7060
2WD 4WD 4WD 4WD

B. Maximum ground clearance ---- All 4WD models, 613 mm (24.1 in.)
below front axle
C. Front track setting mm 1545 -- 2187 All 4WD models, 1552 -- 2269
in 60.8 -- 86.3 All 4WD models, 61.1 -- 89.3
D. Rear track setting

-- with flange axle All models, 1426--2026 mm (56.1 -- 79.8 in.)
-- with 98 in. bar axle All models, 1524--2438 mm (60.0 -- 96.0 in.)
-- with 112 in. bar axle All models, 1524--2794 mm (60.0 -- 110.0 in.)
-- with 119 in. bar axle All models, 1524 -- 2998 mm (60.0 -- 118.0 in.)
E. Height to top of exhaust All models, 3165 mm (124.6 in.)
F. Height to:
-- Top of cab All models, 3065 mm (120.6 in.)
G. *Ground clearance below drawbar

Swinging drawbars All models, 398 -- 523 mm (15.6 -- 20.5 in)
Tow hooks All models, 314 -- 392 mm (12.3 -- 15.4 in)
H. Front hitch projection

Links horizontal ---- 4WD models only, 855 mm (33.6 in.)
Links in transport position ---- 4WD models only, 415 mm (16.3 in)
*Ground clearance below the swinging drawbar or tow hook will be dependent on type of drawbar and tyre size.
The figures shown are for guidance only.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--3

GENERAL DIMENSIONS T7030, T7040, T7050 and T7060
2WD 4WD 4WD 4WD

J. Wheelbase mm 3028 2884 2884 2977

in 119.2 113.5 113.5 117.2
K. Overall length to end of mm 4918 4918 4918 4918

lower links in 193.6 193.6 193.6 193.6
Minimum turn radius

-- 2WD without brakes m 4.83 -- -- --
ft. 15.8 -- -- --
-- without brakes at 61.0 in. front m -- 6.90 6.90 5.94

track setting (16.9 R28 tyres) ft. -- 22.6 22.6 19.4
-- without brakes at 72.0 in. front m -- 6.26 6.26 5.7

track setting (600/65R28 tyres) ift. -- 20.5 20.5 18.7
NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and steering stops adjusted to provide 20 mm
(0.78in) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0° front axle oscillation.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--4

TYPICAL OPERATING WEIGHTS T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
*2WD -- with cab

On front axle 1970 kg (4343 lbs)
On rear axle 4454 kg (9819 lbs)
Total weight 6415 kg (14142 lbs)
2WD Maximum Permissible Weight

**4WD -- with cab, standard axle

**4WD -- with cab, SuperSteer axle

**4WD -- with cab, Suspended axle

4WD Maximum Permissible Weight

NOTE:The above weights are approximate and are based on standard production tractors with full fuel
tank, but without driver, or additional equipment.
* Standard tractor without front or rear ballast and with 100 ltrs (26.4 US gals) of fuel.
** Includes front weight pack ’C’ (1087 kg (2396 lbs).
7--5

CAPACITIES T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Fuel tank 440 litres (116.2 US gals)

(Total, both tanks)
Cooling system 26 litres (6.9 US gals)
Engine 15 litres (3.96 US gals)

(including filter)
Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics 100.0 litres (26.4 US gals)
Front P.T.O. 400 ml. (0.42 US qts)
4WD Front hubs (w/o brakes) 2.15 litres (2.3 US qts)

(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front hubs (with brakes) x.x litres (x.x US qts)

(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front axle differential 14.0 litres (14.8 US qts)

(All axles)
Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the dipstick
with the tractor parked on level ground. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote control
valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the
oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in. damage to the rear axle and transmission
components.
With the rear axle oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick, the following maximum oil volumes may be taken
from the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment without the need to further top up the system:
Operating stationary equipment on level ground: 21 litres (22.1 U.S. qts)
Operating while driving in. normal conditions (flat fields) for short periods only: 15 litres (15.8 U.S. qts)
Operating in. other conditions, including longer periods of use: 9 litres (9.5 U.S. qts)
Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be added to the rear axle above the normal FULL level is 7
litres (7.3 U.S. qts). With this quantity added to the rear axle, the quantities stated above may be increased by
the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts), but no more.
7--6

ENGINE T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Engine power (unboosted) Kw 123 134 145 157

at rated speed, (ECE R120) Hp (cv) 167 182 197 213
Engine power (boosted) Kw 150 160 172 175
at rated speed, (ECE R120) Hp (cv) 204 218 234 238
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders
Valves per cylinder 4 valves per cylinder
Aspiration Turbocharged and air to air intercooled
Bore 104 mm (4.0 in)
Stroke 132 mm (5.19 in)
Displacement 6728 cm3 (410 in3)
Compression ratio 16.5 : 1
Firing order 1.5.3.6.2.4
Rated engine speed rev/min All Models, 2200 e.r.p.m.
Idle speed rev/min All Models, 650 +/ -- 50 e.r.p.m.
Maximum no--load speed rev/min All Models, 2375 e.r.p.m.
Valve tappet clearance (cold)

Intake 0.25 mm (0.009 in)
Exhaust 0.51 mm (0.020 in)
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Electronically controlled, high pressure common rail
Dynamic timing (°BTDC) 3.4 5.5 6.3 6.3
7--7

COOLING SYSTEM T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Type Pressurised, with full flow bypass and recovery tank
Vistronic fan
-- Number of blades 7 blades
-- Diameter 510 mm. (20.0 in)
Thermostat
-- Begins to open at °C 81 degrees
°F 178 degrees
-- Fully open at °C 96 degrees

°F 205 degrees
Radiator pressure cap bar 1.0 bar (14.5 lbf.in2)
TRANSMISSION
Type Full Powershift with Power Shuttle
Depending on tractor specification,

a number of transmission options
are available
17 x 6 -- 2WD and 4WD 30 km/h (18.4 MPH)*
18 x 6 -- 4WD only 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 Economy -- 4WD only 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 -- 4WD only 50 km/h (31.0 MPH)*

(with front brakes & suspension)
Creeper Gears
34 x 12 -- 2WD and 4WD 0.29 -- 30 km/h (0.18 -- 18.4 MPH)*
36 x 12 -- 4WD only 0.29 -- 40 km/h (0.18 -- 24.8 MPH)*

(with front brakes & suspension)
Creeper Gear Operation Electronic switch
*Approximate speeds depending on tyre size
7--8

MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Front end up 30 degrees

Rear end up 30 degrees
Right side up 30 degrees
Left side up 30 degrees
REAR POWER TAKE OFF
Type
-- Standard (except North America) 540E/1000 shiftable, independent
-- Optional 540/1000 shiftable, independent
-- Optional 540/1000 non--shiftable, independent
Engine speed @ PTO speed

-- 540 1950 e.r.p.m.
-- 540E 1526 e.r.p.m.
-- 1000 (shiftable and non--shiftable) 2178 e.r.p.m.
Maximum P.T.O power at Kw

Rated Engine Speed Hp.
* With Power Boost
Fender mounted PTO controls Optional

(except North America)
FRONT POWER TAKE OFF

(4WD only)*
Type Single speed, fully independent

-- Shaft 6 or 21 Spline 39.4mm (1.375 in.)
-- Actuation Elecro--hydraulic
-- Direction of rotation Anti--clockwise
Engine speed @ PTO speed

-- 1000 rpm only All Models, 2120 e.r.p.m.
Maximum Power Output Kw All Models, 96.9 Kw

Hp. All Models, 130 Hp
*Not SuperSteer models
7--9

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Type Variable displacement hydraulic pump with Electronic Draft

Control (EDC)
Maximum system pressure

at rated engine speed
@ 2100 e.r.p.m. 200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 lbf.in2)
Flow at rated engine speed

-- with standard pump 120.0 l/min (31.7 US gal/min)
-- with optional ’Hi--Flow’ pump 150.0 l/min (39.6 US gal/min)
THREE POINT HITCH
Linkage Category
-- with EDC, standard Category II/III w/quick attach link ends
-- with EDC, Optional Category II/III w/flexible link ends
LIFT CAPACITY
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:
with 2 x 80mm assist rams

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 3854 (8496)
-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 3640 (8024)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
pressure, links horizontal:

NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--10

LIFT CAPACITY T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060

(Continued)

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4609 ((10160)



7--11


(Continued)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link
ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:

Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum
hydraulic pressure, links horizontal:



7--12


(Continued)


7--13

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
With mechanical remote Std. 2 non--configurable valves

valves Opt. 3 or 4 non--configurable valves
With mechanical remote Opt. 3 or 4 configurable valves

valves
With electronic remote Opt. 3, 4 or 5 valves

valves
Maximum pressure at 200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 psi)

rated engine speed
Maximum flow through one 95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3US gal/min)

valve at rated engine speed
ISO Power Beyond couplers Opt. Compatible with configurable and electronic valves
FRONT 3--POINT HITCH
Linkage Category Category II (ISO 8759/2)
Lift capacity through full lift range:

@ ball ends Standard and suspended axles -- 3859 kg.
. with Supersteer axle -- 3074 kg.
@ 610 mm (24 in) Standard and suspended axles -- 3788 kg.
in front of link ends with Supersteer axle -- 3074 kg.
FRONT REMOTE VALVE

COUPLERS
With mechanical rear mount Optional, dealer installed accessory

remote valves
With electronic rear mount Optional, dealer installed accessory

remote valves
With electronic mid mount Opt. 2, 3 or 4 electronic valves

remote valves and joystick
Maximum flow through one 95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3 US gal/min)

valve at rated engine speed
7--14

BRAKES T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Service brake Self adjusting, oil immersed disc acting on differential shafts
with power assistance
Number of discs per side 2 friction and 2 steel
Front brakes (optional 4WD) Oil immersed disc in each hub
Parking brake Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft

-- Number of discs 6 discs
STEERING
Type Hydrostatic with tilt/telescoping steering wheel
Turns from lock to lock

-- 2WD All Models 4.4 turns
-- 4WD Std/Suspended axles All Models 4.3 turns
-- 4WD Supersteer axles All Models 4.0 turns
-- 4WD with Fast Steer 10° left or right from the sraight ahead position
Maximum angle of turn

-- 2WD standard axle 55 degrees
-- 4WD standard axle 55 degrees
-- 4WD suspension axle 55 degrees
-- 4WD SuperSteer axle 65 degrees
Front wheel toe in

-- 2 wheel drive 3 -- 6.5 mm (0.11 -- 0.25 in.)
Front wheel alignment

-- 4 wheel drive 0 +/-- 3 mm (0 +/-- 0.12 in.)
7--15

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT T7030 T7040 T7050 T7060
Alternator 12 volt, 150 amp
Battery Minimum maintenance 12 volt 1300 cca

-- Isolator, mechanical Optional
-- Isolator, electronic Optional
Starting motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated

4.2 kw -- geared reduction
Cold starting aid Optional inlet manifold grid heater and fuel heater
Bulb rating and type

-- headlights 60/55W -- H4
-- parking lights (front) 5W -- R5W
-- parking lights (rear) 5W -- P21/5W
-- work lights (hi--mount) 55W -- H3
-- work lights (auxiliary) 50W -- GE866
-- turn indicators (front) 21W -- PY21W
-- turn indicators (rear) 21W -- R21W
-- stop lights 21W -- P21/5W
-- licence plate lights 5W -- R5W
-- rotating beacon 55W -- H1
-- SMV lights (N America only) 21W--P21W
and extremity lights
7--16

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES
IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS

NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C
SIZE or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8)
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20)
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35)
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57)
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88)
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125)
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172)
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (305)
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494)
1.0 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE SAE SAE

GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8
REGULAR SAE SAE
NUTS GRADE 5 GRADE 8
HEX NUTS NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFRETIAL NOTCH GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFRENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE C SIX MARKS
MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
GRADE IDENTIFICATION AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C
7--17

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES
IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT

CL.8
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED w/CL8.8
SIZE w/ZnCr w/ZnCr w/ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
IDENTIFICATION
HEX CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING
7--18

SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Dealer’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j All operative checks are to be performed with the
tractor at normal operating temperature.
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . j
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F) j 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . j 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
(air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . j adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . . j 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
6. Hydraulic System:
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . j
Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
9. Check front axle differential
and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . j
Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
10. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . . j
7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
11. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . . j switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
12. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts 8. Calibrate Power Command
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j transmission clutches (see page 4--56) . j
13. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . j PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
14. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness j 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
15. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) . . j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . j
16. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
17. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . . j
4. Differential lock engagement and
18. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . j disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
19. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . . j 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
20. Check air intake and intercooler
6. All optional equipment and accessories j
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
21. Check cooling system hose connections j
1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . . j
22. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts . j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
SERVICE PERFORMED
Tractor Model Tractor Serial Number
Owner’s signature Date Dealer’s signature Date
8--1

8--2

CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Owner’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j All operative checks are to be performed with the
tractor at normal operating temperature.
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . j
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F) j 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . j 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
(air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . j adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . . j 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
6. Hydraulic System:
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . j
Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
9. Check front axle differential
and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . j
Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
10. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . . j
7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
11. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . . j switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
12. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts 8. Calibrate Power Command
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j transmission clutches (see page 4--56) . j
13. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . j PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
14. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness j 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
15. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) . . j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . j
16. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
17. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . . j
4. Differential lock engagement and
18. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . j disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
19. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . . j 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
20. Check air intake and intercooler
6. All optional equipment and accessories j
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
21. Check cooling system hose connections j
1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . . j
22. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts . j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
SERVICE PERFORMED
Tractor Model Tractor Serial Number
Owner’s signature Date Dealer’s signature Date
8--3

8--4

SECTION 9
INDEX
A Centre display (LCD) ,

3--Point hitch position,
2--39
2--40
Accessories Power take off speed, 2--40
40 amp socket, 6--5 Rear wheel slip, 2--39
Adaptor cable 4--pin to 3--pin, 6--5 Cleaning the tractor, 1--1
Auxiliary headlights, 6--4 Cleaning the cab interior, 4--71
Battery isolator switch, 6--6 Cleaning the exterior, 4--71
Coolant immersion heater, 6--3 Seat and seat belt, 4--71
Rotating beacon, 6--4
Clutch pedal, 2--30
Transmission oil heater, 6--3
Console light, 2--9
Additional oil supply for remote services, 3--90
Coolant temperature gauge, 2--35
Adjustable air vents, 2--10
Air conditioner control, 2--10
Air--operated trailer brakes, 3--121 D
Airborne noise emission, 1--20 Differential lock operation, 2--87
Alarm functions, 2--57 Digital clock, 2--41
Analogue and digital instrument cluster, 2--35 Dot matrix display, 2--39
Audible alarms, 2--57 Area accumulator, 2--51
Area per hour forecaster, 2--50
Automatic cab temperature control, 2--12
Error codes, 2--58
Automatic engine shutdown, 3--8 Odometer (distance record), 2--50
Drawbars and towing attachments, 3--106
Extendible pick--up hitch, 3--117
B Rear tow hitch, 3--111
Safety chain, 3--110
Ballasting and tyres, 3--144 Swinging drawbars, 3--106
Ballast charts, 3--150
Front weights, 3--147 Dual wheels, 3--142
Liquid tyre ballast, 3--149
Rear wheel weights, 3--147
With front axle suspension, 3--144 E
Bar type rear axle, 3--136
Ecology and the environment, 1--6
Track adjustment, 3--137
Electrical power sockets, 2--19
Beacon power socket, 2--20
Implement sockets, 2--21
Electronic draft control, 3--57
C Control pod,
Draft control operation,
3--58
3--62
Cab air filters, 2--14 Dynamic ride control, 3--66
EDC control panel, 3--58
Cab air recirculation, 2--14 External 3--point hitch controls, 3--52 , 3--67
Cab and platform controls, 2--2 Hitch position display, 3--59
Indicator lights, 3--59
Cab general information,
External rear view mirrors, 2--7 Position control operation, 3--65
Pre--operation settings, 3--61
Cab Introduction, 2--4 System malfunction warning, 3--59
Cab pressurisation monitor, 2--15 Transport lock, 3--66
9--1

SECTION 9 -- INDEX
Electronic remote valves, 3--75 Front wheel track adjustment, 3--126

Connecting remote cylinders, 3--87 Four wheel drive, 3--129
Control levers, 3--75 Two wheel drive, 3--126
Manual lever operation, 3--82
Fuel level gauge, 2--35
Operating continuous flow equipment, 3--88
Relieving system pressure, 3--86
Setting the flow rate, 3--80
Timed programme operation, 3--83 H
Double acting service, 3--83
Hand throttle, 2--31
Replaying a timed programme, 3--86
Single acting service, 3--84 Hazard warning lights switch, 2--34
Transport lock, 3--75 Headland turn sequence, 3--13
Visual displays, 3--79 , 3--81 HTS symbols, 3--17
End User Licence Agreement, 1--2 Heater blower control, 2--9
Engine power management, 3--10 Heater temperature control, 2--9
Engine speed management, 3--11 Hydraulic remote control valves,
Engine tachometer, 2--35 Configurable detent operation, 3--70
Enhanced keypad and
performance monitor, 2--48
I
F Implement cable/harness routing, 2--18
Implement monitor installation, 2--17
Fast Steer Operation, 3--24 In cab storage, 2--18
Fault finding Indicator and warning lights, 2--36
Brakes, 5--10
Cab, 5--10 Instructional seat, 2--29
Electrical system, 5--11 Instrument console, 2--32
Engine, 5--4
Error codes, 5--1 Interior light, 2--9
Hydraulics, 5--8 International symbols, 1--19
Power Command transmission, 5--7
Three--point hitch, 5--9
First 50 hour service, 1--1 K
Flange type rear axle, 3--134 Key--start switch, 2--32
Track adjustment, 3--135
Foot throttle, 2--30
Footbrake pedals, 2--31 L
Four wheel drive, 2--89 Lubrication and maintenance
Operating precautions, 2--90 4WD axle oil level, 4--39
Front 3--point hitch, 3--45 Adjust headlamp/worklamp beam, 4--60
Adjust parking brake, 4--32
Front axle oscillation stops, 3--132 Adjust pick--up hitch latching, 4--59
Front axle suspension, 2--91 Air brake drier reservoir, 4--53
Bleed fuel system, 4--55
Front fenders (4WD), 6--7 Cab air filters, 4--18 , 4--40
Front P.T.O., 3--40 Cab suspension adjustment, 4--60
Calibrate transmission clutches, 4--56
Front P.T.O. and 3--point hitch, 3--40
Change 4WD axle oil, 4--42 , 4--43
Front tow hitch, 3--148 Change fuel filters, 4--38
Front wheel alignment, 3--128 Change transmission oil
Four wheel drive, 3--133 and filters, 4--35 , 4--41
Two wheel drive, 3--128 Check battery, 4--29 , 4--44
9--2

SECTION 9 -- INDEX
Check brake pedal latch, 4--58 Programming reverse gear ratios, 2--79
Check drive belt tension, 4--28 Shuttle lever, 2--68
Check engine air intake connections, 4--37 Speed matching, 2--78
Check engine valve tappet clearance, 4--51
Pre--operation checks, 3--2
Check wheel nut torque, 4--26
Clean radiator/condenser cores, 4--17 Pressure washing the tractor, 3--2
Drain air brake reservoir, 4--16 Product identification, 1--3
Drain cooling system, 4--46
Drain remote valve reservoir, 4--59 Programming the visual displays, 2--52
Electrical system protection, 4--72 Audible beep -- on/off, 2--54
Engine air cleaner, 4--11 , 4--36 , 4--50 Calibrating for wheel slip, 2--53
Engine coolant level, 4--14 Programming keys, 2--52
Engine oil and filter change, 4--33 Service period reminder, 2--55
Engine oil level, 4--15 Setting implement width, 2--53
First 50 hour service, 4--2 Setting wheel slip alarm, 2--54
First 50 hours of operation, 4--1 Programming tractor functions, 3--1
Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level, 4--32 , 4--43
Protective guards, 4--5
Fuel requirements, 4--3
Fuel system water separator, 4--13
Fuelling the tractor, 4--2
Fuse and relay locations, 4--64 R
General information, 4--1
Inspect poly V--belt, 4--30 Radio/cassette player, 2--16
Light bulb replacement, 4--62 Rear power take--off (PTO), 3--26
Lubricants and coolants, 4--8 Attaching equipment, 3--28
Lubricate grease fittings, 4--20 Auto PTO function, 3--36 , 3--42
Lubrication and maintenance chart, 4--10 Changing the output shaft, 3--35
Safety precautions, 4--1 External PTO controls, 3--38
Service air conditioner, 4--54 General information, 3--30
Transmission and rear axle oil level, 4--31 Operating precautions, 3--29
Tyre pressures, 4--27 Two speed shiftable PTO, 3--33
Windscreen wash reservoir, 4--16 Two--speed with interchangeable shafts, 3--31
Relay and fuse panel covers, 4--7
M Remote valves, load sensing type,

Bleeding remote cylinders,
3--69
3--74
Multi--function light switch, 2--33 Connecting double--acting cylinders, 3--72
Connecting remote cylinders, 3--71
Connecting single--acting cylinders, 3--73
O Continuous flow hydraulic equipment,
Operating remote valves and
3--73
Operator Protective Structure, 1--13 hydraulic lift simultaneously, 3--74

Right--hand footstep access, 4--6
Running in procedure, 3--2
P
Panel light dimming control, 2--40
Parking brake, 2--30
S
Power Command transmission, 2--66 Safety decals, 1--14
Auto shift function, 2--71 Driving the tractor, 1--8
Changing gear shift threshold, 2--76
Safety precautions, 1--7
Clutch/inching pedal, 2--67
Diesel fuel, 1--12
Creeper gears, 2--81
Operating the P.T.O., 1--10
Driving the tractor, 2--69
Operating the tractor, 1--9
Error codes, 2--82
Personal safety, 1--7
Go To mode, 2--77
Servicing the tractor, 1--11
Ground speed charts, 2--66
The tractor, 1--7
Powershift control, 2--67
9--3

SECTION 9 -- INDEX
Using chemical sprays, 2--14 Remote control valves, 7--14

Seat belt, 2--29 Steering, 7--15
Seats, 2--22 Transmission, 7--8
Deluxe air suspension seat, 2--24 Weights, 7--5
Standard air suspension seat, 2--22
Trailer braking systems, 3--119
Service parts, 1--1
Transporting the tractor, 3--3
Starting the engine, 3--5
Tyre inflation, 3--151
Steering column adjustment, 2--32 Tyre pressures and permissible loads, 3--152
Steering stops, 3--132 Tyre symbol markings, 3--152 , 3--153
Stopping the engine, 3--8
Sun visor, 2--6
U
Using battery booster, 3--4
T Using remote hydraulic equipment, 3--92 , 7--6
Attaching equipment, 3--93
Automatic stabilisers, 3--103 V
Flexible link ends, 3--98
Hitch float, 3--96 Vehicle weight information, 1--5
Lift rod adjustment, 3--96
Hydraulic adjust, 3--97
Quick hitch, 3--99 W
Sway block stabilisers, 3--104
Telescopic stabilisers, 3--101 Warning and advisory symbols, 2--60
Top link adjustment, 3--95 Warranty, 1--1
Hydraulic adjust, 3--97
Top link bracket, 3--98 Windscreen wash/wipe control, 2--34
Towing the tractor, 3--3 Worklamp/beacon switch panel, 2--16
Tractor ground speed display, 2--42
Calibrating the ground speed display,
Ground speed calibration numbers,
2--43
2--47
Numerical listing
Tractor Specification Numerical Listing, 4--11
Brakes, 7--15 When the warning symbol appears, 4--11
Capacities, 7--6 Every 10 hours of operation, 4--14
Cooling system, 7--8 Every 50 hours of operation, 4--17
Electrical equipment, 7--16 Every 100 hours of operation, 4--28
Engine, 7--7 Every 300 hours of operation, 4--29
Front 3--point hitch, 7--14 Every 600 hours of operation, 4--33
Front power take off, 7--9 Every 1200 hours or 12 months
Fuel system, 7--7 of operation, 4--40
Hardware tightening torques, 7--17 Every 1200 hours or 24 months
Hydraulic system, 7--10 of operation, 4--46
Maximum operating angle, 7--9 Every 36 months of operation, 4--54
Rear power take off, 7--9 General maintenance, 4--55
9--4

CNH UK LIMITED
AFTER SALES -- Technical Information
All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this

publication may be reproduced.
New Holland policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification
or equipment at any time without notice is reserved.
All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are
approximate only. The illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition or imply
that these features are available in all countries. For exact information about any particular tractor,
please consult your New Holland dealer.

TEXT REMOVED

t7030 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

t7030 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

T7030

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This tractor complies strictly with the European Regulations on electro-magnetic

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Section 3 -- Field Operation

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1

Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

TO THE OWNER SAFETY

GENERAL Pages 1--7 to 1--13 inclusive list the precautions to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS

-- You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.

-- No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The tractor and major components are identified

The following provides the locations of the

Vehicle Identification Plate

The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 1 is

The serial number and model identification

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The engine serial number and date of manufacture

Engine Serial No.

Further information relating to engine adjustments

The serial number plate (1) is located on the

Driveline Serial No.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The cab serial number and other information is on the

Cab Serial No.

Vehicle Weight Information

The Vehicle Weighting Plate provides important

The figures shown are the maximum permissible

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling

3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or

2. When driving on public roads, have

3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and

6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.

6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when

15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories